[Date Prev][Date Next][Thread Prev][Thread Next][Date Index][Thread Index]
[elpa] externals/auctex 945aba3d41: Release GNU AUCTeX 13.1.6
|
From: |
Tassilo Horn |
|
Subject: |
[elpa] externals/auctex 945aba3d41: Release GNU AUCTeX 13.1.6 |
|
Date: |
Fri, 18 Nov 2022 14:33:07 -0500 (EST) |
branch: externals/auctex
commit 945aba3d418657b1a66ea83b98728017cc5b92b5
Author: Tassilo Horn <tsdh@gnu.org>
Commit: Tassilo Horn <tsdh@gnu.org>
Release GNU AUCTeX 13.1.6
* GNU AUCTeX Version 13.1.6 released.
---
auctex.el | 2 +-
auctex.info | 4870 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++--------------------------
preview-latex.info | 1094 ++++++------
tex-site.el | 4 +-
4 files changed, 3012 insertions(+), 2958 deletions(-)
diff --git a/auctex.el b/auctex.el
index fef62e4886..d2cb07e05d 100644
--- a/auctex.el
+++ b/auctex.el
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
;; Copyright (C) 2014-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-;; Version: 13.1.5
+;; Version: 13.1.6
;; URL: https://www.gnu.org/software/auctex/
;; Maintainer: auctex-devel@gnu.org
;; Notifications-To: auctex-diffs@gnu.org
diff --git a/auctex.info b/auctex.info
index 878bf20772..1c77295f29 100644
--- a/auctex.info
+++ b/auctex.info
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-This is auctex.info, produced by makeinfo version 6.8 from auctex.texi.
+This is auctex.info, produced by makeinfo version 7.0 from auctex.texi.
-This manual is for AUCTeX (version 13.1.5 from 2022-10-20), a
+This manual is for AUCTeX (version 13.1.6 from 2022-11-18), a
sophisticated TeX environment for Emacs.
- Copyright (C) 1992-1995, 2001, 2002, 2004-2022 Free Software
+ Copyright © 1992-1995, 2001, 2002, 2004-2022 Free Software
Foundation, Inc.
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Foundation, Inc.
Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts and no
Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section
- entitled "GNU Free Documentation License."
+ entitled “GNU Free Documentation License.”
INFO-DIR-SECTION Emacs
START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
* AUCTeX: (auctex). A sophisticated TeX environment for Emacs.
@@ -42,12 +42,12 @@ manual is useful by itself, but together they provide an
environment
where you will make very few LaTeX errors, and makes it easy to find the
errors that may slip through anyway.
- It is a good idea to make a printout of AUCTeX's reference card
-'tex-ref.tex' or one of its typeset versions.
+ It is a good idea to make a printout of AUCTeX’s reference card
+‘tex-ref.tex’ or one of its typeset versions.
If you want to make AUCTeX aware of style files and multifile
documents right away, insert the following in your init file (usually
-'~/.emacs.d/init.el').
+‘~/.emacs.d/init.el’).
(setq TeX-auto-save t)
(setq TeX-parse-self t)
@@ -61,15 +61,15 @@ navigation and a few other things. (*Note
(reftex)Installation::.)
see *note Introduction: (preview-latex)Top.
There is a mailing list for general discussion about AUCTeX: write a
-mail with "subscribe" in the subject to <auctex-request@gnu.org> to join
+mail with “subscribe” in the subject to <auctex-request@gnu.org> to join
it. Send contributions to <auctex@gnu.org>.
Bug reports should go to <bug-auctex@gnu.org>, suggestions for new
features, and pleas for help should go to either <auctex-devel@gnu.org>
(the AUCTeX developers), or to <auctex@gnu.org> if they might have
-general interest. Please use the command 'M-x TeX-submit-bug-report
-<RET>' to report bugs if possible. You can subscribe to a low-volume
-announcement list by sending "subscribe" in the subject of a mail to
+general interest. Please use the command ‘M-x TeX-submit-bug-report
+<RET>’ to report bugs if possible. You can subscribe to a low-volume
+announcement list by sending “subscribe” in the subject of a mail to
<info-auctex-request@gnu.org>.
* Menu:
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ announcement list by sending "subscribe" in the subject of a
mail to
* Appendices:: Copying, Changes, Development, FAQ, Texinfo
mode
* Indices:: Indices
- -- The Detailed Node Listing --
+ — The Detailed Node Listing —
Introduction
@@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ Copying
AUCTeX primarily consists of Lisp files for Emacs, but there are also
installation scripts and files and TeX support files. All of those are
-"free"; this means that everyone is free to use them and free to
+“free”; this means that everyone is free to use them and free to
redistribute them on a free basis. The files of AUCTeX are not in the
public domain; they are copyrighted and there are restrictions on their
distribution, but these restrictions are designed to permit everything
@@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ several files.
One component of AUCTeX that LaTeX users will find attractive is
preview-latex, a combination of folding and in-source previewing that
-provides true "What You See Is What You Get" experience in your
+provides true “What You See Is What You Get” experience in your
sourcebuffer, while letting you retain full control.
More detailed information about the features and usage of AUCTeX can
@@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ be found in the remainder of this manual.
AUCTeX is written entirely in Emacs Lisp, and hence you can easily
add new features for your own needs. It is a GNU project and
-distributed under the 'GNU General Public License Version 3'.
+distributed under the ‘GNU General Public License Version 3’.
The most recent version is always available at
<https://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/auctex/>.
@@ -297,13 +297,13 @@ described in *note Changes::.
If you want to discuss AUCTeX with other users or its developers,
there are several mailing lists you can use.
- Send a mail with the subject "subscribe" to <auctex-request@gnu.org>
+ Send a mail with the subject “subscribe” to <auctex-request@gnu.org>
in order to join the general discussion list for AUCTeX. Articles
should be sent to <auctex@gnu.org>. In a similar way, you can subscribe
to the <info-auctex@gnu.org> list for just getting important
announcements about AUCTeX. The list <bug-auctex@gnu.org> is for bug
-reports which you should usually file with the 'M-x
-TeX-submit-bug-report <RET>' command. If you want to address the
+reports which you should usually file with the ‘M-x
+TeX-submit-bug-report <RET>’ command. If you want to address the
developers of AUCTeX themselves with technical issues, they can be found
on the discussion list <auctex-devel@gnu.org>.
@@ -315,12 +315,12 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Installation, Next: Quick
Start, Prev: Summary, Up:
The modern and strongly recommended way of installing AUCTeX is by using
the Emacs package manager integrated in Emacs 24 and greater (ELPA).
-Simply do 'M-x list-packages <RET>', mark the auctex package for
-installation with 'i', and hit 'x' to execute the installation
-procedure. That's all.
+Simply do ‘M-x list-packages <RET>’, mark the auctex package for
+installation with ‘i’, and hit ‘x’ to execute the installation
+procedure. That’s all.
- 'use-package' users can use this simple recipe in their
-'user-init-file' which essentially does the same as the manual
+ ‘use-package’ users can use this simple recipe in their
+‘user-init-file’ which essentially does the same as the manual
installation explained above.
(use-package tex
@@ -336,9 +336,9 @@ proceed to *note Quick Start::.
The remainder of this section is about installing AUCTeX from a
release tarball or from a checkout of the AUCTeX repository.
- Installing AUCTeX should be simple: merely './configure', 'make', and
-'make install' for a standard site-wide installation (most other
-installations can be done by specifying a '--prefix=...' option).
+ Installing AUCTeX should be simple: merely ‘./configure’, ‘make’, and
+‘make install’ for a standard site-wide installation (most other
+installations can be done by specifying a ‘--prefix=...’ option).
On many systems, this will already activate the package, making its
modes the default instead of the built-in modes of Emacs. If this is
@@ -364,7 +364,7 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Prerequisites, Next: Configure,
Up: Installation
1.2.1 Prerequisites
-------------------
- * GNU Emacs 25.1 or higher
+ • GNU Emacs 25.1 or higher
Using preview-latex requires a version of Emacs compiled with image
support.
@@ -384,32 +384,32 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Prerequisites, Next:
Configure, Up: Installation
of this manual. Instructions for checking out the source code
can be found at <https://savannah.gnu.org/git/?group=emacs>.
- * A working TeX installation
+ • A working TeX installation
Well, AUCTeX would be pointless without that. Processing
documentation requires TeX, LaTeX and Texinfo during installation.
- preview-latex requires Dvips or 'dvipng' for its operation in DVI
+ preview-latex requires Dvips or ‘dvipng’ for its operation in DVI
mode. The default configuration of AUCTeX is tailored for
TeX Live-based distributions, but can be adapted easily.
- * A recent Ghostscript
+ • A recent Ghostscript
This is needed for operation of preview-latex in both DVI and PDF
mode. Ghostscript version 7.07 or newer is required.
- * GNU make
+ • GNU make
Recent AUCTeX uses GNU make specific capabilities in the Makefiles.
- If your OS's default 'make' command is not GNU make, you have to
+ If your OS’s default ‘make’ command is not GNU make, you have to
obtain it in order to build AUCTeX by yourself. GNU make is
- sometimes provided under the name 'gmake' in your OS's binary
+ sometimes provided under the name ‘gmake’ in your OS’s binary
package system.
- * The Texinfo package
+ • The Texinfo package
Strictly speaking, you can get away without it if you are building
from the distribution tarball, have not modified any files and
- don't need a printed version of the manual: the pregenerated info
+ don’t need a printed version of the manual: the pregenerated info
file is included in the tarball. At least version 4.0 is required.
For some known issues with various software, see *note
@@ -428,24 +428,24 @@ files will be. To do so, run
(Note: if you have fetched AUCTeX from Git rather than a regular
release, you will have to first follow the instructions in
-'README.GIT').
+‘README.GIT’).
On many machines, you will not need to specify any options, but if
-'configure' cannot determine something on its own, you'll need to help
+‘configure’ cannot determine something on its own, you’ll need to help
it out with one of these options:
-'--prefix=PREFIX'
+‘--prefix=PREFIX’
All automatic placements for package components will be chosen from
- sensible existing hierarchies below this: directories like 'man',
- 'share' and 'bin' are supposed to be directly below PREFIX.
+ sensible existing hierarchies below this: directories like ‘man’,
+ ‘share’ and ‘bin’ are supposed to be directly below PREFIX.
Only if no workable placement can be found there, in some cases an
alternative search will be made in a prefix deduced from a suitable
binary.
- '/usr/local' is the default PREFIX, intended to be suitable for a
+ ‘/usr/local’ is the default PREFIX, intended to be suitable for a
site-wide installation. If you are packaging this as an operating
- system component for distribution, the setting '/usr' will probably
+ system component for distribution, the setting ‘/usr’ will probably
be the right choice. See *note Advice for package providers:: for
detail.
@@ -454,43 +454,43 @@ it out with one of these options:
directory. Consult *note Advice for non-privileged users:: for
addtional instructions.
-'--with-emacs=/PATH/TO/EMACS'
- If you are using a pretest which isn't in your 'PATH', or
- 'configure' is not finding the right Emacs executable, you can
+‘--with-emacs=/PATH/TO/EMACS’
+ If you are using a pretest which isn’t in your ‘PATH’, or
+ ‘configure’ is not finding the right Emacs executable, you can
specify it with this option.
-'--with-lispdir=LISPDIR'
- This option specifies the location of the 'site-lisp' directory
- within 'load-path' under which the files will get installed (the
- bulk will get installed in a subdirectory). './configure' should
+‘--with-lispdir=LISPDIR’
+ This option specifies the location of the ‘site-lisp’ directory
+ within ‘load-path’ under which the files will get installed (the
+ bulk will get installed in a subdirectory). ‘./configure’ should
figure this out by itself.
-'--with-auctexstartfile=auctex.el'
-'--with-previewstartfile=preview-latex.el'
+‘--with-auctexstartfile=auctex.el’
+‘--with-previewstartfile=preview-latex.el’
This is the name of the respective startup files. If LISPDIR
- contains a subdirectory 'site-start.d', the start files are placed
- there, and 'site-start.el' should load them automatically. Please
+ contains a subdirectory ‘site-start.d’, the start files are placed
+ there, and ‘site-start.el’ should load them automatically. Please
be aware that you must not move the start files after installation
since other files are found _relative_ to them.
-'--with-packagelispdir=auctex'
+‘--with-packagelispdir=auctex’
This is the directory where the bulk of the package gets located.
- The startfile adds this into 'load-path'.
+ The startfile adds this into ‘load-path’.
-'--with-auto-dir=/DIR'
+‘--with-auto-dir=/DIR’
You can use this option to specify the directory containing
- automatically generated information by 'M-x
- TeX-auto-generate-global <RET>'. It is not necessary for most TeX
- installs, but may be used if you don't like the directory that
+ automatically generated information by ‘M-x
+ TeX-auto-generate-global <RET>’. It is not necessary for most TeX
+ installs, but may be used if you don’t like the directory that
configure is suggesting.
-'--help'
+‘--help’
This is not an option specific to AUCTeX. A number of standard
- options to 'configure' exist, and we do not have the room to
+ options to ‘configure’ exist, and we do not have the room to
describe them here; a short description of each is available, using
- '--help'.
+ ‘--help’.
-'--disable-preview'
+‘--disable-preview’
This disables configuration and installation of preview-latex.
This option is not actually recommended. If your Emacs does not
support images, you should really upgrade to a newer version.
@@ -498,27 +498,27 @@ it out with one of these options:
and preview-latex separately in order to avoid confusion and
upgrade hassles if users install partial packages on their own.
-'--with-texmf-dir=/DIR'
-'--without-texmf-dir'
+‘--with-texmf-dir=/DIR’
+‘--without-texmf-dir’
This option is used for specifying a TDS-compliant directory
- hierarchy. Using '--with-texmf-dir=/DIR' you can specify where the
+ hierarchy. Using ‘--with-texmf-dir=/DIR’ you can specify where the
TeX TDS directory hierarchy resides, and the TeX files will get
- installed in '/DIR/tex/latex/preview/'.
+ installed in ‘/DIR/tex/latex/preview/’.
- If you use the '--without-texmf-dir' option, the TeX-related files
- will be kept in the Emacs Lisp tree, and at runtime the 'TEXINPUTS'
+ If you use the ‘--without-texmf-dir’ option, the TeX-related files
+ will be kept in the Emacs Lisp tree, and at runtime the ‘TEXINPUTS’
environment variable will be made to point there. You can install
- those files into your own TeX tree at some later time with 'M-x
- preview-install-styles <RET>'.
+ those files into your own TeX tree at some later time with ‘M-x
+ preview-install-styles <RET>’.
-'--with-tex-dir=/DIR'
+‘--with-tex-dir=/DIR’
If you want to specify an exact directory for the preview TeX
- files, use '--with-tex-dir=/DIR'. In this case, the files will be
- placed in '/DIR', and you'll also need the following option:
+ files, use ‘--with-tex-dir=/DIR’. In this case, the files will be
+ placed in ‘/DIR’, and you’ll also need the following option:
-'--with-doc-dir=/DIR'
+‘--with-doc-dir=/DIR’
This option may be used to specify where the TeX documentation
- goes. It is to be used when you are using '--with-tex-dir=/DIR',
+ goes. It is to be used when you are using ‘--with-tex-dir=/DIR’,
but is normally not necessary otherwise.
@@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Build/install and uninstall,
Next: Loading the packag
1.2.3 Build/install and uninstall
---------------------------------
-Once 'configure' has been run, simply enter
+Once ‘configure’ has been run, simply enter
make
@@ -555,23 +555,23 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Loading the package, Next:
Advice for package provide
-------------------------
You can detect the successful activation of AUCTeX and preview-latex in
-the menus after loading a LaTeX file like 'circ.tex': AUCTeX then gives
-you a 'Command' menu, and preview-latex gives you a 'Preview' menu.
+the menus after loading a LaTeX file like ‘circ.tex’: AUCTeX then gives
+you a ‘Command’ menu, and preview-latex gives you a ‘Preview’ menu.
With Emacs (or if you explicitly disabled use of the package system),
-the startup files 'auctex.el' and 'preview-latex.el' may already be in a
-directory of the 'site-start.d/' variety if your Emacs installation
+the startup files ‘auctex.el’ and ‘preview-latex.el’ may already be in a
+directory of the ‘site-start.d/’ variety if your Emacs installation
provides it. In that case they should be automatically loaded on
startup and nothing else needs to be done. If not, they should at least
-have been placed somewhere in your 'load-path'. You can then load them
+have been placed somewhere in your ‘load-path’. You can then load them
by placing the lines
(load "auctex.el" nil t t)
(load "preview-latex.el" nil t t)
-into your init file such as 'init.el' or '.emacs'.
+into your init file such as ‘init.el’ or ‘.emacs’.
- If you explicitly used '--with-lispdir', you may need to add the
-specified directory into Emacs' 'load-path' variable by adding something
+ If you explicitly used ‘--with-lispdir’, you may need to add the
+specified directory into Emacs’ ‘load-path’ variable by adding something
like
(add-to-list 'load-path "~/elisp")
@@ -605,20 +605,20 @@ files, in particular plain TeX users. There are various
ways to tell
AUCTeX even after auto-activation that it should not get used, and they
are described in *note Introduction to AUCTeX: Introduction.
- So if you have users that don't want to use the preinstalled AUCTeX,
+ So if you have users that don’t want to use the preinstalled AUCTeX,
they can easily get rid of it. Activating AUCTeX by default is
therefore a good choice.
If the installation procedure did not achieve this already by placing
-'auctex.el' and 'preview-latex.el' into a possibly existing
-'site-start.d' directory, you can do this by placing
+‘auctex.el’ and ‘preview-latex.el’ into a possibly existing
+‘site-start.d’ directory, you can do this by placing
(load "auctex.el" nil t t)
(load "preview-latex.el" nil t t)
-in the system-wide 'site-start.el'.
+in the system-wide ‘site-start.el’.
- The '--without-texmf-dir' option can be convenient for systems that
+ The ‘--without-texmf-dir’ option can be convenient for systems that
are intended to support more than a single TeX distribution. Since more
often than not TeX packages for operating system distributions are
either much more outdated or much less complete than separately provided
@@ -628,27 +628,27 @@ providing packages.
The following package structure would be adequate for a typical fully
supported Unix-like installation:
-'preview-tetex'
- Style files and documentation for 'preview.sty', placed into a TeX
+‘preview-tetex’
+ Style files and documentation for ‘preview.sty’, placed into a TeX
tree where it is accessible from the teTeX executables usually
delivered with a system. If there are other commonly used TeX
system packages, it might be appropriate to provide separate
packages for those.
-'auctex-emacs-tetex'
- This package will require the installation of 'preview-tetex' and
- will record in 'TeX-macro-global' where to find the TeX tree. It
+‘auctex-emacs-tetex’
+ This package will require the installation of ‘preview-tetex’ and
+ will record in ‘TeX-macro-global’ where to find the TeX tree. It
is also a good idea to run
emacs -batch -f TeX-auto-generate-global
when either AUCTeX or teTeX get installed or upgraded. If your
users might want to work with a different TeX distribution
(nowadays pretty common), instead consider the following:
-'auctex-emacs'
- This package will be compiled with '--without-texmf-dir' and will
- consequently contain the 'preview' style files in its private
+‘auctex-emacs’
+ This package will be compiled with ‘--without-texmf-dir’ and will
+ consequently contain the ‘preview’ style files in its private
directory. It will probably not be possible to initialize
- 'TeX-macro-global' to a sensible value, so running
- 'TeX-auto-generate-global' does not appear useful. This package
- would neither conflict with nor provide 'preview-tetex'.
+ ‘TeX-macro-global’ to a sensible value, so running
+ ‘TeX-auto-generate-global’ does not appear useful. This package
+ would neither conflict with nor provide ‘preview-tetex’.
File: auctex.info, Node: Advice for non-privileged users, Next: Installation
under MS Windows, Prev: Advice for package providers, Up: Installation
@@ -658,52 +658,52 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Advice for non-privileged
users, Next: Installation u
Often people without system administration privileges want to install
software for their private use. In that case you need to pass more
-options to the 'configure' script.
+options to the ‘configure’ script.
- The main expedient is using the '--prefix' option to the 'configure'
+ The main expedient is using the ‘--prefix’ option to the ‘configure’
script, and let it point to the personal home directory. In that way,
-resulting binaries will be installed under the 'bin' subdirectory of
-your home directory, manual pages under 'man' and so on. It is
+resulting binaries will be installed under the ‘bin’ subdirectory of
+your home directory, manual pages under ‘man’ and so on. It is
reasonably easy to maintain a bunch of personal software, since the
-prefix argument is supported by most 'configure' scripts.
+prefix argument is supported by most ‘configure’ scripts.
- You often need to specify '--with-lispdir' option as well. If you
-haven't installed Emacs under your home directory and use Emacs
-installed in system directories, the 'configure' script might not be
+ You often need to specify ‘--with-lispdir’ option as well. If you
+haven’t installed Emacs under your home directory and use Emacs
+installed in system directories, the ‘configure’ script might not be
able to figure out suitable place to install lisp files under your home
-directory. In that case, the 'configure' script would silently choose,
-by default, the 'site-lisp' directory within 'load-path' for the place,
+directory. In that case, the ‘configure’ script would silently choose,
+by default, the ‘site-lisp’ directory within ‘load-path’ for the place,
where administration privileges are usually required to put relevant
-files. Thus you will have to tell the 'configure' script explicitly
+files. Thus you will have to tell the ‘configure’ script explicitly
where to put those files by, e.g.,
-'--with-lispdir='/home/myself/share/emacs/site-lisp''.
-
- You'll have to add something like
-'/home/myself/share/emacs/site-lisp' to your 'load-path' variable, if it
-isn't there already.
-
- In addition, you will have to tell 'configure' script where to
-install TeX-related files such as 'preview.sty' if preview-latex isn't
-disabled. It is enough to specify '--with-texmf-dir=$HOME/texmf' for
-most typical cases, but you have to create the direcotry '$HOME/texmf'
-in advance if it doesn't exist. If this prescription doesn't work,
-consider using one or more of the options '--with-texmf-dir=/DIR',
-'--without-texmf-dir', '--with-tex-dir=/DIR' and '--with-doc-dir=/DIR'.
+‘--with-lispdir=‘/home/myself/share/emacs/site-lisp’’.
+
+ You’ll have to add something like
+‘/home/myself/share/emacs/site-lisp’ to your ‘load-path’ variable, if it
+isn’t there already.
+
+ In addition, you will have to tell ‘configure’ script where to
+install TeX-related files such as ‘preview.sty’ if preview-latex isn’t
+disabled. It is enough to specify ‘--with-texmf-dir=$HOME/texmf’ for
+most typical cases, but you have to create the direcotry ‘$HOME/texmf’
+in advance if it doesn’t exist. If this prescription doesn’t work,
+consider using one or more of the options ‘--with-texmf-dir=/DIR’,
+‘--without-texmf-dir’, ‘--with-tex-dir=/DIR’ and ‘--with-doc-dir=/DIR’.
See *note Configure:: for detail of these options.
Now here is another thing to ponder: perhaps you want to make it easy
for other users to share parts of your personal Emacs configuration. In
-general, you can do this by writing '~myself/' anywhere where you
+general, you can do this by writing ‘~myself/’ anywhere where you
specify paths to something installed in your personal subdirectories,
-not merely '~/', since the latter, when used by other users, will point
+not merely ‘~/’, since the latter, when used by other users, will point
to non-existent files.
For yourself, it will do to manipulate environment variables in your
-'.profile' resp. '.login' files. But if people will be copying just
+‘.profile’ resp. ‘.login’ files. But if people will be copying just
Elisp files, their copies will not work. While it would in general be
preferable if the added components where available from a shell level,
too (like when you call the standalone info reader, or try using
-'preview.sty' for functionality besides of Emacs previews), it will be a
+‘preview.sty’ for functionality besides of Emacs previews), it will be a
big help already if things work from inside of Emacs.
Here is how to do the various parts:
@@ -722,7 +722,7 @@ Making the Info files available
...............................
For making the info files accessible from within Elisp, something like
-the following might be convenient to add into your or other people's
+the following might be convenient to add into your or other people’s
startup files:
(eval-after-load 'info
@@ -732,27 +732,27 @@ Making the LaTeX style available
................................
If you want others to be able to share your installation, you should
-configure it using '--without-texmf-dir', in which case things should
+configure it using ‘--without-texmf-dir’, in which case things should
work as well for them as for you.
1.2.6.1 Using AUCTeX from local Git repo
........................................
With the techniques described above, it is also possible to use AUCTeX
-directly from a local Git repository. Let's assume you have your Git
-repositories under '~/development/'.
+directly from a local Git repository. Let’s assume you have your Git
+repositories under ‘~/development/’.
First, you have to fetch a copy of the AUCTeX Git repository. In a
-shell, change directory to '~/development/' and do:
+shell, change directory to ‘~/development/’ and do:
git clone https://git.savannah.gnu.org/git/auctex.git
- Now change directory to '~/development/auctex' and run
-'./autogen.sh'. Next thing is to run 'configure' like this:
+ Now change directory to ‘~/development/auctex’ and run
+‘./autogen.sh’. Next thing is to run ‘configure’ like this:
./configure --without-texmf-dir --with-lispdir=.
When finished, simply enter
make
-and you're finished. Note that the 'make install' step is not
+and you’re finished. Note that the ‘make install’ step is not
necessary.
Now you have to tell Emacs about the plan. The following variables
@@ -766,7 +766,7 @@ The info files will be available with this:
'(add-to-list 'Info-additional-directory-list
"~/development/auctex/doc"))
-Now you're ready to load 'auctex.el' and 'preview-latex.el' out of this
+Now you’re ready to load ‘auctex.el’ and ‘preview-latex.el’ out of this
directory:
(load "~/development/auctex/auctex.el" nil t t)
(load "~/development/auctex/preview-latex.el" nil t t)
@@ -781,7 +781,7 @@ In a Nutshell
.............
The following are brief installation instructions for the impatient. In
-case you don't understand some of this, run into trouble of some sort,
+case you don’t understand some of this, run into trouble of some sort,
or need more elaborate information, refer to the detailed instructions
further below.
@@ -795,9 +795,9 @@ further below.
For Emacs: Many people like to install AUCTeX into the pseudo file
system hierarchy set up by the Emacs installation. Assuming Emacs
- is installed in 'C:/Program Files/Emacs' and the directory for
+ is installed in ‘C:/Program Files/Emacs’ and the directory for
local additions of your TeX system, e.g. MiKTeX, is
- 'C:/localtexmf', you can do this by typing the following statement
+ ‘C:/localtexmf’, you can do this by typing the following statement
at the shell prompt:
./configure --prefix='C:/Program Files/Emacs' \
@@ -810,14 +810,14 @@ further below.
If the configuration script failed to find all required programs,
make sure that these programs are in your system path and add
- directories containing the programs to the 'PATH' environment
+ directories containing the programs to the ‘PATH’ environment
variable if necessary. Here is how to do that in W2000/XP:
- 1. On the desktop, right click "My Computer" and select
+ 1. On the desktop, right click “My Computer” and select
properties.
- 2. Click on "Advanced" in the "System Properties" window.
- 3. Select "Environment Variables".
- 4. Select "path" in "System Variables" and click "edit". Move to
+ 2. Click on “Advanced” in the “System Properties” window.
+ 3. Select “Environment Variables”.
+ 4. Select “path” in “System Variables” and click “edit”. Move to
the front in the line (this might require scrolling) and add
the missing path including drive letter, ended with a
semicolon.
@@ -851,16 +851,16 @@ path names are a mess.
The installation procedure tries finding stuff in system search paths
and in Emacs paths. For that to succeed, you have to use the same
syntax and spelling and case of paths everywhere: in your system search
-paths, in Emacs' 'load-path' variable, as argument to the scripts. If
-your path names contain spaces or other 'shell-unfriendly' characters,
+paths, in Emacs’ ‘load-path’ variable, as argument to the scripts. If
+your path names contain spaces or other ‘shell-unfriendly’ characters,
most notably backslashes for directory separators, place the whole path
-in '"double quote marks"' whenever you specify it on a command line.
+in ‘"double quote marks"’ whenever you specify it on a command line.
- Avoid 'helpful' magic file names like '/cygdrive/c' and
-'C:\PROGRA~1\' like the plague. It is quite unlikely that the scripts
+ Avoid ‘helpful’ magic file names like ‘/cygdrive/c’ and
+‘C:\PROGRA~1\’ like the plague. It is quite unlikely that the scripts
will be able to identify the actual file names involved. Use the full
-paths, making use of normal Windows drive letters like ' 'C:/Program
-Files/Emacs' ' where required, and using the same combination of upper-
+paths, making use of normal Windows drive letters like ‘ 'C:/Program
+Files/Emacs' ’ where required, and using the same combination of upper-
and lowercase letters as in the actual files. File names containing
shell-special characters like spaces or backslashes (if you prefer that
syntax) need to get properly quoted to the shell: the above example used
@@ -883,8 +883,8 @@ single quotes for that.
problems, it might help if you try unpacking (or checking out) the
files in binary mode, if your tools allow that.
- If you don't have a suitable unpacking tool, skip to the next step:
- this should provide you with a working 'unzip' command.
+ If you don’t have a suitable unpacking tool, skip to the next step:
+ this should provide you with a working ‘unzip’ command.
2. The installation of AUCTeX will require the MSYS tool set from
<http://www.mingw.org/> or the Cygwin tool set from
@@ -894,10 +894,10 @@ single quotes for that.
installing additional packages like, for example, the spell checker
aspell.
- If Cygwin specific paths like '/cygdrive/c' crop up in the course
+ If Cygwin specific paths like ‘/cygdrive/c’ crop up in the course
of the installation, using a non-Cygwin Emacs could conceivably
cause trouble. Using Cygwin either for everything or nothing might
- save headaches, _if_ things don't work out.
+ save headaches, _if_ things don’t work out.
3. Install a current version of Emacs from
<https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/emacs/windows/>.
@@ -911,36 +911,36 @@ single quotes for that.
required for preview-latex operation. Examining the output from
gswin32c -h
on a Windows command line should tell you whether your Ghostscript
- supports the 'png16m' device needed for PNG support. MiKTeX
- apparently comes with its own Ghostscript called 'mgs.exe'.
+ supports the ‘png16m’ device needed for PNG support. MiKTeX
+ apparently comes with its own Ghostscript called ‘mgs.exe’.
6. Perl (https://www.perl.org/) is needed for rebuilding the
documentation if you are working with a copy from Git or have
touched documentation source files in the preview-latex part. If
- the line endings of the file 'preview/latex/preview.dtx' don't
- correspond with what Perl calls '\n' when reading text files,
- you'll run into trouble.
+ the line endings of the file ‘preview/latex/preview.dtx’ don’t
+ correspond with what Perl calls ‘\n’ when reading text files,
+ you’ll run into trouble.
7. Now the fun stuff starts. If you have not yet done so, unpack the
AUCTeX distribution into a separate directory after rereading the
instructions for unpacking above.
- 8. Ready for takeoff. Start some shell (typically 'bash') capable of
- running 'configure', change into the installation directory and
- call './configure' with appropriate options.
+ 8. Ready for takeoff. Start some shell (typically ‘bash’) capable of
+ running ‘configure’, change into the installation directory and
+ call ‘./configure’ with appropriate options.
- Typical options you'll want to specify will be
- '--prefix=DRIVE:/PATH/TO/EMACS-HIERARCHY'
- which tells 'configure' where to perform the installation. It
- may also make 'configure' find Emacs automatically; if this
- doesn't happen, try '--with-emacs' as described below. All
+ Typical options you’ll want to specify will be
+ ‘--prefix=DRIVE:/PATH/TO/EMACS-HIERARCHY’
+ which tells ‘configure’ where to perform the installation. It
+ may also make ‘configure’ find Emacs automatically; if this
+ doesn’t happen, try ‘--with-emacs’ as described below. All
automatic detection of files and directories restricts itself
to directories below the PREFIX or in the same hierarchy as
the program accessing the files. Usually, directories like
- 'man', 'share' and 'bin' will be situated right under PREFIX.
+ ‘man’, ‘share’ and ‘bin’ will be situated right under PREFIX.
This option also affects the defaults for placing the Texinfo
- documentation files (see also '--infodir' below) and
+ documentation files (see also ‘--infodir’ below) and
automatically generated style hooks.
If you have a central directory hierarchy (not untypical with
@@ -948,44 +948,44 @@ single quotes for that.
here. You stand a good chance that this will be the only
option you need to supply, as long as your TeX-related
executables are in your system path, which they better be for
- AUCTeX's operation, anyway.
+ AUCTeX’s operation, anyway.
- '--with-emacs'
+ ‘--with-emacs’
if you are installing for a version of Emacs. You can use
- '--with-emacs=DRIVE:/PATH/TO/EMACS' to specify the name of the
+ ‘--with-emacs=DRIVE:/PATH/TO/EMACS’ to specify the name of the
installed Emacs executable, complete with its path if
necessary (if Emacs is not within a directory specified in
- your 'PATH' environment setting).
+ your ‘PATH’ environment setting).
- '--with-lispdir=DRIVE:/PATH/TO/SITE-LISP'
- This option tells a place in 'load-path' below which the files
- are situated. The startup files 'auctex.el' and
- 'preview-latex.el' will get installed here unless a
- subdirectory 'site-start.d' exists which will then be used
+ ‘--with-lispdir=DRIVE:/PATH/TO/SITE-LISP’
+ This option tells a place in ‘load-path’ below which the files
+ are situated. The startup files ‘auctex.el’ and
+ ‘preview-latex.el’ will get installed here unless a
+ subdirectory ‘site-start.d’ exists which will then be used
instead. The other files from AUCTeX will be installed in a
- subdirectory called 'auctex'.
+ subdirectory called ‘auctex’.
If you think that you need a different setup, please refer to
the full installation instructions in *note Configure::.
- '--infodir=DRIVE:/PATH/TO/INFO/DIRECTORY'
+ ‘--infodir=DRIVE:/PATH/TO/INFO/DIRECTORY’
If you are installing into an Emacs directory, info files have
- to be put into the 'info' folder below that directory. The
+ to be put into the ‘info’ folder below that directory. The
configuration script will usually try to install into the
- folder 'share/info', so you have to override this by
- specifying something like '--infodir='C:/Program Files/info''
+ folder ‘share/info’, so you have to override this by
+ specifying something like ‘--infodir='C:/Program Files/info'’
for the configure call.
- '--with-auto-dir=DRIVE:/DIR'
+ ‘--with-auto-dir=DRIVE:/DIR’
Directory containing automatically generated information. You
- should not normally need to set this, as '--prefix' should
+ should not normally need to set this, as ‘--prefix’ should
take care of this.
- '--disable-preview'
+ ‘--disable-preview’
Use this option if your Emacs version is unable to support
image display.
- '--with-texmf-dir=DRIVE:/DIR'
+ ‘--with-texmf-dir=DRIVE:/DIR’
This will specify the directory where your TeX installation
sits. If your TeX installation does not conform to the TDS
(TeX directory standard), you may need to specify more options
@@ -996,52 +996,52 @@ single quotes for that.
Some executables might not be found in your path. That is not a
good idea, but you can get around by specifying environment
- variables to 'configure':
+ variables to ‘configure’:
GS="DRIVE:/PATH/TO/GSWIN32C.EXE" ./configure ...
- should work for this purpose. 'gswin32c.exe' is the usual name for
+ should work for this purpose. ‘gswin32c.exe’ is the usual name for
the required _command line_ executable under Windows; in contrast,
- 'gswin32.exe' is likely to fail.
+ ‘gswin32.exe’ is likely to fail.
- As an alternative to specifying variables for the 'configure' call
+ As an alternative to specifying variables for the ‘configure’ call
you can add directories containing the required executables to the
- 'PATH' variable of your Windows system. This is especially a good
+ ‘PATH’ variable of your Windows system. This is especially a good
idea if Emacs has trouble finding the respective programs later
during normal operation.
- 9. Run 'make' in the installation directory.
+ 9. Run ‘make’ in the installation directory.
- 10. Run 'make install' in the installation directory.
+ 10. Run ‘make install’ in the installation directory.
11. With Emacs, activation of AUCTeX and preview-latex depends on a
- working 'site-start.d' directory or similar setup, since then the
- startup files 'auctex.el' and 'preview-latex.el' will have been
+ working ‘site-start.d’ directory or similar setup, since then the
+ startup files ‘auctex.el’ and ‘preview-latex.el’ will have been
placed there. If this has not been done, you should be able to
load the startup files manually with
(load "auctex.el" nil t t)
(load "preview-latex.el" nil t t)
- in either a site-wide 'site-start.el' or your personal startup file
- (usually accessible as '~/.emacs' or '~/.emacs.d/init.el' from
+ in either a site-wide ‘site-start.el’ or your personal startup file
+ (usually accessible as ‘~/.emacs’ or ‘~/.emacs.d/init.el’ from
within Emacs).
The default configuration of AUCTeX is probably not the best fit
for Windows systems with MiKTeX. You might want to add
(require 'tex-mik)
- after loading 'auctex.el' and 'preview-latex.el' in order to get
+ after loading ‘auctex.el’ and ‘preview-latex.el’ in order to get
more appropriate values for some customization options.
You can always use
M-x customize-group <RET> AUCTeX <RET>
- in order to customize more stuff, or use the 'Customize' menu.
+ in order to customize more stuff, or use the ‘Customize’ menu.
- 12. Load 'circ.tex' into Emacs and see if you get the 'Command' menu.
+ 12. Load ‘circ.tex’ into Emacs and see if you get the ‘Command’ menu.
Try using it to LaTeX the file.
- 13. Check whether the 'Preview' menu is available in this file. Use
+ 13. Check whether the ‘Preview’ menu is available in this file. Use
it to generate previews for the document.
- If this barfs and tells you that image type 'png' is not supported,
+ If this barfs and tells you that image type ‘png’ is not supported,
you can either add PNG support to your Emacs installation or choose
another image format to be used by preview-latex.
@@ -1052,9 +1052,9 @@ single quotes for that.
(https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/emacs/windows/README) for details.
A different image format can be chosen by setting the variable
- 'preview-image-type'. While it is recommended to keep the 'dvipng'
- or 'png' setting, you can temporarily select a different format
- like 'pnm' to check if the lack of PNG support is the only problem
+ ‘preview-image-type’. While it is recommended to keep the ‘dvipng’
+ or ‘png’ setting, you can temporarily select a different format
+ like ‘pnm’ to check if the lack of PNG support is the only problem
with your Emacs installation.
Try adding the line
@@ -1075,30 +1075,30 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Customizing, Prev:
Installation under MS Windows, Up
Most of the site-specific customization should already have happened
during configuration of AUCTeX. Any further customization can be done
-with customization buffers directly in Emacs. Just type 'M-x
-customize-group <RET> AUCTeX <RET>' to open the customization group for
+with customization buffers directly in Emacs. Just type ‘M-x
+customize-group <RET> AUCTeX <RET>’ to open the customization group for
AUCTeX or use the menu entries provided in the mode menus. Editing the
-file 'tex-site.el' as suggested in former versions of AUCTeX should not
+file ‘tex-site.el’ as suggested in former versions of AUCTeX should not
be done anymore because the installation routine will overwrite those
changes.
You might check some options with a special significance. They are
-accessible directly by typing 'M-x customize-option <RET> <option>
-<RET>'.
+accessible directly by typing ‘M-x customize-option <RET> <option>
+<RET>’.
-- User Option: TeX-macro-global
- Directories containing the site's TeX style files.
+ Directories containing the site’s TeX style files.
Normally, AUCTeX will only allow you to complete macros and
environments which are built-in, specified in AUCTeX style files or
-defined by yourself. If you issue the 'M-x TeX-auto-generate-global'
+defined by yourself. If you issue the ‘M-x TeX-auto-generate-global’
command after loading AUCTeX, you will be able to complete on all macros
available in the standard style files used by your document. To do
this, you must set this variable to a list of directories where the
standard style files are located. The directories will be searched
recursively, so there is no reason to list subdirectories explicitly.
Automatic configuration will already have set the variable for you if it
-could use the program 'kpsewhich'. In this case you normally don't have
+could use the program ‘kpsewhich’. In this case you normally don’t have
to alter anything.
@@ -1116,7 +1116,7 @@ minutes of reading.
In this introduction, we assume that AUCTeX is already installed on
your system. If this is not the case, you should read the file
-'INSTALL' in the base directory of the unpacked distribution tarball.
+‘INSTALL’ in the base directory of the unpacked distribution tarball.
These installation instructions are available in this manual as well,
*note Installation::. We also assume that you are familiar with the way
keystrokes are written in Emacs manuals. If not, have a look at the
@@ -1141,7 +1141,7 @@ be achieved by putting
(setq TeX-auto-save t)
(setq TeX-parse-self t)
-into your init file. Finally, if you often use '\include' or '\input',
+into your init file. Finally, if you often use ‘\include’ or ‘\input’,
you should make AUCTeX aware of the multifile document structure. You
can do this by inserting
@@ -1157,8 +1157,8 @@ ask you for a master file.
---------- Footnotes ----------
- (1) This usually is a file in your home directory called '.emacs', or
-'.emacs.d/init.el'.
+ (1) This usually is a file in your home directory called ‘.emacs’, or
+‘.emacs.d/init.el’.
File: auctex.info, Node: Editing Facilities, Next: Processing Facilities,
Up: Quick Start
@@ -1171,22 +1171,22 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Editing Facilities, Next:
Processing Facilities, Up:
AUCTeX can do syntax highlighting of your source code, that means
commands will get special colors or fonts. This is enabled by default.
-You can disable it locally by typing 'M-x font-lock-mode <RET>'.
+You can disable it locally by typing ‘M-x font-lock-mode <RET>’.
AUCTeX will indent new lines to indicate their syntactical
relationship to the surrounding text. For example, the text of a
-'\footnote' or text inside of an environment will be indented relative
+‘\footnote’ or text inside of an environment will be indented relative
to the text around it. If the indenting has gotten wrong after adding
-or deleting some characters, use <TAB> to reindent the line, 'M-q' for
-the whole paragraph, or 'M-x LaTeX-fill-buffer <RET>' for the whole
+or deleting some characters, use <TAB> to reindent the line, ‘M-q’ for
+the whole paragraph, or ‘M-x LaTeX-fill-buffer <RET>’ for the whole
buffer.
1.3.1.2 Entering sectioning commands
....................................
-Insertion of sectioning macros, that is '\chapter', '\section',
-'\subsection', etc. and accompanying '\label' commands may be eased by
-using 'C-c C-s'. You will be asked for the section level. As nearly
+Insertion of sectioning macros, that is ‘\chapter’, ‘\section’,
+‘\subsection’, etc. and accompanying ‘\label’ commands may be eased by
+using ‘C-c C-s’. You will be asked for the section level. As nearly
everywhere in AUCTeX, you can use the <TAB> or <SPC> key to get a list
of available level names, and to auto-complete what you started typing.
Next, you will be asked for the printed title of the section, and last
@@ -1195,14 +1195,14 @@ you will be asked for a label to be associated with the
section.
1.3.1.3 Inserting environments
..............................
-Similarly, you can insert environments, that is '\begin{}'-'\end{}'
-pairs: Type 'C-c C-e', and select an environment type. Again, you can
+Similarly, you can insert environments, that is ‘\begin{}’–‘\end{}’
+pairs: Type ‘C-c C-e’, and select an environment type. Again, you can
use <TAB> or <SPC> to get a list, and to complete what you type.
Actually, the list will not only provide standard LaTeX environments,
-but also take your '\documentclass' and '\usepackage' commands into
-account if you have parsing enabled by setting 'TeX-parse-self' to 't'.
+but also take your ‘\documentclass’ and ‘\usepackage’ commands into
+account if you have parsing enabled by setting ‘TeX-parse-self’ to ‘t’.
If you use a couple of environments frequently, you can use the <up> and
-<down> arrow keys (or 'M-p' and 'M-n') in the minibuffer to get back to
+<down> arrow keys (or ‘M-p’ and ‘M-n’) in the minibuffer to get back to
the previously inserted commands.
Some environments need additional arguments. Often, AUCTeX knows
@@ -1211,51 +1211,51 @@ about this and asks you to enter a value.
1.3.1.4 Inserting macros
........................
-'C-c C-m', or simply 'C-c RET' will give you a prompt that asks you for
+‘C-c C-m’, or simply ‘C-c RET’ will give you a prompt that asks you for
a LaTeX macro. You can use <TAB> for completion, or the <up>/<down>
-arrow keys (or 'M-p' and 'M-n') to browse the command history. In many
+arrow keys (or ‘M-p’ and ‘M-n’) to browse the command history. In many
cases, AUCTeX knows which arguments a macro needs and will ask you for
that. It even can differentiate between mandatory and optional
-arguments--for details, see *note Completion::.
+arguments—for details, see *note Completion::.
An additional help for inserting macros is provided by the
possibility to complete macros right in the buffer. With point at the
end of a partially written macro, you can complete it by typing
-'M-<TAB>'.
+‘M-<TAB>’.
1.3.1.5 Changing the font
.........................
AUCTeX provides convenient keyboard shortcuts for inserting macros which
specify the font to be used for typesetting certain parts of the text.
-They start with 'C-c C-f', and the last 'C-' combination tells AUCTeX
+They start with ‘C-c C-f’, and the last ‘C-’ combination tells AUCTeX
which font you want:
-'C-c C-f C-b'
- Insert bold face '\textbf{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-b’
+ Insert bold face ‘\textbf{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-i'
- Insert italics '\textit{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-i’
+ Insert italics ‘\textit{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-e'
- Insert _emphasized_ '\emph{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-e’
+ Insert _emphasized_ ‘\emph{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-s'
- Insert slanted '\textsl{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-s’
+ Insert slanted ‘\textsl{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-r'
- Insert roman '\textrm{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-r’
+ Insert roman ‘\textrm{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-f'
- Insert sans serif '\textsf{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-f’
+ Insert sans serif ‘\textsf{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-t'
- Insert typewriter '\texttt{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-t’
+ Insert typewriter ‘\texttt{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-c'
- Insert SMALL CAPS '\textsc{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-c’
+ Insert SMALL CAPS ‘\textsc{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-d'
+‘C-c C-f C-d’
Delete the innermost font specification containing point.
If you want to change font attributes of existing text, mark it as an
@@ -1264,19 +1264,19 @@ the command will be inserted with empty braces, and you
can start typing
the changed text.
Most of those commands will also work in math mode, but then macros
-like '\mathbf' will be inserted.
+like ‘\mathbf’ will be inserted.
1.3.1.6 Other useful features
.............................
-AUCTeX also tries to help you when inserting the right "quote" signs for
+AUCTeX also tries to help you when inserting the right “quote” signs for
your language, dollar signs to typeset math, or pairs of braces. It
-offers shortcuts for commenting out text ('C-c ;' for the current region
-or 'C-c %' for the paragraph you are in). The same keystrokes will
+offers shortcuts for commenting out text (‘C-c ;’ for the current region
+or ‘C-c %’ for the paragraph you are in). The same keystrokes will
remove the % signs, if the region or paragraph is commented out yet.
-With 'TeX-fold-mode', you can hide certain parts (like footnotes,
-references etc.) that you do not edit currently. Support for Emacs'
-outline mode is provided as well. And there's more, but this is beyond
+With ‘TeX-fold-mode’, you can hide certain parts (like footnotes,
+references etc.) that you do not edit currently. Support for Emacs’
+outline mode is provided as well. And there’s more, but this is beyond
the scope of this Quick Start Guide.
@@ -1289,62 +1289,62 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Processing Facilities, Prev:
Editing Facilities, Up:
.............................................................
If you have typed some text and want to run LaTeX (or TeX, or other
-programs--see below) on it, type 'C-c C-c'. If applicable, you will be
+programs—see below) on it, type ‘C-c C-c’. If applicable, you will be
asked whether you want to save changes, and which program you want to
invoke. In many cases, the choice that AUCTeX suggests will be just
-what you want: first 'latex', then a viewer. If a 'latex' run produces
-or changes input files for 'makeindex', the next suggestion will be to
-run that program, and AUCTeX knows that you need to run 'latex' again
-afterwards--the same holds for BibTeX.
+what you want: first ‘latex’, then a viewer. If a ‘latex’ run produces
+or changes input files for ‘makeindex’, the next suggestion will be to
+run that program, and AUCTeX knows that you need to run ‘latex’ again
+afterwards—the same holds for BibTeX.
When no processor invocation is necessary anymore, AUCTeX will
suggest to run a viewer, or you can chose to create a PostScript file
-using 'dvips', or to directly print it.
+using ‘dvips’, or to directly print it.
Actually, there is another command which comes in handy to compile
-documents: type 'C-c C-a' ('TeX-command-run-all') and AUCTeX will
+documents: type ‘C-c C-a’ (‘TeX-command-run-all’) and AUCTeX will
compile the document for you until it is ready and then run the viewer.
-This is the same as issuing repeatedly 'C-c C-c' and letting AUCTeX
+This is the same as issuing repeatedly ‘C-c C-c’ and letting AUCTeX
guess the next command to run.
At this place, a warning needs to be given: First, although AUCTeX is
really good in detecting the standard situations when an additional
-'latex' run is necessary, it cannot detect it always. Second, the
+‘latex’ run is necessary, it cannot detect it always. Second, the
creation of PostScript files or direct printing currently only works
when your output file is a DVI file, not a PDF file.
- Ah, you didn't know you can do both? That brings us to the next
+ Ah, you didn’t know you can do both? That brings us to the next
topic.
1.3.2.2 Choosing an output format
.................................
From a LaTeX file, you can produce DVI output, or a PDF file directly
-via 'pdflatex'. You can switch on source specials for easier navigation
-in the output file, or tell 'latex' to stop after an error (usually
-'--noninteractive' is used, to allow you to detect all errors in a
+via ‘pdflatex’. You can switch on source specials for easier navigation
+in the output file, or tell ‘latex’ to stop after an error (usually
+‘--noninteractive’ is used, to allow you to detect all errors in a
single run).
These options are controlled by toggles, the keystrokes should be
easy to memorize:
-'C-c C-t C-p'
+‘C-c C-t C-p’
This command toggles between DVI and PDF output
-'C-c C-t C-i'
+‘C-c C-t C-i’
toggles interactive mode
-'C-c C-t C-s'
+‘C-c C-t C-s’
toggles SyncTeX (or source specials) support
-'C-c C-t C-o'
+‘C-c C-t C-o’
toggles usage of Omega/lambda.
- There is also another possibility: compile the document with 'tex'
-(or 'latex') and then convert the resulting DVI file to PDF using
-'dvips'-'ps2pdf' sequence or 'dvipdfmx' command. If you want to go by
-this route, customize 'TeX-PDF-from-DVI' option. Then AUCTeX will
-suggest you to run the appropriate command when you type 'C-C C-c'. For
+ There is also another possibility: compile the document with ‘tex’
+(or ‘latex’) and then convert the resulting DVI file to PDF using
+‘dvips’–‘ps2pdf’ sequence or ‘dvipdfmx’ command. If you want to go by
+this route, customize ‘TeX-PDF-from-DVI’ option. Then AUCTeX will
+suggest you to run the appropriate command when you type ‘C-C C-c’. For
details, see *note Processor Options::.
1.3.2.3 Debugging LaTeX
@@ -1352,24 +1352,24 @@ details, see *note Processor Options::.
When AUCTeX runs a program, it creates an output buffer in which it
displays the output of the command. If there is a syntactical error in
-your file, 'latex' will not complete successfully. AUCTeX will tell you
+your file, ‘latex’ will not complete successfully. AUCTeX will tell you
that, and you can get to the place where the first error occured by
-pressing 'C-c `' (the last character is a backtick). The view will be
+pressing ‘C-c `’ (the last character is a backtick). The view will be
split in two windows, the output will be displayed in the lower buffer,
and both buffers will be centered around the place where the error
ocurred. You can then try to fix it in the document buffer, and use the
same keystrokes to get to the next error. This procedure may be
-repeated until all errors have been dealt with. By pressing 'C-c C-w'
-('TeX-toggle-debug-boxes') you can toggle whether AUCTeX should notify
+repeated until all errors have been dealt with. By pressing ‘C-c C-w’
+(‘TeX-toggle-debug-boxes’) you can toggle whether AUCTeX should notify
you of overfull and underfull boxes in addition to regular errors.
- Issue 'M-x TeX-error-overview <RET>' to see a nicely formatted list
+ Issue ‘M-x TeX-error-overview <RET>’ to see a nicely formatted list
of all errors and warnings reported by the compiler.
If a command got stuck in a seemingly infinite loop, or you want to
-stop execution for other reasons, you can use 'C-c C-k' (for "kill").
-Similar to 'C-l', which centers the buffer you are in around your
-current position, 'C-c C-l' centers the output buffer so that the last
+stop execution for other reasons, you can use ‘C-c C-k’ (for “kill”).
+Similar to ‘C-l’, which centers the buffer you are in around your
+current position, ‘C-c C-l’ centers the output buffer so that the last
lines added at the bottom become visible.
1.3.2.4 Running LaTeX on parts of your document
@@ -1377,12 +1377,12 @@ lines added at the bottom become visible.
If you want to check how some part of your text looks like, and do not
want to wait until the whole document has been typeset, then mark it as
-a region and use 'C-c C-r'. It behaves just like 'C-c C-c', but it only
+a region and use ‘C-c C-r’. It behaves just like ‘C-c C-c’, but it only
uses the document preamble and the region you marked.
- If you are using '\include' or '\input' to structure your document,
-try 'C-c C-b' while you are editing one of the included files. It will
-run 'latex' only on the current buffer, using the preamble from the
+ If you are using ‘\include’ or ‘\input’ to structure your document,
+try ‘C-c C-b’ while you are editing one of the included files. It will
+run ‘latex’ only on the current buffer, using the preamble from the
master file.
@@ -1395,7 +1395,7 @@ The most commonly used commands/macros of AUCTeX are
those which simply
insert templates for often used TeX, LaTeX, or ConTeXt constructs, like
font changes, handling of environments, etc. These features are very
simple, and easy to learn, and help you avoid mistakes like mismatched
-braces, or '\begin{}'-'\end{}' pairs.
+braces, or ‘\begin{}’-‘\end{}’ pairs.
Apart from that this chapter contains a description of some features
for entering more specialized sorts of text, for formatting the source
@@ -1423,33 +1423,33 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Quotes, Next: Font
Specifiers, Up: Editing
Quotation Marks
---------------
-In TeX, literal double quotes '"like this"' are seldom used, instead two
-single quotes are used '``like this'''. To help you insert these
-efficiently, AUCTeX allows you to continue to press '"' to insert two
-single quotes. To get a literal double quote, press '"' twice.
+In TeX, literal double quotes ‘"like this"’ are seldom used, instead two
+single quotes are used ‘``like this''’. To help you insert these
+efficiently, AUCTeX allows you to continue to press ‘"’ to insert two
+single quotes. To get a literal double quote, press ‘"’ twice.
-- Command: TeX-insert-quote COUNT
- ('"') Insert the appropriate quote marks for TeX.
+ (‘"’) Insert the appropriate quote marks for TeX.
- Inserts the value of 'TeX-open-quote' (normally '``') or
- 'TeX-close-quote' (normally '''') depending on the context. With
- prefix argument, always inserts '"' characters.
+ Inserts the value of ‘TeX-open-quote’ (normally ‘``’) or
+ ‘TeX-close-quote’ (normally ‘''’) depending on the context. With
+ prefix argument, always inserts ‘"’ characters.
-- User Option: TeX-open-quote
- String inserted by typing '"' to open a quotation. (*Note
+ String inserted by typing ‘"’ to open a quotation. (*Note
European::, for language-specific quotation mark insertion.)
-- User Option: TeX-close-quote
- String inserted by typing '"' to close a quotation. (*Note
+ String inserted by typing ‘"’ to close a quotation. (*Note
European::, for language-specific quotation mark insertion.)
-- User Option: TeX-quote-after-quote
- Determines the behavior of '"'. If it is non-nil, typing '"' will
+ Determines the behavior of ‘"’. If it is non-nil, typing ‘"’ will
insert a literal double quote. The respective values of
- 'TeX-open-quote' and 'TeX-close-quote' will be inserted after
- typing '"' once again.
+ ‘TeX-open-quote’ and ‘TeX-close-quote’ will be inserted after
+ typing ‘"’ once again.
- The 'babel' package provides special support for the requirements of
+ The ‘babel’ package provides special support for the requirements of
typesetting quotation marks in many different languages. If you use
this package, either directly or by loading a language-specific style
file, you should also use the special commands for quote insertion
@@ -1457,12 +1457,12 @@ instead of the standard quotes shown above. AUCTeX is
able to recognize
several of these languages and will change quote insertion accordingly.
*Note European::, for details about this feature and how to control it.
- In case you are using the 'csquotes' package, you should customize
-'LaTeX-csquotes-open-quote', 'LaTeX-csquotes-close-quote' and
-'LaTeX-csquotes-quote-after-quote'. The quotation characters will only
-be used if both variables--'LaTeX-csquotes-open-quote' and
-'LaTeX-csquotes-close-quote'--are non-empty strings. But then the
-'csquotes'-related values will take precedence over the
+ In case you are using the ‘csquotes’ package, you should customize
+‘LaTeX-csquotes-open-quote’, ‘LaTeX-csquotes-close-quote’ and
+‘LaTeX-csquotes-quote-after-quote’. The quotation characters will only
+be used if both variables—‘LaTeX-csquotes-open-quote’ and
+‘LaTeX-csquotes-close-quote’—are non-empty strings. But then the
+‘csquotes’-related values will take precedence over the
language-specific ones.
Dollar Signs
@@ -1470,12 +1470,12 @@ Dollar Signs
In AUCTeX, dollar signs should match like they do in TeX. This has been
partially implemented, we assume dollar signs always match within a
-paragraph. By default, the first '$' you insert in a paragraph will do
-nothing special. The second '$' will match the first. This will be
+paragraph. By default, the first ‘$’ you insert in a paragraph will do
+nothing special. The second ‘$’ will match the first. This will be
indicated by moving the cursor temporarily over the first dollar sign.
-- Command: TeX-insert-dollar ARG
- ('$') Insert dollar sign.
+ (‘$’) Insert dollar sign.
Show matching dollar sign if this dollar sign end the TeX math
mode.
@@ -1483,41 +1483,41 @@ indicated by moving the cursor temporarily over the
first dollar sign.
With optional ARG, insert that many dollar signs.
TeX and LaTeX users often look for a way to insert inline equations
-like '$...$' or '\(...\)' simply typing '$'. AUCTeX helps them through
-the customizable variable 'TeX-electric-math'.
+like ‘$...$’ or ‘\(...\)’ simply typing ‘$’. AUCTeX helps them through
+the customizable variable ‘TeX-electric-math’.
-- User Option: TeX-electric-math
- If the variable is non-nil and you type '$' outside math mode,
+ If the variable is non-nil and you type ‘$’ outside math mode,
AUCTeX will automatically insert the opening and closing symbols
for an inline equation and put the point between them. The opening
- symbol will blink when 'blink-matching-paren' is non-nil. If
- 'TeX-electric-math' is nil, typing '$' simply inserts '$' at point,
+ symbol will blink when ‘blink-matching-paren’ is non-nil. If
+ ‘TeX-electric-math’ is nil, typing ‘$’ simply inserts ‘$’ at point,
this is the default.
- Besides 'nil', possible values for this variable are '(cons "$"
- "$")' for TeX inline equations '$...$', and '(cons "\\(" "\\)")'
- for LaTeX inline equations '\(...\)'.
+ Besides ‘nil’, possible values for this variable are ‘("$" . "$")’
+ for TeX inline equations ‘$...$’, and ‘("\(" . "\)")’ for LaTeX
+ inline equations ‘\(...\)’.
If the variable is non-nil and point is inside math mode right
- between a couple of single dollars, pressing '$' will insert
+ between a couple of single dollars, pressing ‘$’ will insert
another pair of dollar signs and leave the point between them.
- Thus, if 'TeX-electric-math' is set to '(cons "$" "$")' you can
- easily obtain a TeX display equation '$$...$$' by pressing '$'
- twice in a row. (Note that you should not use double dollar signs
- in LaTeX because this practice can lead to wrong spacing in typeset
+ Thus, if ‘TeX-electric-math’ is set to ‘("$" . "$")’ you can easily
+ obtain a TeX display equation ‘$$...$$’ by pressing ‘$’ twice in a
+ row. (Note that you should not use double dollar signs in LaTeX
+ because this practice can lead to wrong spacing in typeset
documents.)
In addition, when the variable is non-nil and there is an active
- region outside math mode, typing '$' will put around the active
+ region outside math mode, typing ‘$’ will put around the active
region symbols for opening and closing inline equation and keep the
region active, leaving point after the closing symbol. By pressing
- repeatedly '$' while the region is active you can toggle between an
+ repeatedly ‘$’ while the region is active you can toggle between an
inline equation, a display equation, and no equation. To be
- precise, '$...$' is replaced by '$$...$$', whereas '\(...\)' is
- replaced by '\[...\]'.
+ precise, ‘$...$’ is replaced by ‘$$...$$’, whereas ‘\(...\)’ is
+ replaced by ‘\[...\]’.
- If you want to automatically insert '$...$' in plain TeX files, and
-'\(...\)' in LaTeX files by pressing '$', add the following to your init
+ If you want to automatically insert ‘$...$’ in plain TeX files, and
+‘\(...\)’ in LaTeX files by pressing ‘$’, add the following to your init
file
(add-hook 'plain-TeX-mode-hook
(lambda () (set (make-local-variable 'TeX-electric-math)
@@ -1526,40 +1526,54 @@ file
(lambda () (set (make-local-variable 'TeX-electric-math)
(cons "\\(" "\\)"))))
- Note that Texinfo mode does nothing special for '$'. It inserts
+ Math mode which didn’t start with dollar(s) shouldn’t be closed with
+dollar.
+ -- User Option: TeX-refuse-unmatched-dollar
+ This option determines the behavior when the user types ‘$’ at a
+ position where AUCTeX thinks that it is in math mode which didn’t
+ start with dollar(s).
+
+ When this option is ‘nil’, AUCTeX behaves in the same way as
+ non-math mode, assuming that the user knows it isn’t in math mode
+ actually. This is the default.
+
+ When this option is non-‘nil’, AUCTeX refuses to insert ‘$’ to
+ prevent unmatched dollar.
+
+ Note that Texinfo mode does nothing special for ‘$’. It inserts
dollar sign(s) just in the same way as the other normal keys do.
Braces
------
To avoid unbalanced braces, it is useful to insert them pairwise. You
-can do this by typing 'C-c {'.
+can do this by typing ‘C-c {’.
-- Command: TeX-insert-braces
- ('C-c {') Make a pair of braces and position the cursor to type
+ (‘C-c {’) Make a pair of braces and position the cursor to type
inside of them. If there is an active region, put braces around it
and leave point after the closing brace.
When writing complex math formulas in LaTeX documents, you sometimes
need to adjust the size of braces with pairs of macros like
-'\left'-'\right', '\bigl'-'\bigr' and so on. You can avoid unbalanced
-pairs with the help of 'TeX-insert-macro', bound to 'C-c C-m' or 'C-c
-<RET>' (*note Completion::). If you insert left size adjusting macros
-such as '\left', '\bigl' etc. with 'TeX-insert-macro', it asks for left
+‘\left’-‘\right’, ‘\bigl’-‘\bigr’ and so on. You can avoid unbalanced
+pairs with the help of ‘TeX-insert-macro’, bound to ‘C-c C-m’ or ‘C-c
+<RET>’ (*note Completion::). If you insert left size adjusting macros
+such as ‘\left’, ‘\bigl’ etc. with ‘TeX-insert-macro’, it asks for left
brace to use and supplies automatically right size adjusting macros such
-as '\right', '\bigr' etc. and corresponding right brace in addtion to
+as ‘\right’, ‘\bigr’ etc. and corresponding right brace in addtion to
the intended left macro and left brace.
- The completion by 'TeX-insert-macro' also applies when entering
-macros such as '\langle', '\lfloor' and '\lceil', which produce the left
-part of the paired braces. For example, inserting '\lfloor' by 'C-c
-C-m' is immediately followed by the insertion of '\rfloor'. In
-addition, if the point was located just after '\left' or its friends,
-the corresponding '\right' etc. will be inserted in front of '\rfloor'.
+ The completion by ‘TeX-insert-macro’ also applies when entering
+macros such as ‘\langle’, ‘\lfloor’ and ‘\lceil’, which produce the left
+part of the paired braces. For example, inserting ‘\lfloor’ by ‘C-c
+C-m’ is immediately followed by the insertion of ‘\rfloor’. In
+addition, if the point was located just after ‘\left’ or its friends,
+the corresponding ‘\right’ etc. will be inserted in front of ‘\rfloor’.
In both cases, active region is honored.
- As a side effect, when 'LaTeX-math-mode' (*note Mathematics::) is on,
-just typing '`(' inserts not only '\langle', but also '\rangle'.
+ As a side effect, when ‘LaTeX-math-mode’ (*note Mathematics::) is on,
+just typing ‘`(’ inserts not only ‘\langle’, but also ‘\rangle’.
If you do not like such auto completion at all, it can be disabled by
a user option.
@@ -1569,47 +1583,47 @@ a user option.
macros and braces is suppressed.
When you edit LaTeX documents, you can enable automatic brace pairing
-when typing '(', '{' and '['.
+when typing ‘(’, ‘{’ and ‘[’.
-- User Option: LaTeX-electric-left-right-brace
- If this option is on, just typing '(', '{' or '[' immediately adds
- the corresponding right brace ')', '}' or ']'. The point is left
+ If this option is on, just typing ‘(’, ‘{’ or ‘[’ immediately adds
+ the corresponding right brace ‘)’, ‘}’ or ‘]’. The point is left
after the opening brace. If there is an active region, braces are
put around it.
They recognize the preceding backslash or size adjusting macros
- such as '\left', '\bigl' etc., so the following completions will
+ such as ‘\left’, ‘\bigl’ etc., so the following completions will
occur:
- * (when typing single left brace)
+ • (when typing single left brace)
- - '(' -> '()'
+ − ‘(’ -> ‘()’
- - '{' -> '{}'
+ − ‘{’ -> ‘{}’
- - '[' -> '[]'
+ − ‘[’ -> ‘[]’
- * (when typing left brace just after a backslash)
+ • (when typing left brace just after a backslash)
- - '\(' -> '\(\)'
+ − ‘\(’ -> ‘\(\)’
- - '\{' -> '\{\}'
+ − ‘\{’ -> ‘\{\}’
- - '\[' -> '\[\]'
+ − ‘\[’ -> ‘\[\]’
- * (when typing just after '\left' or '\bigl')
+ • (when typing just after ‘\left’ or ‘\bigl’)
- - '\left(' -> '\left(\right)'
+ − ‘\left(’ -> ‘\left(\right)’
- - '\bigl[' -> '\bigl[\bigr]'
+ − ‘\bigl[’ -> ‘\bigl[\bigr]’
- * (when typing just after '\Bigl\')
+ • (when typing just after ‘\Bigl\’)
- - '\Bigl\{' -> '\Bigl\{\Bigr\}'
+ − ‘\Bigl\{’ -> ‘\Bigl\{\Bigr\}’
This auto completion feature may be a bit annoying when editing an
- already existing LaTeX document. In that case, use 'C-u 1' or
- 'C-q' before typing '(', '{' or '['. Then no completion is done
+ already existing LaTeX document. In that case, use ‘C-u 1’ or
+ ‘C-q’ before typing ‘(’, ‘{’ or ‘[’. Then no completion is done
and just a single left brace is inserted. In fact, with optional
prefix ARG, just that many open braces are inserted without any
completion.
@@ -1623,59 +1637,59 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Font Specifiers, Next:
Sectioning, Prev: Quotes, Up
Perhaps the most used keyboard commands of AUCTeX are the short-cuts
available for easy insertion of font changing macros.
- If you give an argument (that is, type 'C-u') to the font command,
+ If you give an argument (that is, type ‘C-u’) to the font command,
the innermost font will be replaced, i.e. the font in the TeX group
around point will be changed. The following table shows the available
-commands, with '-!-' indicating the position where the text will be
+commands, with ‘★’ indicating the position where the text will be
inserted.
-'C-c C-f C-b'
- Insert bold face '\textbf{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-b’
+ Insert bold face ‘\textbf{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-m'
- Insert medium face '\textmd{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-m’
+ Insert medium face ‘\textmd{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-i'
- Insert italics '\textit{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-i’
+ Insert italics ‘\textit{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-e'
- Insert _emphasized_ '\emph{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-e’
+ Insert _emphasized_ ‘\emph{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-s'
- Insert slanted '\textsl{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-s’
+ Insert slanted ‘\textsl{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-r'
- Insert roman '\textrm{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-r’
+ Insert roman ‘\textrm{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-f'
- Insert sans serif '\textsf{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-f’
+ Insert sans serif ‘\textsf{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-t'
- Insert typewriter '\texttt{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-t’
+ Insert typewriter ‘\texttt{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-c'
- Insert SMALL CAPS '\textsc{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-c’
+ Insert SMALL CAPS ‘\textsc{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-l'
- Insert upper lower case '\textulc{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-l’
+ Insert upper lower case ‘\textulc{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-w'
- Insert SWASH '\textsw{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-w’
+ Insert SWASH ‘\textsw{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-n'
- Insert normal '\textnormal{-!-}' text.
+‘C-c C-f C-n’
+ Insert normal ‘\textnormal{★}’ text.
-'C-c C-f C-d'
+‘C-c C-f C-d’
Delete the innermost font specification containing point.
-- Command: TeX-font REPLACE WHAT
- ('C-c C-f') Insert template for font change command.
+ (‘C-c C-f’) Insert template for font change command.
If REPLACE is not nil, replace current font. WHAT determines the
- font to use, as specified by 'TeX-font-list'.
+ font to use, as specified by ‘TeX-font-list’.
-- User Option: TeX-font-list
- List of fonts used by 'TeX-font'.
+ List of fonts used by ‘TeX-font’.
Each entry is a list with three elements. The first element is the
key to activate the font. The second element is the string to
@@ -1684,8 +1698,8 @@ inserted.
not nil.
-- User Option: LaTeX-font-list
- List of fonts used by 'TeX-font' in LaTeX mode. It has the same
- structure as 'TeX-font-list'.
+ List of fonts used by ‘TeX-font’ in LaTeX mode. It has the same
+ structure as ‘TeX-font-list’.
File: auctex.info, Node: Sectioning, Next: Environments, Prev: Font
Specifiers, Up: Editing
@@ -1693,9 +1707,9 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Sectioning, Next:
Environments, Prev: Font Specifier
2.3 Inserting chapters, sections, etc.
======================================
-Insertion of sectioning macros, that is '\chapter', '\section',
-'\subsection', etc. and accompanying '\label''s may be eased by using
-'C-c C-s'. This command is highly customizable, the following describes
+Insertion of sectioning macros, that is ‘\chapter’, ‘\section’,
+‘\subsection’, etc. and accompanying ‘\label’’s may be eased by using
+‘C-c C-s’. This command is highly customizable, the following describes
the default behavior.
When invoking you will be asked for a section macro to insert. An
@@ -1706,17 +1720,17 @@ command.
Next, you will be asked for the actual name of that section, and last
you will be asked for a label to be associated with that section. The
-label will be prefixed by the value specified in 'LaTeX-section-hook'.
+label will be prefixed by the value specified in ‘LaTeX-section-hook’.
-- Command: LaTeX-section ARG
- ('C-c C-s') Insert a sectioning command.
+ (‘C-c C-s’) Insert a sectioning command.
Determine the type of section to be inserted, by the argument ARG.
- * If ARG is nil or missing, use the current level.
- * If ARG is a list (selected by C-u), go downward one level.
- * If ARG is negative, go up that many levels.
- * If ARG is positive or zero, use absolute level:
+ • If ARG is nil or missing, use the current level.
+ • If ARG is a list (selected by C-u), go downward one level.
+ • If ARG is negative, go up that many levels.
+ • If ARG is positive or zero, use absolute level:
+ 0 : part
+ 1 : chapter
+ 2 : section
@@ -1727,54 +1741,54 @@ label will be prefixed by the value specified in
'LaTeX-section-hook'.
The following variables can be set to customize the function.
- 'LaTeX-section-hook'
+ ‘LaTeX-section-hook’
Hooks to be run when inserting a section.
- 'LaTeX-section-label'
+ ‘LaTeX-section-label’
Prefix to all section references.
- The precise behavior of 'LaTeX-section' is defined by the contents of
-'LaTeX-section-hook'.
+ The precise behavior of ‘LaTeX-section’ is defined by the contents of
+‘LaTeX-section-hook’.
-- User Option: LaTeX-section-hook
List of hooks to run when a new section is inserted.
The following variables are set before the hooks are run
- 'LaTeX-level'
+ ‘LaTeX-level’
Numeric section level, default set by prefix arg to
- 'LaTeX-section'.
- 'LaTeX-name'
- Name of the sectioning command, derived from 'LaTeX-level'.
- 'LaTeX-title'
+ ‘LaTeX-section’.
+ ‘LaTeX-name’
+ Name of the sectioning command, derived from ‘LaTeX-level’.
+ ‘LaTeX-title’
The title of the section, default to an empty string.
- 'LaTeX-toc'
+ ‘LaTeX-toc’
Entry for the table of contents list, default nil.
- 'LaTeX-done-mark'
+ ‘LaTeX-done-mark’
Position of point afterwards, default nil meaning after the
inserted text.
A number of hooks are already defined. Most likely, you will be
able to get the desired functionality by choosing from these hooks.
- 'LaTeX-section-heading'
+ ‘LaTeX-section-heading’
Query the user about the name of the sectioning command.
- Modifies 'LaTeX-level' and 'LaTeX-name'.
- 'LaTeX-section-title'
+ Modifies ‘LaTeX-level’ and ‘LaTeX-name’.
+ ‘LaTeX-section-title’
Query the user about the title of the section. Modifies
- 'LaTeX-title'.
- 'LaTeX-section-toc'
- Query the user for the toc entry. Modifies 'LaTeX-toc'.
- 'LaTeX-section-section'
- Insert LaTeX section command according to 'LaTeX-name',
- 'LaTeX-title', and 'LaTeX-toc'. If 'LaTeX-toc' is nil, no toc
- entry is inserted. If 'LaTeX-toc' or 'LaTeX-title' are empty
- strings, 'LaTeX-done-mark' will be placed at the point they
+ ‘LaTeX-title’.
+ ‘LaTeX-section-toc’
+ Query the user for the toc entry. Modifies ‘LaTeX-toc’.
+ ‘LaTeX-section-section’
+ Insert LaTeX section command according to ‘LaTeX-name’,
+ ‘LaTeX-title’, and ‘LaTeX-toc’. If ‘LaTeX-toc’ is nil, no toc
+ entry is inserted. If ‘LaTeX-toc’ or ‘LaTeX-title’ are empty
+ strings, ‘LaTeX-done-mark’ will be placed at the point they
should be inserted.
- 'LaTeX-section-label'
+ ‘LaTeX-section-label’
Insert a label after the section command. Controlled by the
- variable 'LaTeX-section-label'.
+ variable ‘LaTeX-section-label’.
- To get a full featured 'LaTeX-section' command, insert
+ To get a full featured ‘LaTeX-section’ command, insert
(setq LaTeX-section-hook
'(LaTeX-section-heading
@@ -1783,10 +1797,10 @@ label will be prefixed by the value specified in
'LaTeX-section-hook'.
LaTeX-section-section
LaTeX-section-label))
- in your init file such as 'init.el' or '.emacs'.
+ in your init file such as ‘init.el’ or ‘.emacs’.
- The behavior of 'LaTeX-section-label' is determined by the variable
-'LaTeX-section-label'.
+ The behavior of ‘LaTeX-section-label’ is determined by the variable
+‘LaTeX-section-label’.
-- User Option: LaTeX-section-label
Default prefix when asking for a label.
@@ -1798,8 +1812,8 @@ label will be prefixed by the value specified in
'LaTeX-section-hook'.
prefix. If the name is not found, or if the cdr is nil, no label
is inserted.
- By default, chapters have a prefix of 'cha:' while sections and
- subsections have a prefix of 'sec:'. Labels are not automatically
+ By default, chapters have a prefix of ‘cha:’ while sections and
+ subsections have a prefix of ‘sec:’. Labels are not automatically
inserted for other types of sections.
@@ -1809,23 +1823,23 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Environments, Next:
Mathematics, Prev: Sectioning,
===================================
A large apparatus is available that supports insertions of environments,
-that is '\begin{}' -- '\end{}' pairs.
+that is ‘\begin{}’ — ‘\end{}’ pairs.
AUCTeX is aware of most of the actual environments available in a
-specific document. This is achieved by examining your '\documentclass'
+specific document. This is achieved by examining your ‘\documentclass’
command, and consulting a precompiled list of environments available in
a large number of styles.
Most of these are described further in the following sections, and
you may easily specify more. *Note Customizing Environments::.
- You insert an environment with 'C-c C-e', and select an environment
+ You insert an environment with ‘C-c C-e’, and select an environment
type. Depending on the environment, AUCTeX may ask more questions about
-the optional parts of the selected environment type. With 'C-u C-c C-e'
+the optional parts of the selected environment type. With ‘C-u C-c C-e’
you will change the current environment.
-- Command: LaTeX-environment ARG
- ('C-c C-e') AUCTeX will prompt you for an environment to insert.
+ (‘C-c C-e’) AUCTeX will prompt you for an environment to insert.
At this prompt, you may press <TAB> or <SPC> to complete a
partially written name, and/or to get a list of available
environments. After selection of a specific environment AUCTeX may
@@ -1836,10 +1850,10 @@ you will change the current environment.
environment is inserted.
AUCTeX helps you adding labels to environments which use them, such
-as 'equation', 'figure', 'table', etc... When you insert one of the
-supported environments with 'C-c C-e', you will be automatically
+as ‘equation’, ‘figure’, ‘table’, etc... When you insert one of the
+supported environments with ‘C-c C-e’, you will be automatically
prompted for a label. You can select the prefix to be used for such
-environments with the 'LaTeX-label-alist' variable.
+environments with the ‘LaTeX-label-alist’ variable.
-- User Option: LaTeX-label-alist
List the prefixes to be used for the label of each supported
environment.
@@ -1851,34 +1865,34 @@ environments with the 'LaTeX-label-alist' variable.
automatically inserted for that environment.
If you want to automatically insert a label for a environment but
- with an empty prefix, use the empty string '""' as the cdr of the
+ with an empty prefix, use the empty string ‘""’ as the cdr of the
corresponding entry.
As a default selection, AUCTeX will suggest the environment last
inserted or, as the first choice the value of the variable
-'LaTeX-default-environment'.
+‘LaTeX-default-environment’.
-- User Option: LaTeX-default-environment
- Default environment to insert when invoking 'LaTeX-environment'
- first time. When the current environment is 'document', it is
- overriden by 'LaTeX-default-document-environment'.
+ Default environment to insert when invoking ‘LaTeX-environment’
+ first time. When the current environment is ‘document’, it is
+ overriden by ‘LaTeX-default-document-environment’.
-- Variable: LaTeX-default-document-environment
- Default environment when invoking 'LaTeX-environment' and the
- current environment is 'document'. It is intended to be used in
- LaTeX class style files. For example, in 'beamer.el' it is set to
- 'frame', in 'letter.el' to 'letter', and in 'slides.el' to 'slide'.
+ Default environment when invoking ‘LaTeX-environment’ and the
+ current environment is ‘document’. It is intended to be used in
+ LaTeX class style files. For example, in ‘beamer.el’ it is set to
+ ‘frame’, in ‘letter.el’ to ‘letter’, and in ‘slides.el’ to ‘slide’.
If the document is empty, or the cursor is placed at the top of the
-document, AUCTeX will default to insert a 'document' environment
-prompting also for the insertion of '\documentclass' and '\usepackage'
+document, AUCTeX will default to insert a ‘document’ environment
+prompting also for the insertion of ‘\documentclass’ and ‘\usepackage’
macros. You will be prompted for a new package until you enter nothing.
-If you do not want to insert any '\usepackage' at all, just press <RET>
-at the first 'Packages' prompt.
+If you do not want to insert any ‘\usepackage’ at all, just press <RET>
+at the first ‘Packages’ prompt.
AUCTeX distinguishes normal and expert environments. By default, it
will offer completion only for normal environments. This behavior is
-controlled by the user option 'TeX-complete-expert-commands'.
+controlled by the user option ‘TeX-complete-expert-commands’.
-- User Option: TeX-complete-expert-commands
Complete macros and environments marked as expert commands.
@@ -1886,7 +1900,7 @@ controlled by the user option
'TeX-complete-expert-commands'.
Possible values are nil, t, or a list of style names.
nil
- Don't complete expert commands (default).
+ Don’t complete expert commands (default).
t
Always complete expert commands.
(STYLES ...)
@@ -1900,33 +1914,33 @@ controlled by the user option
'TeX-complete-expert-commands'.
* Tabular-like:: Tabular-like Environments
* Customizing Environments:: Customizing Environments
- You can close the current environment with 'C-c ]', but we suggest
-that you use 'C-c C-e' to insert complete environments instead.
+ You can close the current environment with ‘C-c ]’, but we suggest
+that you use ‘C-c C-e’ to insert complete environments instead.
-- Command: LaTeX-close-environment
- ('C-c ]') Insert an '\end' that matches the current environment.
+ (‘C-c ]’) Insert an ‘\end’ that matches the current environment.
AUCTeX offers keyboard shortcuts for moving point to the beginning
and to the end of the current environment.
-- Command: LaTeX-find-matching-begin
- ('C-M-a') Move point to the '\begin' of the current environment.
+ (‘C-M-a’) Move point to the ‘\begin’ of the current environment.
If this command is called inside a comment and
- 'LaTeX-syntactic-comments' is enabled, try to find the environment
+ ‘LaTeX-syntactic-comments’ is enabled, try to find the environment
in commented regions with the same comment prefix.
- The key bind 'C-M-a' actually calls 'beginning-of-defun', which in
- turn calls 'LaTeX-find-matching-begin'.
+ The key bind ‘C-M-a’ actually calls ‘beginning-of-defun’, which in
+ turn calls ‘LaTeX-find-matching-begin’.
-- Command: LaTeX-find-matching-end
- ('C-M-e') Move point to the '\end' of the current environment.
+ (‘C-M-e’) Move point to the ‘\end’ of the current environment.
If this command is called inside a comment and
- 'LaTeX-syntactic-comments' is enabled, try to find the environment
+ ‘LaTeX-syntactic-comments’ is enabled, try to find the environment
in commented regions with the same comment prefix.
- The key bind 'C-M-e' actually calls 'end-of-defun', which in turn
- calls 'LaTeX-find-matching-end'.
+ The key bind ‘C-M-e’ actually calls ‘end-of-defun’, which in turn
+ calls ‘LaTeX-find-matching-end’.
File: auctex.info, Node: Equations, Next: Floats, Up: Environments
@@ -1934,19 +1948,19 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Equations, Next: Floats,
Up: Environments
2.4.1 Equations
---------------
-When inserting equation-like environments, the '\label' will have a
+When inserting equation-like environments, the ‘\label’ will have a
default prefix, which is controlled by the following variables:
-- User Option: LaTeX-equation-label
- Prefix to use for 'equation' labels.
+ Prefix to use for ‘equation’ labels.
-- User Option: LaTeX-eqnarray-label
- Prefix to use for 'eqnarray' labels.
+ Prefix to use for ‘eqnarray’ labels.
-- User Option: LaTeX-amsmath-label
Prefix to use for amsmath equation labels. Amsmath equations
- include 'align', 'alignat', 'xalignat', 'multline', 'flalign' and
- 'gather'.
+ include ‘align’, ‘alignat’, ‘xalignat’, ‘multline’, ‘flalign’ and
+ ‘gather’.
File: auctex.info, Node: Floats, Next: Itemize-like, Prev: Equations, Up:
Environments
@@ -1955,36 +1969,36 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Floats, Next: Itemize-like,
Prev: Equations, Up: En
------------
Figures and tables (i.e., floats) may also be inserted using AUCTeX.
-After choosing either 'figure' or 'table' in the environment list
+After choosing either ‘figure’ or ‘table’ in the environment list
described above, you will be prompted for a number of additional things.
FLOAT POSITION
This is the optional argument of float environments that controls
how they are placed in the final document. In LaTeX this is a
- sequence of the letters 'htbp' as described in the LaTeX manual.
- The value will default to the value of 'LaTeX-float'.
+ sequence of the letters ‘htbp’ as described in the LaTeX manual.
+ The value will default to the value of ‘LaTeX-float’.
CAPTION
This is the caption of the float. The default is to insert the
caption at the bottom of the float. You can specify floats where
the caption should be placed at the top with
- 'LaTeX-top-caption-list'.
+ ‘LaTeX-top-caption-list’.
SHORT CAPTION
If the specified caption is greater than a specific length, then a
short caption is prompted for and it is inserted as an optional
- argument to the '\caption' macro. The length that a caption needs
+ argument to the ‘\caption’ macro. The length that a caption needs
to be before prompting for a short version is controlled by
- 'LaTeX-short-caption-prompt-length'.
+ ‘LaTeX-short-caption-prompt-length’.
LABEL
The label of this float. The label will have a default prefix,
- which is controlled by the variables 'LaTeX-figure-label' and
- 'LaTeX-table-label'.
+ which is controlled by the variables ‘LaTeX-figure-label’ and
+ ‘LaTeX-table-label’.
Moreover, you will be asked if you want the contents of the float
environment to be horizontally centered. Upon a positive answer a
-'\centering' macro will be inserted at the beginning of the float
+‘\centering’ macro will be inserted at the beginning of the float
environment.
-- User Option: LaTeX-float
@@ -2009,15 +2023,15 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Itemize-like, Next:
Tabular-like, Prev: Floats, Up:
2.4.3 Itemize-like Environments
-------------------------------
-In an itemize-like environment, nodes (i.e., '\item's) may be inserted
-using 'C-c <LFD>' or 'M-<RET>'. The latter is only defined as an alias
+In an itemize-like environment, nodes (i.e., ‘\item’s) may be inserted
+using ‘C-c <LFD>’ or ‘M-<RET>’. The latter is only defined as an alias
if the key binding is still available.
-- Command: LaTeX-insert-item
- ('C-c <LFD>' or 'M-<RET>') Close the current item, move to the next
- line and insert an appropriate '\item' for the current environment.
- That is, 'itemize' and 'enumerate' will have '\item ' inserted,
- while 'description' will have '\item[] ' inserted.
+ (‘C-c <LFD>’ or ‘M-<RET>’) Close the current item, move to the next
+ line and insert an appropriate ‘\item’ for the current environment.
+ That is, ‘itemize’ and ‘enumerate’ will have ‘\item ’ inserted,
+ while ‘description’ will have ‘\item[] ’ inserted.
-- User Option: TeX-arg-item-label-p
If non-nil, you will always be asked for optional label in items.
@@ -2029,7 +2043,7 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Tabular-like, Next:
Customizing Environments, Prev:
2.4.4 Tabular-like Environments
-------------------------------
-When inserting Tabular-like environments, that is, 'tabular' 'array'
+When inserting Tabular-like environments, that is, ‘tabular’ ‘array’
etc., you will be prompted for a template for that environment. Related
variables:
@@ -2041,29 +2055,29 @@ variables:
-- User Option: LaTeX-default-position
Default position string for array and tabular environments. If
- nil, act like the empty string is given, but don't prompt for a
+ nil, act like the empty string is given, but don’t prompt for a
position.
AUCTeX calculates the number of columns from the format string and
inserts the suitable number of ampersands.
- You can use 'C-c <LFD>' or 'M-<RET>' ('LaTeX-insert-item') to
-terminate rows in these environments. It supplies line break macro '\\'
+ You can use ‘C-c <LFD>’ or ‘M-<RET>’ (‘LaTeX-insert-item’) to
+terminate rows in these environments. It supplies line break macro ‘\\’
and inserts the suitable number of ampersands on the next line. AUCTeX
-also supports the '*{num}{cols}' notation (which may contain another
-'*'-expression) in the format string when calculating the number of
-ampersands. Please note that 'num' and 'cols' must be enclosed in
-braces; expressions like '*2l' are not recognized correctly by the
+also supports the ‘*{num}{cols}’ notation (which may contain another
+‘*’-expression) in the format string when calculating the number of
+ampersands. Please note that ‘num’ and ‘cols’ must be enclosed in
+braces; expressions like ‘*2l’ are not recognized correctly by the
algorithm.
-- Command: LaTeX-insert-item
- ('C-c <LFD>' or 'M-<RET>') Close the current row with '\\', move to
+ (‘C-c <LFD>’ or ‘M-<RET>’) Close the current row with ‘\\’, move to
the next line and insert an appropriate number of ampersands for
the current environment.
Similar supports are provided for various amsmath environments such
-as 'align', 'gather', 'alignat', 'matrix' etc. Try typing 'C-c <LFD>'
-or 'M-<RET>' in these environments. It recognizes the current
+as ‘align’, ‘gather’, ‘alignat’, ‘matrix’ etc. Try typing ‘C-c <LFD>’
+or ‘M-<RET>’ in these environments. It recognizes the current
environment and does the appropriate job depending on the context.
@@ -2084,41 +2098,41 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Mathematics, Next:
Completion, Prev: Environments,
TeX is written by a mathematician, and has always contained good support
for formatting mathematical text. AUCTeX supports this tradition, by
offering a special minor mode for entering text with many mathematical
-symbols. You can enter this mode by typing 'C-c ~'.
+symbols. You can enter this mode by typing ‘C-c ~’.
-- Command: LaTeX-math-mode
- ('C-c ~') Toggle LaTeX Math mode. This is a minor mode rebinding
- the key 'LaTeX-math-abbrev-prefix' to allow easy typing of
- mathematical symbols. '`' will read a character from the keyboard,
- and insert the symbol as specified in 'LaTeX-math-default' and
- 'LaTeX-math-list'. If given a prefix argument, the symbol will be
+ (‘C-c ~’) Toggle LaTeX Math mode. This is a minor mode rebinding
+ the key ‘LaTeX-math-abbrev-prefix’ to allow easy typing of
+ mathematical symbols. ‘`’ will read a character from the keyboard,
+ and insert the symbol as specified in ‘LaTeX-math-default’ and
+ ‘LaTeX-math-list’. If given a prefix argument, the symbol will be
surrounded by dollar signs.
- You can use another prefix key (instead of '`') by setting the
-variable 'LaTeX-math-abbrev-prefix'.
+ You can use another prefix key (instead of ‘`’) by setting the
+variable ‘LaTeX-math-abbrev-prefix’.
To enable LaTeX Math mode by default, add the following in your init
-file such as 'init.el' or '.emacs':
+file such as ‘init.el’ or ‘.emacs’:
(add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook #'LaTeX-math-mode)
-- User Option: LaTeX-math-abbrev-prefix
- A string containing the prefix of 'LaTeX-math-mode' commands; This
- value defaults to '`'.
+ A string containing the prefix of ‘LaTeX-math-mode’ commands; This
+ value defaults to ‘`’.
The string has to be a key or key sequence in a format understood
- by the 'kbd' macro. This corresponds to the syntax usually used in
+ by the ‘kbd’ macro. This corresponds to the syntax usually used in
the manuals for Emacs Lisp.
- The variable 'LaTeX-math-list' allows you to add your own mappings.
+ The variable ‘LaTeX-math-list’ allows you to add your own mappings.
-- User Option: LaTeX-math-list
A list containing user-defined keys and commands to be used in
LaTeX Math mode. Each entry should be a list of two to four
elements.
- First, the key to be used after 'LaTeX-math-abbrev-prefix' for
- macro insertion. The key can be a character (e.g. '?o') for a
- single stroke or a string (e.g. '"o a"') for a multi-stroke
+ First, the key to be used after ‘LaTeX-math-abbrev-prefix’ for
+ macro insertion. The key can be a character (e.g. ‘?o’) for a
+ single stroke or a string (e.g. ‘"o a"’) for a multi-stroke
binding. If it is nil, the symbol has no associated keystroke (it
is available in the menu, though).
@@ -2136,13 +2150,13 @@ file such as 'init.el' or '.emacs':
Your Emacs built must be able to display include Unicode characters
in menus for this feature.
- AUCTeX's reference card 'tex-ref.tex' includes a list of all math
+ AUCTeX’s reference card ‘tex-ref.tex’ includes a list of all math
mode commands.
AUCTeX can help you write subscripts and superscripts in math
constructs by automatically inserting a pair of braces after typing <_>
or <^> respectively and putting point between the braces. In order to
-enable this feature, set the variable 'TeX-electric-sub-and-superscript'
+enable this feature, set the variable ‘TeX-electric-sub-and-superscript’
to a non-nil value.
-- User Option: TeX-electric-sub-and-superscript
@@ -2153,8 +2167,8 @@ characters, when you begin to enter math constructs.
-- User Option: TeX-math-input-method-off-regexp
Input method matching this regular expression is turned off when
- '$' is typed to begin math mode or a math environment is inserted
- by 'C-c C-e' ('LaTeX-environment').
+ ‘$’ is typed to begin math mode or a math environment is inserted
+ by ‘C-c C-e’ (‘LaTeX-environment’).
File: auctex.info, Node: Completion, Next: Marking, Prev: Mathematics, Up:
Editing
@@ -2162,25 +2176,25 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Completion, Next: Marking,
Prev: Mathematics, Up: E
2.6 Completion
==============
-Emacs lisp programmers probably know the 'lisp-complete-symbol' command
-which was bound to 'M-<TAB>' until completion-at-point became the new
+Emacs lisp programmers probably know the ‘lisp-complete-symbol’ command
+which was bound to ‘M-<TAB>’ until completion-at-point became the new
standard completion facility (see below). Users of the wonderful ispell
-mode know and love the 'ispell-complete-word' command from that package.
-Similarly, AUCTeX has a 'TeX-complete-symbol' command, by default bound
-to 'M-<TAB>' which is equivalent to 'C-M-i'. Using
-'TeX-complete-symbol' makes it easier to type and remember the names of
+mode know and love the ‘ispell-complete-word’ command from that package.
+Similarly, AUCTeX has a ‘TeX-complete-symbol’ command, by default bound
+to ‘M-<TAB>’ which is equivalent to ‘C-M-i’. Using
+‘TeX-complete-symbol’ makes it easier to type and remember the names of
long LaTeX macros.
- In order to use 'TeX-complete-symbol', you should write a backslash
-and the start of the macro. Typing 'M-<TAB>' will now complete as much
+ In order to use ‘TeX-complete-symbol’, you should write a backslash
+and the start of the macro. Typing ‘M-<TAB>’ will now complete as much
of the macro, as it unambiguously can. For example, if you type
-''\renewc'' and then 'M-<TAB>', it will expand to ''\renewcommand''.
-But there's more: if point is just after '\begin{', then
-'TeX-complete-symbol' will complete LaTeX environments, etc. This is
-controlled by 'TeX-complete-list'.
+‘‘\renewc’’ and then ‘M-<TAB>’, it will expand to ‘‘\renewcommand’’.
+But there’s more: if point is just after ‘\begin{’, then
+‘TeX-complete-symbol’ will complete LaTeX environments, etc. This is
+controlled by ‘TeX-complete-list’.
-- Command: TeX-complete-symbol
- ('M-<TAB>') Complete TeX symbol before point.
+ (‘M-<TAB>’) Complete TeX symbol before point.
-- Variable: TeX-complete-list
List of ways to complete the preceding text.
@@ -2188,7 +2202,7 @@ controlled by 'TeX-complete-list'.
Each entry is a list with the following elements:
1. Regexp matching the preceding text or a predicate of arity 0
- which returns non-nil and sets 'match-data' appropriately if
+ which returns non-nil and sets ‘match-data’ appropriately if
it is applicable.
2. A number indicating the subgroup in the regexp containing the
text.
@@ -2201,77 +2215,87 @@ controlled by 'TeX-complete-list'.
2. Function to do the actual completion.
More recent Emacs versions have a new completion mechanism. Modes
-may define and register custom 'completion-at-point' functions and when
-the user invokes 'completion-at-point' (usually bound to 'M-<TAB>'), all
+may define and register custom ‘completion-at-point’ functions and when
+the user invokes ‘completion-at-point’ (usually bound to ‘M-<TAB>’), all
such registered functions are consulted for checking for possible
-completions. Modern completion UIs like company-mode support this
-completion-at-point facility.
+completions. Modern completion UIs like company-mode or corfu support
+this completion-at-point facility.
-- Function: TeX--completion-at-point
- AUCTeX's completion-at-point function which is automatically added
- to 'completion-at-point-functions' in TeX and LaTeX buffers.
+ AUCTeX’s completion-at-point function which is automatically added
+ to ‘completion-at-point-functions’ in TeX and LaTeX buffers.
It offers the same completion candidates as would
- 'TeX-complete-symbol' (and is also controlled by
- 'TeX-complete-list') except that it doesn't fall back on
- 'ispell-complete-word' which would be awkward with completion UIs
+ ‘TeX-complete-symbol’ (and is also controlled by
+ ‘TeX-complete-list’) except that it doesn’t fall back on
+ ‘ispell-complete-word’ which would be awkward with completion UIs
like company-mode.
- A more direct way to insert a macro is with 'TeX-insert-macro', bound
-to 'C-c C-m' which is equivalent to 'C-c <RET>'. It has the advantage
+ -- Function: LaTeX--arguments-completion-at-point
+ AUCTeX’s completion-at-point function inside arguments which is
+ automatically added to ‘completion-at-point-functions’ in LaTeX
+ buffers.
+
+ It offers the completion candidates stored in the variables
+ ‘TeX-symbol-list’ and ‘LaTeX-environment-list’ for single
+ candidate, multiple candidates separated by commas, or key-value
+ candidates separated by commas and/or equal signs.
+
+ A more direct way to insert a macro is with ‘TeX-insert-macro’, bound
+to ‘C-c C-m’ which is equivalent to ‘C-c <RET>’. It has the advantage
over completion that it knows about the argument of most standard LaTeX
macros, and will prompt for them. It also knows about the type of the
arguments, so it will for example give completion for the argument to
-'\include'. Some examples are listed below.
+‘\include’. Some examples are listed below.
-- Command: TeX-insert-macro
- ('C-c C-m' or 'C-c <RET>') Prompt (with completion) for the name of
+ (‘C-c C-m’ or ‘C-c <RET>’) Prompt (with completion) for the name of
a TeX macro, and if AUCTeX knows the macro, prompt for each
argument.
As a default selection, AUCTeX will suggest the macro last inserted
-or, as the first choice the value of the variable 'TeX-default-macro'.
+or, as the first choice the value of the variable ‘TeX-default-macro’.
-- User Option: TeX-default-macro
- Default macro to insert when invoking 'TeX-insert-macro' first
+ Default macro to insert when invoking ‘TeX-insert-macro’ first
time.
-- User Option: TeX-insert-macro-default-style
- Specifies whether 'TeX-insert-macro' will ask for all optional
+ Specifies whether ‘TeX-insert-macro’ will ask for all optional
arguments.
- If set to the symbol 'show-optional-args', 'TeX-insert-macro' asks
+ If set to the symbol ‘show-optional-args’, ‘TeX-insert-macro’ asks
for optional arguments of TeX marcos, unless the previous optional
- argument has been rejected. If set to 'show-all-optional-args',
- 'TeX-insert-macro' asks for all optional arguments.
- 'mandatory-args-only', 'TeX-insert-macro' asks only for mandatory
- arguments. When 'TeX-insert-macro' is called with prefix argument
- ('C-u'), it's the other way round.
+ argument has been rejected. If set to ‘show-all-optional-args’,
+ ‘TeX-insert-macro’ asks for all optional arguments.
+ ‘mandatory-args-only’, ‘TeX-insert-macro’ asks only for mandatory
+ arguments. When ‘TeX-insert-macro’ is called with prefix argument
+ (‘C-u’), it’s the other way round.
Note that for some macros, there are special mechanisms, e.g.
- 'TeX-arg-cite-note-p' and 'LaTeX-includegraphics-options-alist'.
+ ‘TeX-arg-cite-note-p’ and ‘LaTeX-includegraphics-options-alist’.
- A faster alternative is to enable the option 'TeX-electric-escape'.
+ A faster alternative is to enable the option ‘TeX-electric-escape’.
-- User Option: TeX-electric-escape
- If this is non-nil, typing the TeX escape character '\' will invoke
- the command 'TeX-electric-macro'.
+ If this is non-nil, typing the TeX escape character ‘\’ will invoke
+ the command ‘TeX-electric-macro’.
- In Texinfo mode, the command is invoked by '@' instead.
+ In Texinfo mode, the command is invoked by ‘@’ instead.
- The difference between 'TeX-insert-macro' and 'TeX-electric-macro' is
+ The difference between ‘TeX-insert-macro’ and ‘TeX-electric-macro’ is
that space key <SPC> will complete and exit from the minibuffer in
-'TeX-electric-macro'. Use <TAB> if you merely want to complete.
+‘TeX-electric-macro’. Use <TAB> if you merely want to complete.
-- Command: TeX-electric-macro
Prompt (with completion) for the name of a TeX macro, and if AUCTeX
knows the macro, prompt for each argument. Space (<SPC>) will
complete and exit.
- By default AUCTeX will put an empty set braces '{}' after a macro
+ By default AUCTeX will put an empty set braces ‘{}’ after a macro
with no arguments to stop it from eating the next whitespace. This is
suppressed inside math mode and can be disabled totally by setting
-'TeX-insert-braces' to nil.
+‘TeX-insert-braces’ to nil.
-- User Option: TeX-insert-braces
If non-nil, append a empty pair of braces after inserting a macro
@@ -2288,7 +2312,7 @@ suppressed inside math mode and can be disabled totally
by setting
If a macro has an element in this variable, AUCTeX will use its
value to decide what to do, whatever the value of the variable
- 'TeX-insert-braces'.
+ ‘TeX-insert-braces’.
Completions work because AUCTeX can analyze TeX files, and store
symbols in Emacs Lisp files for later retrieval. *Note Automatic::, for
@@ -2296,7 +2320,7 @@ more information.
AUCTeX distinguishes normal and expert macros. By default, it will
offer completion only for normal commands. This behavior can be
-controlled using the user option 'TeX-complete-expert-commands'.
+controlled using the user option ‘TeX-complete-expert-commands’.
-- User Option: TeX-complete-expert-commands
Complete macros and environments marked as expert commands.
@@ -2304,17 +2328,17 @@ controlled using the user option
'TeX-complete-expert-commands'.
Possible values are nil, t, or a list of style names.
nil
- Don't complete expert commands (default).
+ Don’t complete expert commands (default).
t
Always complete expert commands.
(STYLES ...)
Only complete expert commands of STYLES.
AUCTeX will also make completion for many macro arguments, for
-example existing labels when you enter a '\ref' macro with
-'TeX-insert-macro' or 'TeX-electric-macro', and BibTeX entries when you
-enter a '\cite' macro. For this kind of completion to work, parsing
-must be enabled as described in *note Parsing Files::. For '\cite' you
+example existing labels when you enter a ‘\ref’ macro with
+‘TeX-insert-macro’ or ‘TeX-electric-macro’, and BibTeX entries when you
+enter a ‘\cite’ macro. For this kind of completion to work, parsing
+must be enabled as described in *note Parsing Files::. For ‘\cite’ you
must also make sure that the BibTeX files have been saved at least once
after you enabled automatic parsing on save, and that the basename of
the BibTeX file does not conflict with the basename of one of TeX files.
@@ -2325,10 +2349,10 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Marking, Next: Commenting,
Prev: Completion, Up: Ed
2.7 Marking Environments, Sections, or Texinfo Nodes
====================================================
-You can mark the current environment by typing 'C-c .', or the current
-section by typing 'C-c *'.
+You can mark the current environment by typing ‘C-c .’, or the current
+section by typing ‘C-c *’.
- In Texinfo documents you can type 'C-M-h' to mark the current node.
+ In Texinfo documents you can type ‘C-M-h’ to mark the current node.
When the region is set, the point is moved to its beginning and the
mark to its end.
@@ -2345,7 +2369,7 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Marking (LaTeX), Next: Marking
(Texinfo), Up: Markin
----------------------------------------------------------
-- Command: LaTeX-mark-section
- ('C-c *') Set mark at end of current logical section, and point at
+ (‘C-c *’) Set mark at end of current logical section, and point at
top.
With a non-nil prefix argument, mark only the region from the
@@ -2354,7 +2378,7 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Marking (LaTeX), Next: Marking
(Texinfo), Up: Markin
subsections are also marked along with current section.
-- Command: LaTeX-mark-environment
- ('C-c .') Set mark to the end of the current environment and point
+ (‘C-c .’) Set mark to the end of the current environment and point
to the matching beginning.
If a prefix argument is given, mark the respective number of
@@ -2369,13 +2393,13 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Marking (Texinfo), Prev:
Marking (LaTeX), Up: Markin
------------------------------------------------------------
-- Command: Texinfo-mark-section
- ('C-c *') Mark the current section, with inclusion of any
+ (‘C-c *’) Mark the current section, with inclusion of any
containing node.
The current section is detected as starting by any of the
structuring commands matched by the regular expression in the
- variable 'outline-regexp' which in turn is a regular expression
- matching any element of the variable 'texinfo-section-list'.
+ variable ‘outline-regexp’ which in turn is a regular expression
+ matching any element of the variable ‘texinfo-section-list’.
With a non-nil prefix argument, mark only the region from the
current section start to the next sectioning command. Thereby
@@ -2387,7 +2411,7 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Marking (Texinfo), Prev:
Marking (LaTeX), Up: Markin
section.
-- Command: Texinfo-mark-environment
- ('C-c .') Set mark to the end of the current environment and point
+ (‘C-c .’) Set mark to the end of the current environment and point
to the matching beginning.
If a prefix argument is given, mark the respective number of
@@ -2396,10 +2420,10 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Marking (Texinfo), Prev:
Marking (LaTeX), Up: Markin
environments.
-- Command: Texinfo-mark-node
- ('C-M-h') Mark the current node. This is the node in which point
+ (‘C-M-h’) Mark the current node. This is the node in which point
is located. It is starting at the previous occurrence of the
- keyword '@node' and ending at next occurrence of the keywords
- '@node' or '@bye'.
+ keyword ‘@node’ and ending at next occurrence of the keywords
+ ‘@node’ or ‘@bye’.
File: auctex.info, Node: Commenting, Next: Indenting, Prev: Marking, Up:
Editing
@@ -2408,26 +2432,26 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Commenting, Next: Indenting,
Prev: Marking, Up: Edi
==============
It is often necessary to comment out temporarily a region of TeX or
-LaTeX code. This can be done with the commands 'C-c ;' and 'C-c %'.
-'C-c ;' will comment out all lines in the current region, while 'C-c %'
-will comment out the current paragraph. Type 'C-c ;' again to uncomment
-all lines of a commented region, or 'C-c %' again to uncomment all
+LaTeX code. This can be done with the commands ‘C-c ;’ and ‘C-c %’.
+‘C-c ;’ will comment out all lines in the current region, while ‘C-c %’
+will comment out the current paragraph. Type ‘C-c ;’ again to uncomment
+all lines of a commented region, or ‘C-c %’ again to uncomment all
comment lines around point. These commands will insert or remove a
-single '%' respectively.
+single ‘%’ respectively.
-- Command: TeX-comment-or-uncomment-region
- ('C-c ;') Add or remove '%' from the beginning of each line in the
+ (‘C-c ;’) Add or remove ‘%’ from the beginning of each line in the
current region. Uncommenting works only if the region encloses
solely commented lines. If AUCTeX should not try to guess if the
region should be commented or uncommented the commands
- 'TeX-comment-region' and 'TeX-uncomment-region' can be used to
+ ‘TeX-comment-region’ and ‘TeX-uncomment-region’ can be used to
explicitly comment or uncomment the region in concern.
-- Command: TeX-comment-or-uncomment-paragraph
- ('C-c %') Add or remove '%' from the beginning of each line in the
- current paragraph. When removing '%' characters the paragraph is
+ (‘C-c %’) Add or remove ‘%’ from the beginning of each line in the
+ current paragraph. When removing ‘%’ characters the paragraph is
considered to consist of all preceding and succeeding lines
- starting with a '%', until the first non-comment line.
+ starting with a ‘%’, until the first non-comment line.
File: auctex.info, Node: Indenting, Next: Filling, Prev: Commenting, Up:
Editing
@@ -2443,32 +2467,32 @@ reasons that you would indent ordinary computer
programs.
Indentation is done by LaTeX environments and by TeX groups, that is
the body of an environment is indented by the value of
-'LaTeX-indent-level' (default 2). Also, items of an 'itemize-like'
-environment are indented by the value of 'LaTeX-item-indent', default
--2. (Items are identified with the help of 'LaTeX-item-regexp'.) If
-more environments are nested, they are indented 'accumulated' just like
+‘LaTeX-indent-level’ (default 2). Also, items of an ‘itemize-like’
+environment are indented by the value of ‘LaTeX-item-indent’, default
+−2. (Items are identified with the help of ‘LaTeX-item-regexp’.) If
+more environments are nested, they are indented ‘accumulated’ just like
most programming languages usually are seen indented in nested
constructs.
You can explicitly indent single lines, usually by pressing <TAB>, or
-marked regions by calling 'indent-region' on it. If you have
-'auto-fill-mode' enabled and a line is broken while you type it, Emacs
+marked regions by calling ‘indent-region’ on it. If you have
+‘auto-fill-mode’ enabled and a line is broken while you type it, Emacs
automatically cares about the indentation in the following line. If you
want to have a similar behavior upon typing <RET>, you can customize the
-variable 'TeX-newline-function' and change the default of 'newline'
-which does no indentation to 'newline-and-indent' which indents the new
-line or 'reindent-then-newline-and-indent' which indents both the
+variable ‘TeX-newline-function’ and change the default of ‘newline’
+which does no indentation to ‘newline-and-indent’ which indents the new
+line or ‘reindent-then-newline-and-indent’ which indents both the
current and the new line.
There are certain LaTeX environments which should be indented in a
-special way, like 'tabular' or 'verbatim'. Those environments may be
-specified in the variable 'LaTeX-indent-environment-list' together with
-their special indentation functions. Taking the 'verbatim' environment
-as an example you can see that 'current-indentation' is used as the
+special way, like ‘tabular’ or ‘verbatim’. Those environments may be
+specified in the variable ‘LaTeX-indent-environment-list’ together with
+their special indentation functions. Taking the ‘verbatim’ environment
+as an example you can see that ‘current-indentation’ is used as the
indentation function. This will stop AUCTeX from doing any indentation
in the environment if you hit <TAB> for example.
- There are environments in 'LaTeX-indent-environment-list' which do
+ There are environments in ‘LaTeX-indent-environment-list’ which do
not bring a special indentation function with them. This is due to the
fact that first the respective functions are not implemented yet and
second that filling will be disabled for the specified environments.
@@ -2480,40 +2504,40 @@ contribute. (*Note Filling::, for further information
about the filling
functionality.)
The check for the indentation function may be enabled or disabled by
-customizing the variable 'LaTeX-indent-environment-check'.
+customizing the variable ‘LaTeX-indent-environment-check’.
For tabular-like environments, AUCTeX has a built-in function to
-indent according to preceding '&' signs and assigns it to all known
+indent according to preceding ‘&’ signs and assigns it to all known
tabular-like environments in the default value of
-'LaTeX-indent-environment-list'.
+‘LaTeX-indent-environment-list’.
As a side note with regard to formatting special environments: Newer
-Emacsen include 'align.el' and therefore provide some support for
-formatting 'tabular' and 'tabbing' environments with the function
-'align-current' which will nicely align columns in the source code.
+Emacsen include ‘align.el’ and therefore provide some support for
+formatting ‘tabular’ and ‘tabbing’ environments with the function
+‘align-current’ which will nicely align columns in the source code.
AUCTeX is able to format commented parts of your code just as any
other part. This means LaTeX environments and TeX groups in comments
will be indented syntactically correct if the variable
-'LaTeX-syntactic-comments' is set to t. If you disable it, comments
+‘LaTeX-syntactic-comments’ is set to t. If you disable it, comments
will be filled like normal text and no syntactic indentation will be
done.
Following you will find a list of most commands and variables related
to indenting with a small summary in each case:
-'<TAB>'
- 'LaTeX-indent-line' will indent the current line.
+‘<TAB>’
+ ‘LaTeX-indent-line’ will indent the current line.
-'<LFD>'
-'C-j'
- 'newline-and-indent' inserts a new line (much like <RET>) and moves
+‘<LFD>’
+‘C-j’
+ ‘newline-and-indent’ inserts a new line (much like <RET>) and moves
the cursor to an appropriate position by the left margin.
- Most keyboards nowadays lack a linefeed key and 'C-j' may be
+ Most keyboards nowadays lack a linefeed key and ‘C-j’ may be
tedious to type. Therefore you can customize AUCTeX to perform
indentation upon typing <RET> as well. The respective option is
- called 'TeX-newline-function'.
+ called ‘TeX-newline-function’.
-- User Option: LaTeX-indent-environment-list
List of environments with special indentation. The second element
@@ -2521,16 +2545,16 @@ to indenting with a small summary in each case:
columns.
-- User Option: LaTeX-indent-level
- Number of spaces to add to the indentation for each '\begin' not
- matched by a '\end'.
+ Number of spaces to add to the indentation for each ‘\begin’ not
+ matched by a ‘\end’.
-- User Option: LaTeX-item-indent
- Number of spaces to add to the indentation for '\item''s in list
+ Number of spaces to add to the indentation for ‘\item’’s in list
environments.
-- User Option: TeX-brace-indent-level
- Number of spaces to add to the indentation for each '{' not matched
- by a '}'.
+ Number of spaces to add to the indentation for each ‘{’ not matched
+ by a ‘}’.
-- User Option: LaTeX-syntactic-comments
If non-nil comments will be filled and indented according to LaTeX
@@ -2538,20 +2562,20 @@ to indenting with a small summary in each case:
-- User Option: TeX-newline-function
Used to specify the function which is called when <RET> is pressed.
- This will normally be 'newline' which simply inserts a new line.
+ This will normally be ‘newline’ which simply inserts a new line.
In case you want to have AUCTeX do indentation as well when you
- press <RET>, use the built-in functions 'newline-and-indent' or
- 'reindent-then-newline-and-indent'. The former inserts a new line
+ press <RET>, use the built-in functions ‘newline-and-indent’ or
+ ‘reindent-then-newline-and-indent’. The former inserts a new line
and indents the following line, i.e. it moves the cursor to the
right position and therefore acts as if you pressed <LFD>. The
latter function additionally indents the current line. If you
- choose 'Other', you can specify your own fancy function to be
+ choose ‘Other’, you can specify your own fancy function to be
called when <RET> is pressed.
- AUCTeX treats by default '\[...\]' math mode as a regular environment
+ AUCTeX treats by default ‘\[...\]’ math mode as a regular environment
and indents it accordingly. If you do not like such behavior you only
-need to remove '\|\[' and '\|\]' from 'LaTeX-begin-regexp' and
-'LaTeX-end-regexp' variables respectively.
+need to remove ‘\|\[’ and ‘\|\]’ from ‘LaTeX-begin-regexp’ and
+‘LaTeX-end-regexp’ variables respectively.
A closely related topic is indenting of text enclosed in square
brackets, parentheses and other pairs. AUCTeX offers two variables
@@ -2559,27 +2583,27 @@ which control if indentation happens inside these pairs.
-- User Option: TeX-indent-open-delimiters
This variable contains additional opening delimiters which increase
- indentation. For example add '[' to this variable to get text
+ indentation. For example add ‘[’ to this variable to get text
after a square bracket indented.
-- User Option: TeX-indent-close-delimiters
- This is the accompanying variable to 'TeX-indent-open-delimiters'
- decreasing the indentation again. This variable should contain ']'
- if 'TeX-indent-open-delimiters' is set like described above.
+ This is the accompanying variable to ‘TeX-indent-open-delimiters’
+ decreasing the indentation again. This variable should contain ‘]’
+ if ‘TeX-indent-open-delimiters’ is set like described above.
Note that this is an opt-in feature, both variables are initially set to
an empty string. That is because it introduces non-trivial side effects
-to include '[' and ']' in 'TeX-indent-open-delimiters' and
-'TeX-indent-close-delimiters'; if you only have an opening square
+to include ‘[’ and ‘]’ in ‘TeX-indent-open-delimiters’ and
+‘TeX-indent-close-delimiters’; if you only have an opening square
bracket in your text without closing it, wrong indentation persists in
the following text. For example, in math expression, half-open
-intervals are frequently written as '[0,10)' or '[0,10['. In such
+intervals are frequently written as ‘[0,10)’ or ‘[0,10[’. In such
cases, you can put the closing part as a comment in the same line in
order to have correct indentation after that:
$[0,10)$ % ]
$[0,10[$ % ]]
- Another example is '\left'-'\right' pair in equations. Similar
+ Another example is ‘\left’-‘\right’ pair in equations. Similar
workarounds are available:
\begin{equation}
\left[ % ]
@@ -2588,11 +2612,11 @@ workarounds are available:
abc
\end{equation}
- You can include parens '()' also in 'TeX-indent-open-delimiters' and
-'TeX-indent-close-delimiters' to enable indent inside them. Be prepared
+ You can include parens ‘()’ also in ‘TeX-indent-open-delimiters’ and
+‘TeX-indent-close-delimiters’ to enable indent inside them. Be prepared
for similar side effects when you do.
- Note that commented curly braces '{' and '}' aren't counted when
+ Note that commented curly braces ‘{’ and ‘}’ aren’t counted when
AUCTeX computes indentation.
@@ -2602,15 +2626,15 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Filling, Prev: Indenting,
Up: Editing
============
Filling deals with the insertion of line breaks to prevent lines from
-becoming wider than what is specified in 'fill-column'. The linebreaks
-will be inserted automatically if 'auto-fill-mode' is enabled. In this
+becoming wider than what is specified in ‘fill-column’. The linebreaks
+will be inserted automatically if ‘auto-fill-mode’ is enabled. In this
case the source is not only filled but also indented automatically as
you write it.
- 'auto-fill-mode' can be enabled for AUCTeX by calling
-'turn-on-auto-fill' in one of the hooks AUCTeX is running. *Note Modes
-and Hooks::. As an example, if you want to enable 'auto-fill-mode' in
-'LaTeX-mode', put the following into your init file:
+ ‘auto-fill-mode’ can be enabled for AUCTeX by calling
+‘turn-on-auto-fill’ in one of the hooks AUCTeX is running. *Note Modes
+and Hooks::. As an example, if you want to enable ‘auto-fill-mode’ in
+‘LaTeX-mode’, put the following into your init file:
(add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook #'turn-on-auto-fill)
@@ -2620,8 +2644,8 @@ filling in AUCTeX will indent the start of the region to
be filled in
contrast to many other Emacs modes.)
There are some syntactical constructs which are handled specially
-with regard to filling. These are so-called "code comments" and
-"paragraph commands".
+with regard to filling. These are so-called “code comments” and
+“paragraph commands”.
Code comments are comments preceded by code or text in the same line.
Upon filling a region, code comments themselves will not get filled.
@@ -2629,21 +2653,21 @@ Filling is done from the start of the region to the
line with the code
comment and continues after it. In order to prevent overfull lines in
the source code, a linebreak will be inserted before the last
non-comment word by default. This can be changed by customizing
-'LaTeX-fill-break-before-code-comments'. If you have overfull lines
+‘LaTeX-fill-break-before-code-comments’. If you have overfull lines
with code comments you can fill those explicitly by calling
-'LaTeX-fill-paragraph' or pressing 'M-q' with the cursor positioned on
+‘LaTeX-fill-paragraph’ or pressing ‘M-q’ with the cursor positioned on
them. This will add linebreaks in the comment and indent subsequent
comment lines to the column of the comment in the first line of the code
-comment. In this special case 'M-q' only acts on the current line and
+comment. In this special case ‘M-q’ only acts on the current line and
not on the whole paragraph.
- Lines with '\par' are treated similarly to code comments, i.e. '\par'
+ Lines with ‘\par’ are treated similarly to code comments, i.e. ‘\par’
will be treated as paragraph boundary which should not be followed by
other code or text. But it is not treated as a real paragraph boundary
like an empty line where filling a paragraph would stop.
- Paragraph commands like '\section' or '\noindent' (the list of
-commands is defined by 'LaTeX-paragraph-commands') are often to be
+ Paragraph commands like ‘\section’ or ‘\noindent’ (the list of
+commands is defined by ‘LaTeX-paragraph-commands’) are often to be
placed in their own line(s). This means they should not be consecuted
with any preceding or following adjacent lines of text. AUCTeX will
prevent this from happening if you do not put any text except another
@@ -2659,12 +2683,12 @@ macro is part of the following paragraph.
\begin{quote}\label{foo}
text text text text
- If you press 'M-q' on the first line in both examples, nothing will
+ If you press ‘M-q’ on the first line in both examples, nothing will
change. But if you write
\begin{quote} text
text text text text
-and press 'M-q', you will get
+and press ‘M-q’, you will get
\begin{quote} text text text text text
@@ -2672,35 +2696,35 @@ and press 'M-q', you will get
filling in AUCTeX involves commented lines. You should be aware that
these comments are treated as islands in the rest of the LaTeX code if
syntactic filling is enabled. This means, for example, if you try to
-fill an environment with 'LaTeX-fill-environment' and have the cursor
+fill an environment with ‘LaTeX-fill-environment’ and have the cursor
placed on a commented line which does not have a surrounding environment
inside the comment, AUCTeX will report an error.
The relevant commands and variables with regard to filling are:
-'C-c C-q C-p'
- 'LaTeX-fill-paragraph' will fill and indent the current paragraph.
+‘C-c C-q C-p’
+ ‘LaTeX-fill-paragraph’ will fill and indent the current paragraph.
-'M-q'
- Alias for 'C-c C-q C-p'
+‘M-q’
+ Alias for ‘C-c C-q C-p’
-'C-c C-q C-e'
- 'LaTeX-fill-environment' will fill and indent the current
- environment. This may e.g. be the 'document' environment, in which
+‘C-c C-q C-e’
+ ‘LaTeX-fill-environment’ will fill and indent the current
+ environment. This may e.g. be the ‘document’ environment, in which
case the entire document will be formatted.
-'C-c C-q C-s'
- 'LaTeX-fill-section' will fill and indent the current logical
+‘C-c C-q C-s’
+ ‘LaTeX-fill-section’ will fill and indent the current logical
sectional unit.
-'C-c C-q C-r'
- 'LaTeX-fill-region' will fill and indent the current region.
+‘C-c C-q C-r’
+ ‘LaTeX-fill-region’ will fill and indent the current region.
-- User Option: LaTeX-fill-break-at-separators
List of separators before or after which respectively linebreaks
will be inserted if they do not fit into one line. The separators
- can be curly braces, brackets, switches for inline math ('$', '\(',
- '\)') and switches for display math ('\[', '\]'). Such formatting
+ can be curly braces, brackets, switches for inline math (‘$’, ‘\(’,
+ ‘\)’) and switches for display math (‘\[’, ‘\]’). Such formatting
can be useful to make macros and math more visible or to prevent
overfull lines in the LaTeX source in case a package for displaying
formatted TeX output inside the Emacs buffer, like preview-latex,
@@ -2711,7 +2735,7 @@ inside the comment, AUCTeX will report an error.
line. When a paragraph containing such a comment is to be filled,
the comment start will be seen as a border after which no line
breaks will be inserted in the same line. If the option
- 'LaTeX-fill-break-before-code-comments' is enabled (which is the
+ ‘LaTeX-fill-break-before-code-comments’ is enabled (which is the
default) and the comment does not fit into the line, a line break
will be inserted before the last non-comment word to minimize the
chance that the line becomes overfull.
@@ -2720,7 +2744,7 @@ inside the comment, AUCTeX will report an error.
A list of macro names (without leading backslash) for whose
arguments filling should be disabled. Typically, you will want to
add macros here which have long, multi-line arguments. An example
- is '\pgfplotstabletypeset' from the pgfplotstable package which is
+ is ‘\pgfplotstabletypeset’ from the pgfplotstable package which is
used as shown in the following listing:
\pgfplotstabletypeset[skip first n=4]{%
@@ -2754,7 +2778,7 @@ built-in support for hiding macros and environments which
we call
folding here.
Besides folding of macros and environments, AUCTeX provides support
-for Emacs' outline mode which lets you narrow the buffer content to
+for Emacs’ outline mode which lets you narrow the buffer content to
certain sections of your text by hiding the parts not belonging to these
sections.
@@ -2765,12 +2789,12 @@ environments.
AUCTeX also provides some WYSIWYG features.
- First, you can customize 'font-latex-fontify-script' to enable
-special formatting of '^' superscripts and '_' subscripts (*note Font
+ First, you can customize ‘font-latex-fontify-script’ to enable
+special formatting of ‘^’ superscripts and ‘_’ subscripts (*note Font
Locking::).
Secondly, AUCTeX with GNU Emacs 25 or later can display certain math
-macros using Unicode characters, e.g., '\alpha' as α. This is called
+macros using Unicode characters, e.g., ‘\alpha’ as α. This is called
prettification and is lightweight and reasonable robust (*note
Prettifying::).
@@ -2801,7 +2825,7 @@ Font locking is supposed to improve readability of the
source code by
highlighting certain keywords with different colors or fonts. It
thereby lets you recognize the function of markup code to a certain
extent without having to read the markup command. For general
-information on controlling font locking with Emacs' Font Lock mode, see
+information on controlling font locking with Emacs’ Font Lock mode, see
*note Font Lock Mode: (emacs)Font Lock.
-- User Option: TeX-install-font-lock
@@ -2809,22 +2833,22 @@ information on controlling font locking with Emacs'
Font Lock mode, see
provided by AUCTeX, the font locking patterns and functionality of
font-latex are activated by default. You can switch to a different
font locking scheme or disable font locking in AUCTeX by
- customizing the variable 'TeX-install-font-lock'.
+ customizing the variable ‘TeX-install-font-lock’.
Besides font-latex AUCTeX ships with a scheme which is derived from
- Emacs' default LaTeX mode and activated by choosing
- 'tex-font-setup'. Be aware that this scheme is not coupled with
- AUCTeX's style system and not the focus of development. Therefore
+ Emacs’ default LaTeX mode and activated by choosing
+ ‘tex-font-setup’. Be aware that this scheme is not coupled with
+ AUCTeX’s style system and not the focus of development. Therefore
and due to font-latex being much more feature-rich the following
explanations will only cover font-latex.
In case you want to hook in your own fontification scheme, you can
- choose 'other' and insert the name of the function which sets up
+ choose ‘other’ and insert the name of the function which sets up
your font locking patterns. If you want to disable fontification
- in AUCTeX completely, choose 'ignore'.
+ in AUCTeX completely, choose ‘ignore’.
font-latex provides many options for customization which are
-accessible with 'M-x customize-group <RET> font-latex <RET>'. For this
+accessible with ‘M-x customize-group <RET> font-latex <RET>’. For this
description the various options are explained in conceptional groups.
* Menu:
@@ -2843,50 +2867,50 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Fontification of macros,
Next: Fontification of quote
-----------------------------
Highlighting of macros can be customized by adapting keyword lists which
-can be found in the customization group 'font-latex-keywords'.
+can be found in the customization group ‘font-latex-keywords’.
Three types of macros can be handled differently with respect to
fontification:
- 1. Commands of the form '\foo[bar]{baz}' which consist of the macro
+ 1. Commands of the form ‘\foo[bar]{baz}’ which consist of the macro
itself, optional arguments in square brackets and mandatory
arguments in curly braces. For the command itself the face
- 'font-lock-keyword-face' will be used and for the optional
- arguments the face 'font-lock-variable-name-face'. The face
+ ‘font-lock-keyword-face’ will be used and for the optional
+ arguments the face ‘font-lock-variable-name-face’. The face
applied to the mandatory argument depends on the macro class
represented by the respective built-in variables.
- 2. Declaration macros of the form '{\foo text}' which consist of the
+ 2. Declaration macros of the form ‘{\foo text}’ which consist of the
macro which may be enclosed in a TeX group together with text to be
affected by the macro. In case a TeX group is present, the macro
- will get the face 'font-lock-keyword-face' and the text will get
+ will get the face ‘font-lock-keyword-face’ and the text will get
the face configured for the respective macro class. If no TeX
group is present, the latter face will be applied to the macro
itself.
- 3. Simple macros of the form '\foo' which do not have any arguments or
+ 3. Simple macros of the form ‘\foo’ which do not have any arguments or
groupings. The respective face will be applied to the macro
itself.
- Customization variables for '\foo[bar]{baz}' type macros allow both
+ Customization variables for ‘\foo[bar]{baz}’ type macros allow both
the macro name and the sequence of arguments to be specified. The
latter is done with a string which can contain the characters
-'*'
+‘*’
indicating the existence of a starred variant for the macro,
-'['
+‘[’
for optional arguments in brackets,
-'{'
+‘{’
for mandatory arguments in braces,
-'\'
+‘\’
for mandatory arguments consisting of a single macro and
-'|'
+‘|’
as a prefix indicating that two alternatives are following.
- For example the specifier for '\documentclass' would be '[{' because
+ For example the specifier for ‘\documentclass’ would be ‘[{’ because
the macro has one optional followed by one mandatory argument. The
-specifier for '\newcommand' would be '*|{\[[{' because there is a
+specifier for ‘\newcommand’ would be ‘*|{\[[{’ because there is a
starred variant, the mandatory argument following the macro name can be
a macro or a TeX group which can be followed by two optional arguments
and the last token is a mandatory argument in braces.
- Customization variables for the '{\foo text}' and '\foo' types are
+ Customization variables for the ‘{\foo text}’ and ‘\foo’ types are
simple lists of strings where each entry is a macro name (without the
leading backslash).
@@ -2896,114 +2920,114 @@ General macro classes
font-latex provides keyword lists for different macro classes which are
described in the following table:
-'font-latex-match-function-keywords'
+‘font-latex-match-function-keywords’
Keywords for macros defining or related to functions, like
- '\newcommand'.
- Type: '\macro[...]{...}'
- Face: 'font-lock-function-name-face'
+ ‘\newcommand’.
+ Type: ‘\macro[...]{...}’
+ Face: ‘font-lock-function-name-face’
-'font-latex-match-reference-keywords'
- Keywords for macros defining or related to references, like '\ref'.
- Type: '\macro[...]{...}'
- Face: 'font-lock-constant-face'
+‘font-latex-match-reference-keywords’
+ Keywords for macros defining or related to references, like ‘\ref’.
+ Type: ‘\macro[...]{...}’
+ Face: ‘font-lock-constant-face’
-'font-latex-match-textual-keywords'
- Keywords for macros specifying textual content, like '\caption'.
- Type: '\macro[...]{...}'
- Face: 'font-lock-type-face'
+‘font-latex-match-textual-keywords’
+ Keywords for macros specifying textual content, like ‘\caption’.
+ Type: ‘\macro[...]{...}’
+ Face: ‘font-lock-type-face’
-'font-latex-match-variable-keywords'
+‘font-latex-match-variable-keywords’
Keywords for macros defining or related to variables, like
- '\setlength'.
- Type: '\macro[...]{...}'
- Face: 'font-lock-variable-name-face'
+ ‘\setlength’.
+ Type: ‘\macro[...]{...}’
+ Face: ‘font-lock-variable-name-face’
-'font-latex-match-warning-keywords'
+‘font-latex-match-warning-keywords’
Keywords for important macros, e.g. affecting line or page break,
- like '\clearpage'.
- Type: '\macro'
- Face: 'font-latex-warning-face'
+ like ‘\clearpage’.
+ Type: ‘\macro’
+ Face: ‘font-latex-warning-face’
Sectioning commands
-------------------
-Sectioning commands are macros like '\chapter' or '\section'. For these
+Sectioning commands are macros like ‘\chapter’ or ‘\section’. For these
commands there are two fontification schemes which may be selected by
-customizing the variable 'font-latex-fontify-sectioning'.
+customizing the variable ‘font-latex-fontify-sectioning’.
-- User Option: font-latex-fontify-sectioning
Per default sectioning commands will be shown in a larger,
proportional font, which corresponds to a number for this variable.
- The font size varies with the sectioning level, e.g. '\part'
- ('font-latex-sectioning-0-face') has a larger font than
- '\paragraph' ('font-latex-sectioning-5-face'). Typically, values
- from 1.05 to 1.3 for 'font-latex-fontify-sectioning' give best
+ The font size varies with the sectioning level, e.g. ‘\part’
+ (‘font-latex-sectioning-0-face’) has a larger font than
+ ‘\paragraph’ (‘font-latex-sectioning-5-face’). Typically, values
+ from 1.05 to 1.3 for ‘font-latex-fontify-sectioning’ give best
results, depending on your font setup. If you rather like to use
the base font and a different color, set the variable to the symbol
- 'color'. In this case the face 'font-lock-type-face' will be used
+ ‘color’. In this case the face ‘font-lock-type-face’ will be used
to fontify the argument of the sectioning commands.
You can make font-latex aware of your own sectioning commands be
adding them to the keyword lists:
-'font-latex-match-sectioning-0-keywords'
-('font-latex-sectioning-0-face') ...
-'font-latex-match-sectioning-5-keywords'
-('font-latex-sectioning-5-face').
+‘font-latex-match-sectioning-0-keywords’
+(‘font-latex-sectioning-0-face’) ...
+‘font-latex-match-sectioning-5-keywords’
+(‘font-latex-sectioning-5-face’).
Related to sectioning there is special support for slide titles which
-may be fontified with the face 'font-latex-slide-title-face'. You can
+may be fontified with the face ‘font-latex-slide-title-face’. You can
add macros which should appear in this face by customizing the variable
-'font-latex-match-slide-title-keywords'.
+‘font-latex-match-slide-title-keywords’.
Commands for changing fonts
---------------------------
LaTeX provides various macros for changing fonts or font attributes.
-For example, you can select an italic font with '\textit{...}' or bold
-with '\textbf{...}'. An alternative way to specify these fonts is to
-use special macros in TeX groups, like '{\itshape ...}' for italics and
-'{\bfseries ...}' for bold. As mentioned above, we call the former
+For example, you can select an italic font with ‘\textit{...}’ or bold
+with ‘\textbf{...}’. An alternative way to specify these fonts is to
+use special macros in TeX groups, like ‘{\itshape ...}’ for italics and
+‘{\bfseries ...}’ for bold. As mentioned above, we call the former
variants commands and the latter declarations.
Besides the macros for changing fonts provided by LaTeX there is an
-infinite number of other macros--either defined by yourself for logical
-markup or defined by macro packages--which affect the font in the
-typeset text. While LaTeX's built-in macros and macros of packages
-known by AUCTeX are already handled by font-latex, different keyword
-lists per type style and macro type are provided for entering your own
-macros which are listed in the table below.
-
-'font-latex-match-bold-command-keywords'
+infinite number of other macros—either defined by yourself for logical
+markup or defined by macro packages—which affect the font in the typeset
+text. While LaTeX’s built-in macros and macros of packages known by
+AUCTeX are already handled by font-latex, different keyword lists per
+type style and macro type are provided for entering your own macros
+which are listed in the table below.
+
+‘font-latex-match-bold-command-keywords’
Keywords for commands specifying a bold type style.
- Face: 'font-latex-bold-face'
-'font-latex-match-italic-command-keywords'
+ Face: ‘font-latex-bold-face’
+‘font-latex-match-italic-command-keywords’
Keywords for commands specifying an italic font.
- Face: 'font-latex-italic-face'
-'font-latex-match-underline-command-keywords'
+ Face: ‘font-latex-italic-face’
+‘font-latex-match-underline-command-keywords’
Keywords for commands specifying an underlined text.
- Face: 'font-latex-underline-face'
-'font-latex-match-math-command-keywords'
+ Face: ‘font-latex-underline-face’
+‘font-latex-match-math-command-keywords’
Keywords for commands specifying a math font.
- Face: 'font-latex-math-face'
-'font-latex-match-type-command-keywords'
+ Face: ‘font-latex-math-face’
+‘font-latex-match-type-command-keywords’
Keywords for commands specifying a typewriter font.
- Face: 'font-lock-type-face'
-'font-latex-match-bold-declaration-keywords'
+ Face: ‘font-lock-type-face’
+‘font-latex-match-bold-declaration-keywords’
Keywords for declarations specifying a bold type style.
- Face: 'font-latex-bold-face'
-'font-latex-match-italic-declaration-keywords'
+ Face: ‘font-latex-bold-face’
+‘font-latex-match-italic-declaration-keywords’
Keywords for declarations specifying an italic font.
- Face: 'font-latex-italic-face'
-'font-latex-match-type-declaration-keywords'
+ Face: ‘font-latex-italic-face’
+‘font-latex-match-type-declaration-keywords’
Keywords for declarations specifying a typewriter font.
- Face: 'font-latex-type-face'
+ Face: ‘font-latex-type-face’
Deactivating defaults of built-in keyword classes
-------------------------------------------------
font-latex ships with predefined lists of keywords for the classes
described above. You can disable these defaults per class by
-customizing the variable 'font-latex-deactivated-keyword-classes'. This
+customizing the variable ‘font-latex-deactivated-keyword-classes’. This
is a list of strings for keyword classes to be deactivated. Valid
entries are "warning", "variable", "biblatexnoarg", "biblatex",
"reference", "function" , "sectioning-0", "sectioning-1",
@@ -3023,7 +3047,7 @@ following stanza into your init file:
font-latex-match-reference-keywords-local)
font-latex-match-reference-keywords-local)))
- But note that this means fiddling with font-latex's internals and is
+ But note that this means fiddling with font-latex’s internals and is
not guaranteed to work in future versions of font-latex.
User-defined keyword classes
@@ -3031,7 +3055,7 @@ User-defined keyword classes
In case the customization options explained above do not suffice for
your needs, you can specify your own keyword classes by customizing the
-variable 'font-latex-user-keyword-classes'.
+variable ‘font-latex-user-keyword-classes’.
-- User Option: font-latex-user-keyword-classes
Every keyword class consists of four parts, a name, a list of
@@ -3052,10 +3076,9 @@ variable 'font-latex-user-keyword-classes'.
The face argument can either be an existing face or face attributes
made by you.
- There are three alternatives for the type of keywords--"Command
- with arguments", "Declaration inside TeX group" and "Command
- without arguments"--which correspond with the macro types explained
- above.
+ There are three alternatives for the type of keywords—“Command with
+ arguments”, “Declaration inside TeX group” and “Command without
+ arguments”—which correspond with the macro types explained above.
File: auctex.info, Node: Fontification of quotes, Next: Fontification of
math, Prev: Fontification of macros, Up: Font Locking
@@ -3064,29 +3087,28 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Fontification of quotes,
Next: Fontification of math,
-----------------------------
Text in quotation marks is displayed with the face
-'font-latex-string-face'. Besides the various forms of opening and
+‘font-latex-string-face’. Besides the various forms of opening and
closing double and single quotation marks, so-called guillemets (<<, >>)
can be used for quoting. Because there are two styles of using
-them--French style: << text >>; German style: >>text<<--you can
-customize the variable 'font-latex-quotes' to tell font-latex which type
-you are using if the correct value cannot be derived from document
-properties.
+them—French style: << text >>; German style: >>text<<—you can customize
+the variable ‘font-latex-quotes’ to tell font-latex which type you are
+using if the correct value cannot be derived from document properties.
-- User Option: font-latex-quotes
- The default value of 'font-latex-quotes' is 'auto' which means that
+ The default value of ‘font-latex-quotes’ is ‘auto’ which means that
font-latex will try to derive the correct type of quotation mark
matching from document properties like the language option supplied
to the babel LaTeX package.
If the automatic detection fails for you and you mostly use one
specific style you can set it to a specific language-dependent
- value as well. Set the value to 'german' if you are using >>German
- quotes<< and to 'french' if you are using << French quotes >>.
+ value as well. Set the value to ‘german’ if you are using >>German
+ quotes<< and to ‘french’ if you are using << French quotes >>.
font-latex will recognize the different ways these quotes can be
- given in your source code, i.e. ('"<', '">'), ('<<', '>>') and the
+ given in your source code, i.e. (‘"<’, ‘">’), (‘<<’, ‘>>’) and the
respective 8-bit variants.
- If you set 'font-latex-quotes' to nil, quoted content will not be
+ If you set ‘font-latex-quotes’ to nil, quoted content will not be
fontified.
@@ -3097,48 +3119,48 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Fontification of math, Next:
Verbatim content, Prev:
In LaTeX mathematics can be indicated by a variety of different methods:
toggles (like dollar signs), macros and environments. Math constructs
-known by font-latex are displayed with the face 'font-latex-math-face'.
-Support for dollar signs and shorthands like '\(...\)' or '\[...\]' is
+known by font-latex are displayed with the face ‘font-latex-math-face’.
+Support for dollar signs and shorthands like ‘\(...\)’ or ‘\[...\]’ is
built-in and not customizable. Support for other math macros and
environments can be adapted by customizing the variables
-'font-latex-match-math-command-keywords' and 'texmathp-tex-commands'
+‘font-latex-match-math-command-keywords’ and ‘texmathp-tex-commands’
respectively. It is no longer recommended to customize
-'font-latex-math-environments'.
+‘font-latex-math-environments’.
- To convert your customization in 'font-latex-math-environments' into
-'texmathp-tex-commands', please register your own math environments,
-together with starred variants if any, as entries of 'env-on' type in
-'texmathp-tex-commands', then clear out 'font-latex-math-environments'.
+ To convert your customization in ‘font-latex-math-environments’ into
+‘texmathp-tex-commands’, please register your own math environments,
+together with starred variants if any, as entries of ‘env-on’ type in
+‘texmathp-tex-commands’, then clear out ‘font-latex-math-environments’.
You have to restart Emacs for this new customization to take effect for
fontification.
In order to make math constructs more readable, font-latex displays
subscript and superscript parts in a smaller font and raised or lowered
respectively. This fontification feature can be controlled with the
-variables 'font-latex-fontify-script' and 'font-latex-script-display'.
+variables ‘font-latex-fontify-script’ and ‘font-latex-script-display’.
-- User Option: font-latex-fontify-script
If non-nil, fontify subscript and superscript strings. Concretely,
this means that the scripts are raised or lowered.
Another possiblity is setting this variable to the symbol
- 'multi-level'. In this case, in a formula x^{y^z}, y is raised
+ ‘multi-level’. In this case, in a formula x^{y^z}, y is raised
above and smaller than x, and z is raised above and smaller than y.
With many script levels, the text might become too small to be
- readable. (See 'font-latex-fontify-script-max-level' below.)
+ readable. (See ‘font-latex-fontify-script-max-level’ below.)
- Lastly, you can set this variable to 'invisible' whose behavior is
- like 'multi-level', and in addition the super-/subscript characters
+ Lastly, you can set this variable to ‘invisible’ whose behavior is
+ like ‘multi-level’, and in addition the super-/subscript characters
^ and _ are not displayed.
-- User Option: font-latex-fontify-script-max-level
Maximum scriptification level for which script faces are applied.
- The faces 'font-latex-superscript-face' and
- 'font-latex-subscript-face' define custom ':height' values < 1.0.
+ The faces ‘font-latex-superscript-face’ and
+ ‘font-latex-subscript-face’ define custom ‘:height’ values < 1.0.
Therefore, scripts are displayed with a slightly smaller font than
- normal math text. If 'font-latex-fontify-script' is 'multi-level'
- or 'invisible', the font size becomes too small to be readable
+ normal math text. If ‘font-latex-fontify-script’ is ‘multi-level’
+ or ‘invisible’, the font size becomes too small to be readable
after a few levels. This option allows to specify the maximum
level after which the size of the script text won’t be shrunken
anymore.
@@ -3147,13 +3169,13 @@ variables 'font-latex-fontify-script' and
'font-latex-script-display'.
level 0, y has level 1, z has level 2, and both a and b have
scriptification level 3.
- If 'font-latex-fontify-script-max-level' was 2, then z, a, and b
+ If ‘font-latex-fontify-script-max-level’ was 2, then z, a, and b
would have the same font size. If it was 3 or more, then a and b
were smaller than z just in the same way as z is smaller than y and
y is smaller than x.
- The script characters '^' and '_' themselves are also fontified with
-an own face named 'font-latex-script-char-face'.
+ The script characters ‘^’ and ‘_’ themselves are also fontified with
+an own face named ‘font-latex-script-char-face’.
-- User Option: font-latex-script-display
Display specification for subscript and superscript content. The
@@ -3170,14 +3192,14 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Verbatim content, Next:
Faces, Prev: Fontification o
Usually it is not desirable to have content to be typeset verbatim
highlighted according to LaTeX syntax. Therefore this content will be
-fontified uniformly with the face 'font-latex-verbatim-face'.
+fontified uniformly with the face ‘font-latex-verbatim-face’.
font-latex differentiates three different types of verbatim
constructs for fontification. Macros with special characters like | as
delimiters, macros with braces, and environments. Which macros and
environments are recognized is controlled by the variables
-'LaTeX-verbatim-macros-with-delims',
-'LaTeX-verbatim-macros-with-braces', and 'LaTeX-verbatim-environments'
+‘LaTeX-verbatim-macros-with-delims’,
+‘LaTeX-verbatim-macros-with-braces’, and ‘LaTeX-verbatim-environments’
respectively.
@@ -3188,9 +3210,9 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Faces, Next: Known problems,
Prev: Verbatim content,
In case you want to change the colors and fonts used by font-latex
please refer to the faces mentioned in the explanations above and use
-'M-x customize-face <RET> <face> <RET>'. All faces defined by
-font-latex are accessible through a customization group by typing 'M-x
-customize-group <RET> font-latex-highlighting-faces <RET>'.
+‘M-x customize-face <RET> <face> <RET>’. All faces defined by
+font-latex are accessible through a customization group by typing ‘M-x
+customize-group <RET> font-latex-highlighting-faces <RET>’.
File: auctex.info, Node: Known problems, Prev: Faces, Up: Font Locking
@@ -3201,7 +3223,7 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Known problems, Prev: Faces,
Up: Font Locking
In certain cases the fontification machinery fails to interpret buffer
contents correctly. This can lead to color bleed, i.e. large parts of a
buffer get fontified with an inappropriate face. A typical situation
-for this to happen is the use of a dollar sign ('$') in a verbatim macro
+for this to happen is the use of a dollar sign (‘$’) in a verbatim macro
or environment. If font-latex is not aware of the verbatim construct,
it assumes the dollar sign to be a toggle for mathematics and fontifies
the following buffer content with the respective face until it finds a
@@ -3209,8 +3231,8 @@ closing dollar sign or till the end of the buffer.
As a remedy you can make the verbatim construct known to font-latex
(*note Verbatim content::). If this is not possible, you can insert a
-commented dollar sign ('%$') at the next suitable end of line as a quick
-workaround. In docTeX documents, '^^A$' is also available for similar
+commented dollar sign (‘%$’) at the next suitable end of line as a quick
+workaround. In docTeX documents, ‘^^A$’ is also available for similar
purpose.
@@ -3229,7 +3251,7 @@ footnotes or citations. Similarly you might find certain
environments
or comments distracting when trying to concentrate on the body of your
document.
- With AUCTeX's folding functionality you can collapse those items and
+ With AUCTeX’s folding functionality you can collapse those items and
replace them by a fixed string, the content of one of their arguments,
or a mixture of both. If you want to make the original text visible
again in order to view or edit it, move point sideways onto the
@@ -3239,25 +3261,25 @@ open as long as point is inside of it and collapse
again once you move
point out of it. (Note that folding of environments currently does not
work in every AUCTeX mode.)
- In order to use this feature, you have to activate 'TeX-fold-mode'
+ In order to use this feature, you have to activate ‘TeX-fold-mode’
which will activate the auto-reveal feature and the necessary commands
to hide and show macros and environments. You can activate the mode in
-a certain buffer by typing the command 'M-x TeX-fold-mode <RET>' or
-using the keyboard shortcut 'C-c C-o C-f'. If you want to use it every
+a certain buffer by typing the command ‘M-x TeX-fold-mode <RET>’ or
+using the keyboard shortcut ‘C-c C-o C-f’. If you want to use it every
time you edit a LaTeX document, add it to a hook:
(add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook (lambda ()
(TeX-fold-mode 1)))
- If it should be activated in all AUCTeX modes, use 'TeX-mode-hook'
-instead of 'LaTeX-mode-hook'.
+ If it should be activated in all AUCTeX modes, use ‘TeX-mode-hook’
+instead of ‘LaTeX-mode-hook’.
Once the mode is active there are several commands available to hide
and show macros, environments and comments:
-- Command: TeX-fold-buffer
- ('C-c C-o C-b') Hide all foldable items in the current buffer
- according to the setting of 'TeX-fold-type-list'.
+ (‘C-c C-o C-b’) Hide all foldable items in the current buffer
+ according to the setting of ‘TeX-fold-type-list’.
If you want to have this done automatically every time you open a
file, add it to a hook and make sure the function is called after
@@ -3278,13 +3300,13 @@ and show macros, environments and comments:
-- User Option: TeX-fold-force-fontify
In order for all folded content to get the right faces, the whole
buffer has to be fontified before folding is carried out.
- 'TeX-fold-buffer' therefore will force fontification of unfontified
+ ‘TeX-fold-buffer’ therefore will force fontification of unfontified
regions. As this will prolong the time folding takes, you can
prevent forced fontification by customizing the variable
- 'TeX-fold-force-fontify'.
+ ‘TeX-fold-force-fontify’.
-- User Option: TeX-fold-auto
- By default, a macro inserted with 'TeX-insert-macro' ('C-c C-m')
+ By default, a macro inserted with ‘TeX-insert-macro’ (‘C-c C-m’)
will not be folded. Set this variable to a non-nil value to
aumatically fold macros as soon as they are inserted.
@@ -3299,73 +3321,73 @@ and show macros, environments and comments:
around the mark will be kept unfolded.
-- Command: TeX-fold-region
- ('C-c C-o C-r') Hide all configured macros in the marked region.
+ (‘C-c C-o C-r’) Hide all configured macros in the marked region.
-- Command: TeX-fold-paragraph
- ('C-c C-o C-p') Hide all configured macros in the paragraph
+ (‘C-c C-o C-p’) Hide all configured macros in the paragraph
containing point.
-- Command: TeX-fold-macro
- ('C-c C-o C-m') Hide the macro on which point currently is located.
- If the name of the macro is found in 'TeX-fold-macro-spec-list',
+ (‘C-c C-o C-m’) Hide the macro on which point currently is located.
+ If the name of the macro is found in ‘TeX-fold-macro-spec-list’,
the respective display string will be shown instead. If it is not
found, the name of the macro in sqare brackets or the default
string for unspecified macros
- ('TeX-fold-unspec-macro-display-string') will be shown, depending
- on the value of the variable 'TeX-fold-unspec-use-name'.
+ (‘TeX-fold-unspec-macro-display-string’) will be shown, depending
+ on the value of the variable ‘TeX-fold-unspec-use-name’.
-- Command: TeX-fold-env
- ('C-c C-o C-e') Hide the environment on which point currently is
+ (‘C-c C-o C-e’) Hide the environment on which point currently is
located. The behavior regarding the display string is analogous to
- 'TeX-fold-macro' and determined by the variables
- 'TeX-fold-env-spec-list' and 'TeX-fold-unspec-env-display-string'
+ ‘TeX-fold-macro’ and determined by the variables
+ ‘TeX-fold-env-spec-list’ and ‘TeX-fold-unspec-env-display-string’
respectively.
-- Command: TeX-fold-math
Hide the math macro on which point currently is located. If the
- name of the macro is found in 'TeX-fold-math-spec-list', the
+ name of the macro is found in ‘TeX-fold-math-spec-list’, the
respective display string will be shown instead. If it is not
found, the name of the macro in sqare brackets or the default
string for unspecified macros
- ('TeX-fold-unspec-macro-display-string') will be shown, depending
- on the value of the variable 'TeX-fold-unspec-use-name'.
+ (‘TeX-fold-unspec-macro-display-string’) will be shown, depending
+ on the value of the variable ‘TeX-fold-unspec-use-name’.
-- Command: TeX-fold-comment
- ('C-c C-o C-c') Hide the comment point is located on.
+ (‘C-c C-o C-c’) Hide the comment point is located on.
-- Command: TeX-fold-clearout-buffer
- ('C-c C-o b') Permanently unfold all macros and environments in the
+ (‘C-c C-o b’) Permanently unfold all macros and environments in the
current buffer.
-- Command: TeX-fold-clearout-region
- ('C-c C-o r') Permanently unfold all macros and environments in the
+ (‘C-c C-o r’) Permanently unfold all macros and environments in the
marked region.
-- Command: TeX-fold-clearout-paragraph
- ('C-c C-o p') Permanently unfold all macros and environments in the
+ (‘C-c C-o p’) Permanently unfold all macros and environments in the
paragraph containing point.
-- Command: TeX-fold-clearout-item
- ('C-c C-o i') Permanently show the macro or environment on which
+ (‘C-c C-o i’) Permanently show the macro or environment on which
point currently is located. In contrast to temporarily opening the
macro when point is moved sideways onto it, the macro will be
permanently unfolded and will not collapse again once point is
leaving it.
-- Command: TeX-fold-dwim
- ('C-c C-o C-o') Hide or show items according to the current
+ (‘C-c C-o C-o’) Hide or show items according to the current
context. If there is folded content, unfold it. If there is a
marked region, fold all configured content in this region. If
there is no folded content but a macro or environment, fold it.
- In case you want to use a different prefix than 'C-c C-o' for these
-commands you can customize the variable 'TeX-fold-command-prefix'.
+ In case you want to use a different prefix than ‘C-c C-o’ for these
+commands you can customize the variable ‘TeX-fold-command-prefix’.
(Note that this will not change the key binding for activating the
mode.)
The commands above will only take macros or environments into
consideration which are specified in the variables
-'TeX-fold-macro-spec-list' or 'TeX-fold-env-spec-list' respectively.
+‘TeX-fold-macro-spec-list’ or ‘TeX-fold-env-spec-list’ respectively.
-- User Option: TeX-fold-macro-spec-list
List of replacement specifiers and macros to fold. The specifier
@@ -3374,11 +3396,11 @@ consideration which are specified in the variables
If you specify a string, it will be used as a display replacement
for the whole macro. Numbers in braces, brackets, parens or angle
brackets will be replaced by the respective macro argument. For
- example '{1}' will be replaced by the first mandatory argument of
+ example ‘{1}’ will be replaced by the first mandatory argument of
the macro. One can also define alternatives within the specifier
which are used if an argument is not found. Alternatives are
- separated by '||'. They are most useful with optional arguments.
- As an example, the default specifier for '\item' is '[1]:||*' which
+ separated by ‘||’. They are most useful with optional arguments.
+ As an example, the default specifier for ‘\item’ is ‘[1]:||*’ which
means that if there is an optional argument, its value is shown
followed by a colon. If there is no optional argument, only an
asterisk is used as the display string.
@@ -3397,45 +3419,45 @@ consideration which are specified in the variables
lazy font locking) the intended fontification will not show up. As
a workaround you can leave Emacs idle a few seconds and wait for
stealth font locking to finish before you fold the buffer. Or you
- just re-fold the buffer with 'TeX-fold-buffer' when you notice a
+ just re-fold the buffer with ‘TeX-fold-buffer’ when you notice a
wrong fontification.
-- User Option: TeX-fold-env-spec-list
List of display strings or argument numbers and environments to
- fold. Argument numbers refer to the '\begin' statement. That
- means if you have e.g. '\begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{XXX} ...
- \end{tabularx}' and specify 3 as the argument number, the resulting
- display string will be "XXX".
+ fold. Argument numbers refer to the ‘\begin’ statement. That
+ means if you have e.g. ‘\begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{XXX} ...
+ \end{tabularx}’ and specify 3 as the argument number, the resulting
+ display string will be “XXX”.
-- User Option: TeX-fold-math-spec-list
List of display strings and math macros to fold.
- The variables 'TeX-fold-macro-spec-list', 'TeX-fold-env-spec-list',
-and 'TeX-fold-math-spec-list' apply to any AUCTeX mode. If you want to
+ The variables ‘TeX-fold-macro-spec-list’, ‘TeX-fold-env-spec-list’,
+and ‘TeX-fold-math-spec-list’ apply to any AUCTeX mode. If you want to
make settings which are only applied to LaTeX mode, you can use the
-mode-specific variables 'LaTeX-fold-macro-spec-list',
-'LaTeX-fold-env-spec-list', and 'LaTeX-fold-math-spec-list'
+mode-specific variables ‘LaTeX-fold-macro-spec-list’,
+‘LaTeX-fold-env-spec-list’, and ‘LaTeX-fold-math-spec-list’
-- User Option: TeX-fold-unspec-macro-display-string
Default display string for macros which are not specified in
- 'TeX-fold-macro-spec-list'.
+ ‘TeX-fold-macro-spec-list’.
-- User Option: TeX-fold-unspec-env-display-string
Default display string for environments which are not specified in
- 'TeX-fold-env-spec-list'.
+ ‘TeX-fold-env-spec-list’.
-- User Option: TeX-fold-unspec-use-name
If non-nil the name of the macro or environment surrounded by
square brackets is used as display string, otherwise the defaults
- specified in 'TeX-fold-unspec-macro-display-string' or
- 'TeX-fold-unspec-env-display-string' respectively.
+ specified in ‘TeX-fold-unspec-macro-display-string’ or
+ ‘TeX-fold-unspec-env-display-string’ respectively.
When you hover with the mouse pointer over folded content, its
original text will be shown in a tooltip or the echo area depending on
Tooltip mode being activate. In order to avoid exorbitantly big
tooltips and to cater for the limited space in the echo area the content
will be cropped after a certain amount of characters defined by the
-variable 'TeX-fold-help-echo-max-length'.
+variable ‘TeX-fold-help-echo-max-length’.
-- User Option: TeX-fold-help-echo-max-length
Maximum length of original text displayed in a tooltip or the echo
@@ -3453,29 +3475,29 @@ sectioning commands as header lines. *Note Outline
Mode: (emacs)Outline
Mode.
You can add your own headings by setting the variable
-'TeX-outline-extra'.
+‘TeX-outline-extra’.
-- Variable: TeX-outline-extra
List of extra TeX outline levels.
Each element is a list with two entries. The first entry is the
regular expression matching a header, and the second is the level
- of the header. A '^' is automatically prepended to the regular
+ of the header. A ‘^’ is automatically prepended to the regular
expressions in the list, so they must match text at the beginning
of the line.
- See 'LaTeX-section-list' or 'ConTeXt-INTERFACE-section-list' for
+ See ‘LaTeX-section-list’ or ‘ConTeXt-INTERFACE-section-list’ for
existing header levels.
- The following example add '\item' and '\bibliography' headers, with
-'\bibliography' at the same outline level as '\section', and '\item'
-being below '\subparagraph'.
+ The following example add ‘\item’ and ‘\bibliography’ headers, with
+‘\bibliography’ at the same outline level as ‘\section’, and ‘\item’
+being below ‘\subparagraph’.
(setq TeX-outline-extra
'(("[ \t]*\\\\\\(bib\\)?item\\b" 7)
("\\\\bibliography\\b" 2)))
- You may want to check out the unbundled 'out-xtra' package for even
+ You may want to check out the unbundled ‘out-xtra’ package for even
better outline support. It is available from your favorite emacs lisp
archive.
@@ -3493,10 +3515,10 @@ other commands to narrow the buffer to a group, i.e. a
region enclosed
in a pair of curly braces, and to LaTeX environments.
-- Command: TeX-narrow-to-group
- ('C-x n g') Make text outside current group invisible.
+ (‘C-x n g’) Make text outside current group invisible.
-- Command: LaTeX-narrow-to-environment COUNT
- ('C-x n e') Make text outside current environment invisible. With
+ (‘C-x n e’) Make text outside current environment invisible. With
optional argument COUNT keep visible that number of enclosing
environmens.
@@ -3513,24 +3535,24 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Prettifying, Prev:
Narrowing, Up: Display
Emacs 25 is able to prettify symbols in programming language buffers,
*note (emacs)Misc for Programs::. The canonical example is to display
-'(lambda () ...)' as '(λ () ...)' in Lisp buffers.
+‘(lambda () ...)’ as ‘(λ () ...)’ in Lisp buffers.
AUCTeX can use this feature in order to display certain math macros
and greek letters using their Unicode representation, too. For example,
-the TeX code '\alpha \times \beta' will be displayed as 'α × β'. When
-point is on one of the characters, it'll be unprettified automatically,
+the TeX code ‘\alpha \times \beta’ will be displayed as ‘α × β’. When
+point is on one of the characters, it’ll be unprettified automatically,
meaning you see the verbatim text again. For this behaviour however you
-need to set 'prettify-symbols-unprettify-at-point' to t or 'right-edge'
+need to set ‘prettify-symbols-unprettify-at-point’ to t or ‘right-edge’
which will unprettify the symbol when point moves into or near it.
To enable prettification in AUCTeX, simply add
-'prettify-symbols-mode' to 'TeX-mode-hook'. If you enabled
-prettification globally with 'global-prettify-symbols-mode', then it's
+‘prettify-symbols-mode’ to ‘TeX-mode-hook’. If you enabled
+prettification globally with ‘global-prettify-symbols-mode’, then it’s
automatically enabled in AUCTeX, too.
You can also add custom symbol unicode-character pairs for
-prettification by adding to 'tex--prettify-symbols-alist'. Note that
-this variable is part of Emacs' stock 'tex-mode.el' and used by that and
+prettification by adding to ‘tex--prettify-symbols-alist’. Note that
+this variable is part of Emacs’ stock ‘tex-mode.el’ and used by that and
AUCTeX.
@@ -3541,16 +3563,16 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Processing, Next:
Customization, Prev: Display, Up:
The most powerful features of AUCTeX may be those allowing you to run
TeX, LaTeX, ConTeXt and other external commands like BibTeX and
-'makeindex' from within Emacs, viewing and printing the results, and
+‘makeindex’ from within Emacs, viewing and printing the results, and
moreover allowing you to _debug_ your documents.
AUCTeX comes with a special tool bar for TeX and LaTeX which provides
buttons for the most important commands. You can enable or disable it
-by customizing the options 'plain-TeX-enable-toolbar' and
-'LaTeX-enable-toolbar' in the 'TeX-tool-bar' customization group. You
-can also customize the buttons by the options 'TeX-bar-TeX-buttons',
-'TeX-bar-TeX-all-button-alists', 'TeX-bar-LaTeX-buttons' and
-'TeX-bar-LaTeX-button-alist'.
+by customizing the options ‘plain-TeX-enable-toolbar’ and
+‘LaTeX-enable-toolbar’ in the ‘TeX-tool-bar’ customization group. You
+can also customize the buttons by the options ‘TeX-bar-TeX-buttons’,
+‘TeX-bar-TeX-all-button-alists’, ‘TeX-bar-LaTeX-buttons’ and
+‘TeX-bar-LaTeX-button-alist’.
* Menu:
@@ -3570,7 +3592,7 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Commands, Next: Viewing, Up:
Processing
Formatting the document with TeX, LaTeX or ConTeXt, viewing with a
previewer, printing the document, running BibTeX, making an index, or
-checking the document with 'lacheck' or 'chktex' all require running an
+checking the document with ‘lacheck’ or ‘chktex’ all require running an
external command.
* Menu:
@@ -3586,59 +3608,59 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Starting a Command, Next:
Selecting a Command, Up: C
------------------------------------------------
There are two ways to run an external command, you can either run it on
-the current document with 'TeX-command-master', or on the current region
-with 'TeX-command-region'. A special case of running TeX on a region is
-'TeX-command-buffer' which differs from 'TeX-command-master' if the
+the current document with ‘TeX-command-master’, or on the current region
+with ‘TeX-command-region’. A special case of running TeX on a region is
+‘TeX-command-buffer’ which differs from ‘TeX-command-master’ if the
current buffer is not its own master file.
-- Command: TeX-command-master
- ('C-c C-c') Query the user for a command, and run it on the master
+ (‘C-c C-c’) Query the user for a command, and run it on the master
file associated with the current buffer. The name of the master
- file is controlled by the variable 'TeX-master'. The available
- commands are controlled by the variable 'TeX-command-list'.
+ file is controlled by the variable ‘TeX-master’. The available
+ commands are controlled by the variable ‘TeX-command-list’.
-- Command: TeX-command-region
- ('C-c C-r') Query the user for a command, and run it on the
+ (‘C-c C-r’) Query the user for a command, and run it on the
contents of the selected region. The region contents are written
into the region file, after extracting the header and trailer from
the master file. If mark is inactive (which can happen with
Transient Mark mode), use the old region. See also the command
- 'TeX-pin-region' about how to fix a region.
+ ‘TeX-pin-region’ about how to fix a region.
The name of the region file is controlled by the variable
- 'TeX-region'. The name of the master file is controlled by the
- variable 'TeX-master'. The header is all text up to the line
- matching the regular expression 'TeX-header-end'. The trailer is
+ ‘TeX-region’. The name of the master file is controlled by the
+ variable ‘TeX-master’. The header is all text up to the line
+ matching the regular expression ‘TeX-header-end’. The trailer is
all text from the line matching the regular expression
- 'TeX-trailer-start'. The available commands are controlled by the
- variable 'TeX-command-list'.
+ ‘TeX-trailer-start’. The available commands are controlled by the
+ variable ‘TeX-command-list’.
-- Command: TeX-command-buffer
- ('C-c C-b') Query the user for a command, and apply it to the
+ (‘C-c C-b’) Query the user for a command, and apply it to the
contents of the current buffer. The buffer contents are written
into the region file, after extracting the header and trailer from
the master file. The command is then actually run on the region
file. See above for details.
-- Command: LaTeX-command-section
- ('C-c C-z') Query the user for a command, and apply it to the
+ (‘C-c C-z’) Query the user for a command, and apply it to the
current section (or part, chapter, subsection, paragraph, or
subparagraph). What makes the current section is determined by
- 'LaTeX-command-section-level' which can be enlarged/shrunken using
- 'LaTeX-command-section-change-level' ('C-c M-z'). The given
+ ‘LaTeX-command-section-level’ which can be enlarged/shrunken using
+ ‘LaTeX-command-section-change-level’ (‘C-c M-z’). The given
numeric prefix arg is added to the current value of
- 'LaTeX-command-section-level'. By default,
- 'LaTeX-command-section-level' is initialized with the current
- document's 'LaTeX-largest-level'. The buffer contents are written
+ ‘LaTeX-command-section-level’. By default,
+ ‘LaTeX-command-section-level’ is initialized with the current
+ document’s ‘LaTeX-largest-level’. The buffer contents are written
into the region file, after extracting the header and trailer from
the master file. The command is then actually run on the region
- file. See 'TeX-command-region' for details.
+ file. See ‘TeX-command-region’ for details.
It is also possible to compile automatically the whole document until
-it is ready with a single command: 'TeX-command-run-all'.
+it is ready with a single command: ‘TeX-command-run-all’.
-- Command: TeX-command-run-all
- ('C-c C-a') Compile the current document until an error occurs or
+ (‘C-c C-a’) Compile the current document until an error occurs or
it is finished. If compilation finishes successfully, run the
viewer at the end.
@@ -3650,34 +3672,34 @@ it is ready with a single command:
'TeX-command-run-all'.
-- User Option: TeX-header-end
A regular expression matching the end of the header. By default,
- this is '\begin{document}' in LaTeX mode and '%**end of header' in
+ this is ‘\begin{document}’ in LaTeX mode and ‘%**end of header’ in
plain TeX mode.
-- User Option: TeX-trailer-start
A regular expression matching the start of the trailer. By
- default, this is '\end{document}' in LaTeX mode and '\bye' in plain
+ default, this is ‘\end{document}’ in LaTeX mode and ‘\bye’ in plain
TeX mode.
- If you want to change the values of 'TeX-header-end' and
-'TeX-trailer-start' you can do this for all files by setting the
+ If you want to change the values of ‘TeX-header-end’ and
+‘TeX-trailer-start’ you can do this for all files by setting the
variables in a mode hook or per file by specifying them as file
variables (*note (emacs)File Variables::).
-- Command: TeX-pin-region
- ('C-c C-t C-r') If you don't have a mode like Transient Mark mode
+ (‘C-c C-t C-r’) If you don’t have a mode like Transient Mark mode
active, where marks get disabled automatically, the region would
- need to get properly set before each call to 'TeX-command-region'.
- If you fix the current region with 'C-c C-t C-r', then it will get
+ need to get properly set before each call to ‘TeX-command-region’.
+ If you fix the current region with ‘C-c C-t C-r’, then it will get
used for more commands even though mark and point may change. An
explicitly activated mark, however, will always define a new region
- when calling 'TeX-command-region'.
+ when calling ‘TeX-command-region’.
If the last process you started was on the region, the commands
described in *note Debugging:: and *note Control:: will work on that
process, otherwise they will work on the process associated with the
current document.
- Don't run more than one process at the same time. AUCTeX doesn't
+ Don’t run more than one process at the same time. AUCTeX doesn’t
support simultaneous typeset including region typeset. Wait for the
previous process to finish before you start a new process, in particular
when you are editing multiple documents in parallel. This limitation
@@ -3689,29 +3711,29 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Selecting a Command, Next:
Processor Options, Prev:
4.1.2 Selecting and Executing a Command
---------------------------------------
-Once you started the command selection with 'C-c C-c', 'C-c C-r' or 'C-c
-C-b' you will be prompted for the type of command. AUCTeX will try to
+Once you started the command selection with ‘C-c C-c’, ‘C-c C-r’ or ‘C-c
+C-b’ you will be prompted for the type of command. AUCTeX will try to
guess which command is appropriate in the given situation and propose it
-as default. Usually this is a processor like 'TeX' or 'LaTeX' if the
+as default. Usually this is a processor like ‘TeX’ or ‘LaTeX’ if the
document was changed or a viewer if the document was just typeset.
Other commands can be selected in the minibuffer with completion support
by typing <TAB>.
The available commands are defined by the variable
-'TeX-command-list'. Per default it includes commands for typesetting
-the document (e.g. 'LaTeX'), for viewing the output ('View'), for
-printing ('Print'), for generating an index ('Index') or for spell
-checking ('Spell') to name but a few. You can also add your own
-commands by adding entries to 'TeX-command-list'. Refer to its doc
+‘TeX-command-list’. Per default it includes commands for typesetting
+the document (e.g. ‘LaTeX’), for viewing the output (‘View’), for
+printing (‘Print’), for generating an index (‘Index’) or for spell
+checking (‘Spell’) to name but a few. You can also add your own
+commands by adding entries to ‘TeX-command-list’. Refer to its doc
string for information about its syntax. You might also want to look at
-'TeX-expand-list' to learn about the expanders you can use in
-'TeX-command-list'.
+‘TeX-expand-list’ to learn about the expanders you can use in
+‘TeX-command-list’.
Note that the default of the variable occasionally changes.
Therefore it is advisable to add to the list rather than overwriting it.
-You can do this with a call to 'add-to-list' in your init file. For
+You can do this with a call to ‘add-to-list’ in your init file. For
example, if you wanted to add a command for running a program called
-'foo' on the master or region file, you could do this with the following
+‘foo’ on the master or region file, you could do this with the following
form.
(eval-after-load "tex"
@@ -3720,21 +3742,21 @@ form.
t))
As mentioned before, AUCTeX will try to guess what command you want
-to invoke. If you want to use another command than 'TeX', 'LaTeX' or
+to invoke. If you want to use another command than ‘TeX’, ‘LaTeX’ or
whatever processor AUCTeX thinks is appropriate for the current mode,
-set the variable 'TeX-command-default'. You can do this for all files
+set the variable ‘TeX-command-default’. You can do this for all files
by setting it in a mode hook or per file by specifying it as a file
variable (*note (emacs)File Variables::).
-- User Option: TeX-command-default
The default command to run in this buffer. Must be an entry in
- 'TeX-command-list'.
+ ‘TeX-command-list’.
In case you use biblatex in a document, when automatic parsing is
-enabled AUCTeX checks the value of 'backend' option given to biblatex at
+enabled AUCTeX checks the value of ‘backend’ option given to biblatex at
load time to decide whether to use BibTeX or Biber for bibliography
processing. Should AUCTeX fail to detect the right backend, you can use
-the file local 'LaTeX-biblatex-use-Biber' variable.
+the file local ‘LaTeX-biblatex-use-Biber’ variable.
-- Variable: LaTeX-biblatex-use-Biber
If this boolean variable is set as file local, it tells to AUCTeX
whether to use Biber with biblatex. In this case, the
@@ -3744,12 +3766,12 @@ the file local 'LaTeX-biblatex-use-Biber' variable.
After confirming a command to execute, AUCTeX will try to save any
buffers related to the document, and check if the document needs to be
-reformatted. If the variable 'TeX-save-query' is non-nil, AUCTeX will
+reformatted. If the variable ‘TeX-save-query’ is non-nil, AUCTeX will
query before saving each file. By default AUCTeX will check emacs
buffers associated with files in the current directory, in one of the
-'TeX-macro-private' directories, and in the 'TeX-macro-global'
+‘TeX-macro-private’ directories, and in the ‘TeX-macro-global’
directories. You can change this by setting the variable
-'TeX-check-path'.
+‘TeX-check-path’.
-- User Option: TeX-check-path
Directory path to search for dependencies.
@@ -3758,26 +3780,26 @@ directories. You can change this by setting the
variable
files have changed.
When performing spell checking on a document or a region (invoked
-through AUCTeX's 'Spell' command or 'M-x ispell <RET>'), you want the
+through AUCTeX’s ‘Spell’ command or ‘M-x ispell <RET>’), you want the
spell checking program to skip certain macro arguments and environments,
most notably the arguments of referencing macros and the contents of
verbatim environments. The skipped parts are controlled by variable
-'ispell-tex-skip-alists' provided by 'ispell.el'. AUCTeX has a library
+‘ispell-tex-skip-alists’ provided by ‘ispell.el’. AUCTeX has a library
which can be added to this variable depending on the value of
-'TeX-ispell-extend-skip-list' which is set to 't' by default.
+‘TeX-ispell-extend-skip-list’ which is set to ‘t’ by default.
-- User Option: TeX-ispell-extend-skip-list
This boolean option controls whether AUCTeX activates its extension
for skipping certain macro arguments and environments when spell
checking.
- When non-'nil', AUCTeX loads the file 'tex-ispell.el' and adds its
- content to 'ispell-tex-skip-alists'. This library can and will
+ When non-‘nil’, AUCTeX loads the file ‘tex-ispell.el’ and adds its
+ content to ‘ispell-tex-skip-alists’. This library can and will
never be complete, but the interface can be used to add selected
and private macro names within your init file or on a file local
basis.
- 'ispell-tex-skip-alists' has the following structure:
+ ‘ispell-tex-skip-alists’ has the following structure:
(defvar ispell-tex-skip-alists
'((;; First list
("\\\\addcontentsline" ispell-tex-arg-end 2)
@@ -3792,7 +3814,7 @@ which can be added to this variable depending on the
value of
First list is used raw.
Second list has key placed inside \\begin{}.")
Each item is an alist and the structure of it is described in
- 'ispell-skip-region-alist':
+ ‘ispell-skip-region-alist’:
(defvar ispell-skip-region-alist
'((...))
"Alist expressing beginning and end of regions not to spell check.
@@ -3805,18 +3827,18 @@ which can be added to this variable depending on the
value of
(KEY FUNCTION ARGS) - FUNCTION called with ARGS
returns end of region.")
- Let's go through the first list of 'ispell-tex-skip-alists' line by
+ Let’s go through the first list of ‘ispell-tex-skip-alists’ line by
line:
("\\\\addcontentsline" ispell-tex-arg-end 2)
- 'KEY' is the string '"\\\\addcontentsline"', 'FUNCTION' is
- 'ispell-tex-arg-end' called with 'ARGS', here '2'.
- 'ispell-tex-arg-end' is a function provided by 'ispell.el' which
+ ‘KEY’ is the string ‘"\\\\addcontentsline"’, ‘FUNCTION’ is
+ ‘ispell-tex-arg-end’ called with ‘ARGS’, here ‘2’.
+ ‘ispell-tex-arg-end’ is a function provided by ‘ispell.el’ which
skips as many subsequent optional arguments in square brackets as
- it sees and then skips 'ARGS' number of mandatory arguments in
- braces. Omitting 'ARGS' means skip '1' mandatory argument. In
+ it sees and then skips ‘ARGS’ number of mandatory arguments in
+ braces. Omitting ‘ARGS’ means skip ‘1’ mandatory argument. In
practice, when you have something like this in your document:
\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Some text}
- The first two arguments are left out and 'Some text' will be spell
+ The first two arguments are left out and ‘Some text’ will be spell
checked. For the next line
("\\\\\\([aA]lph\\|arabic\\)" ispell-tex-arg-end)
the name of the counter as argument is skipped. Next line is
@@ -3828,12 +3850,12 @@ which can be added to this variable depending on the
value of
("\\\\documentclass" . "\\\\begin{document}"))
ensures that the entire preamble of a document is discarded.
Second list works the same; it is more convenient for environments
- since 'KEY' is wrapped inside '\begin{}'.
+ since ‘KEY’ is wrapped inside ‘\begin{}’.
AUCTeX provides two functions to add items to car and cdr of
- 'ispell-tex-arg-end', namely 'TeX-ispell-skip-setcar' and
- 'TeX-ispell-skip-setcdr'. The argument of these functions is
- exactly as in 'ispell-tex-skip-alists'. Additions can be done via
+ ‘ispell-tex-arg-end’, namely ‘TeX-ispell-skip-setcar’ and
+ ‘TeX-ispell-skip-setcdr’. The argument of these functions is
+ exactly as in ‘ispell-tex-skip-alists’. Additions can be done via
init file, e.g.:
(eval-after-load "tex-ispell"
'(progn
@@ -3850,22 +3872,22 @@ which can be added to this variable depending on the
value of
%%% eval: (TeX-ispell-skip-setcar '(("\\\\mymacro" . "{[-0-9]+}")))
%%% End:
- Finally, AUCTeX provides a function called 'TeX-ispell-tex-arg-end'
- which sees more arguments than 'ispell-tex-arg-end'. Refer to its
+ Finally, AUCTeX provides a function called ‘TeX-ispell-tex-arg-end’
+ which sees more arguments than ‘ispell-tex-arg-end’. Refer to its
doc string for more information.
AUCTeX also provides a facility to skip the argument of in-line
-verbatim macros like '\Verb' from 'fancyvrb.sty' or '\mintinline' from
-'minted.sty'. Characters delimiting the verbatim text are stored in
-'TeX-ispell-verb-delimiters'.
+verbatim macros like ‘\Verb’ from ‘fancyvrb.sty’ or ‘\mintinline’ from
+‘minted.sty’. Characters delimiting the verbatim text are stored in
+‘TeX-ispell-verb-delimiters’.
-- User Option: TeX-ispell-verb-delimiters
String with delimiters recognized for in-line verbatim macros.
- This variable is initialized to '!|#~"*/+^-'. Since this string is
+ This variable is initialized to ‘!|#~"*/+^-’. Since this string is
used to build a character alternative inside a regular expression,
- special characters '^' and '-' should come last. Other characters
- like opening brace '{', asterisk '*' or at sign '@' should be
- avoided as they are not recognized by 'font-latex.el'.
+ special characters ‘^’ and ‘-’ should come last. Other characters
+ like opening brace ‘{’, asterisk ‘*’ or at sign ‘@’ should be
+ avoided as they are not recognized by ‘font-latex.el’.
File: auctex.info, Node: Processor Options, Prev: Selecting a Command, Up:
Commands
@@ -3883,43 +3905,43 @@ regular TeX, like PDFTeX, Omega or XeTeX, and the style
error messages
are printed with.
-- Command: TeX-PDF-mode
- ('C-c C-t C-p') This command toggles the PDF mode of AUCTeX, a
+ (‘C-c C-t C-p’) This command toggles the PDF mode of AUCTeX, a
buffer-local minor mode which is enabled by default. You can
- customize 'TeX-PDF-mode' to give it a different default or set it
+ customize ‘TeX-PDF-mode’ to give it a different default or set it
as a file local variable on a per-document basis. This option
usually results in calling either PDFTeX or ordinary TeX.
-- User Option: TeX-DVI-via-PDFTeX
If this is set, DVI will also be produced by calling PDFTeX,
- setting '\pdfoutput=0'. This makes it possible to use PDFTeX
+ setting ‘\pdfoutput=0’. This makes it possible to use PDFTeX
features like character protrusion even when producing DVI files.
Contemporary TeX distributions do this anyway, so that you need not
enable the option within AUCTeX.
-- Command: TeX-interactive-mode
- ('C-c C-t C-i') This command toggles the interactive mode of
+ (‘C-c C-t C-i’) This command toggles the interactive mode of
AUCTeX, a global minor mode. You can customize
- 'TeX-interactive-mode' to give it a different default. In
+ ‘TeX-interactive-mode’ to give it a different default. In
interactive mode, TeX will pause with an error prompt when errors
are encountered and wait for the user to type something.
-- Command: TeX-source-correlate-mode
- ('C-c C-t C-s') Toggles support for forward and inverse search.
+ (‘C-c C-t C-s’) Toggles support for forward and inverse search.
Forward search refers to jumping to the place in the previewed
document corresponding to where point is located in the document
source and inverse search to the other way round. *Note I/O
Correlation::.
- You can permanently activate 'TeX-source-correlate-mode' by
- customizing the variable 'TeX-source-correlate-mode'. There is a
- bunch of customization options for the mode, use 'M-x
- customize-group <RET> TeX-view <RET>' to find out more.
+ You can permanently activate ‘TeX-source-correlate-mode’ by
+ customizing the variable ‘TeX-source-correlate-mode’. There is a
+ bunch of customization options for the mode, use ‘M-x
+ customize-group <RET> TeX-view <RET>’ to find out more.
AUCTeX is aware of three different means to do I/O correlation:
source specials (only DVI output), the pdfsync LaTeX package (only
PDF output) and SyncTeX. The choice between source specials and
SyncTeX can be controlled with the variable
- 'TeX-source-correlate-method'.
+ ‘TeX-source-correlate-method’.
Should you use source specials it has to be stressed _very_
strongly however, that source specials can cause differences in
@@ -3931,72 +3953,72 @@ are printed with.
Sometimes you are requested, by journal rules or packages, to compile
the document into DVI output. Thus, if you want a PDF document in the
end you can either use XeTeX engine, see below for information about how
-to set engines, or compile the document with 'tex' and then convert to
-PDF with 'dvips'-'ps2pdf' before viewing it. In addition, current
+to set engines, or compile the document with ‘tex’ and then convert to
+PDF with ‘dvips’–‘ps2pdf’ before viewing it. In addition, current
Japanese TeX engines cannot generate PDF directly so they rely on
-DVI-to-PDF converters. Usually 'dvipdfmx' command is used for this
-purpose. You can use the 'TeX-PDF-from-DVI' variable to let AUCTeX know
+DVI-to-PDF converters. Usually ‘dvipdfmx’ command is used for this
+purpose. You can use the ‘TeX-PDF-from-DVI’ variable to let AUCTeX know
you want to generate the final PDF by converting a DVI file.
-- User Option: TeX-PDF-from-DVI
This option controls if and how to produce a PDF file by converting
a DVI file.
- When 'TeX-PDF-mode' is non-nil, if 'TeX-PDF-from-DVI' is non-nil
+ When ‘TeX-PDF-mode’ is non-nil, if ‘TeX-PDF-from-DVI’ is non-nil
too the document is compiled to DVI instead of PDF. When the
- document is ready, 'C-c C-c' will suggest to run the converter to
+ document is ready, ‘C-c C-c’ will suggest to run the converter to
PDF or an intermediate format.
- If non-nil, 'TeX-PDF-from-DVI' should be the name of the command in
- 'TeX-command-list', as a string, used to convert the DVI file to
+ If non-nil, ‘TeX-PDF-from-DVI’ should be the name of the command in
+ ‘TeX-command-list’, as a string, used to convert the DVI file to
PDF or to an intermediate format. Values currently supported are:
- * '"Dvips"': the DVI file is converted to PS with 'dvips'.
- After successfully running it, 'ps2pdf' will be the default
+ • ‘"Dvips"’: the DVI file is converted to PS with ‘dvips’.
+ After successfully running it, ‘ps2pdf’ will be the default
command to convert the PS file to PDF.
- * '"Dvipdfmx"': the DVI file is converted to PDF with
- 'dvipdfmx'.
- (case is significant; note the uppercase 'D' in both strings) When
+ • ‘"Dvipdfmx"’: the DVI file is converted to PDF with
+ ‘dvipdfmx’.
+ (case is significant; note the uppercase ‘D’ in both strings) When
the PDF file is finally ready, the next suggested command will be
- 'View' to open the viewer.
+ ‘View’ to open the viewer.
This option can also be set as a file local variable, in order to
use this conversion on a per-document basis.
- Recall the whole sequence of 'C-c C-c' commands can be replaced by
- the single 'C-c C-a'.
+ Recall the whole sequence of ‘C-c C-c’ commands can be replaced by
+ the single ‘C-c C-a’.
AUCTeX also allows you to easily select different TeX engines for
-processing, either by using the entries in the 'TeXing Options' submenu
-below the 'Command' menu or by calling the function 'TeX-engine-set'.
-These eventually set the variable 'TeX-engine' which you can also modify
+processing, either by using the entries in the ‘TeXing Options’ submenu
+below the ‘Command’ menu or by calling the function ‘TeX-engine-set’.
+These eventually set the variable ‘TeX-engine’ which you can also modify
directly.
-- User Option: TeX-engine
This variable allows you to choose which TeX engine should be used
for typesetting the document, i.e. the executables which will be
- used when you invoke the 'TeX' or 'LaTeX' commands. The value
- should be one of the symbols defined in 'TeX-engine-alist-builtin'
- or 'TeX-engine-alist'. The symbols 'default', 'xetex', 'luatex'
- and 'omega' are available from the built-in list.
+ used when you invoke the ‘TeX’ or ‘LaTeX’ commands. The value
+ should be one of the symbols defined in ‘TeX-engine-alist-builtin’
+ or ‘TeX-engine-alist’. The symbols ‘default’, ‘xetex’, ‘luatex’
+ and ‘omega’ are available from the built-in list.
- Note that 'TeX-engine' is buffer-local, so setting the variable
+ Note that ‘TeX-engine’ is buffer-local, so setting the variable
directly or via the above mentioned menu or function will not take
effect in other buffers. If you want to activate an engine for all
-AUCTeX modes, set 'TeX-engine' in your init file, e.g. by using 'M-x
-customize-option <RET>'. If you want to activate it for a certain
+AUCTeX modes, set ‘TeX-engine’ in your init file, e.g. by using ‘M-x
+customize-option <RET>’. If you want to activate it for a certain
AUCTeX mode only, set the variable in the respective mode hook. If you
want to activate it for certain files, set it through file variables
(*note (emacs)File Variables::).
Should you need to change the executable names related to the
different engine settings, there are some variables you can tweak.
-Those are 'TeX-command', 'LaTeX-command', 'TeX-Omega-command',
-'LaTeX-Omega-command', 'ConTeXt-engine' and 'ConTeXt-Omega-engine'. The
+Those are ‘TeX-command’, ‘LaTeX-command’, ‘TeX-Omega-command’,
+‘LaTeX-Omega-command’, ‘ConTeXt-engine’ and ‘ConTeXt-Omega-engine’. The
rest of the executables is defined directly in
-'TeX-engine-alist-builtin'. If you want to override an entry from that,
-add an entry to 'TeX-engine-alist' that starts with the same symbol as
+‘TeX-engine-alist-builtin’. If you want to override an entry from that,
+add an entry to ‘TeX-engine-alist’ that starts with the same symbol as
that the entry in the built-in list and specify the executables you want
-to use instead. You can also add entries to 'TeX-engine-alist' in order
+to use instead. You can also add entries to ‘TeX-engine-alist’ in order
to add support for engines not covered per default.
-- User Option: TeX-engine-alist
@@ -4005,31 +4027,31 @@ to add support for engines not covered per default.
used to identify the engine. The second is a string describing the
engine. The third is the command to be used for plain TeX. The
fourth is the command to be used for LaTeX. The fifth is the
- command to be used for the '--engine' parameter of ConTeXt's
- 'texexec' program. Each command can either be a variable or a
+ command to be used for the ‘--engine’ parameter of ConTeXt’s
+ ‘texexec’ program. Each command can either be a variable or a
string. An empty string or nil means there is no command
available.
- In some systems, Emacs cannot inherit the 'PATH' environment variable
+ In some systems, Emacs cannot inherit the ‘PATH’ environment variable
from the shell and thus AUCTeX may not be able to run TeX commands.
Before running them, AUCTeX checks if it is able to find those commands
and will warn you in case it fails. You can skip this test by changing
-the option 'TeX-check-TeX'.
+the option ‘TeX-check-TeX’.
-- User Option: TeX-check-TeX
If non-nil, AUCTeX will check if it is able to find a working TeX
distribution before running TeX, LaTeX, ConTeXt, etc. It actually
- checks if can run 'TeX-command' command or the shell returns a
+ checks if can run ‘TeX-command’ command or the shell returns a
command not found error. The error code returned by the shell in
- this case can be set in 'TeX-check-TeX-command-not-found' option.
+ this case can be set in ‘TeX-check-TeX-command-not-found’ option.
Some LaTeX packages requires the document to be compiled with a
-specific engine. Notable examples are 'fontspec' and 'polyglossia'
+specific engine. Notable examples are ‘fontspec’ and ‘polyglossia’
packages, which require LuaTeX and XeTeX engines. If you try to compile
a document which loads one of such packages and the set engine is not
one of those allowed you will be asked to select a different engine
before running the LaTeX command. If you do not want to be warned by
-AUCTeX in these cases, customize the option 'TeX-check-engine'.
+AUCTeX in these cases, customize the option ‘TeX-check-engine’.
-- User Option: TeX-check-engine
This boolean option controls whether AUCTeX should check the
@@ -4038,7 +4060,7 @@ AUCTeX in these cases, customize the option
'TeX-check-engine'.
As shown above, AUCTeX handles in a special way most of the main
options that can be given to the TeX processors. When you need to pass
to the TeX processor arbitrary options not handled by AUCTeX, you can
-use the file local variable 'TeX-command-extra-options'.
+use the file local variable ‘TeX-command-extra-options’.
-- User Option: TeX-command-extra-options
String with the extra options to be given to the TeX processor.
For example, if you need to enable the shell escape feature to
@@ -4057,19 +4079,19 @@ produced.
window.
You can instruct TeX to print error messages in the form
-'file:line:error' which is similar to the way many compilers format
+‘file:line:error’ which is similar to the way many compilers format
them.
-- User Option: TeX-file-line-error
- If non-nil, TeX will produce 'file:line:error' style error
+ If non-nil, TeX will produce ‘file:line:error’ style error
messages.
ConTeXt users can choose between Mark II and Mark IV versions. This
-is controlled by 'ConTeXt-Mark-version' option.
+is controlled by ‘ConTeXt-Mark-version’ option.
-- User Option: ConTeXt-Mark-version
This variables specifies which version of Mark should be used.
- Values currently supported are '"II"', the default, and '"IV"'. It
+ Values currently supported are ‘"II"’, the default, and ‘"IV"’. It
can be set globally using customization interface or on a per-file
basis, by specifying it as a file variable.
@@ -4093,17 +4115,17 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Starting Viewers, Next: I/O
Correlation, Up: Viewing
4.2.1 Starting Viewers
----------------------
-Viewers are normally invoked by pressing 'C-c C-c' once the document is
-formatted, which will propose the 'View' command, or by activating the
-respective entry in the Command menu. Alternatively you can type 'C-c
-C-v' which calls the function 'TeX-view'.
+Viewers are normally invoked by pressing ‘C-c C-c’ once the document is
+formatted, which will propose the ‘View’ command, or by activating the
+respective entry in the Command menu. Alternatively you can type ‘C-c
+C-v’ which calls the function ‘TeX-view’.
-- Command: TeX-view
- ('C-c C-v') Start a viewer without confirmation. The viewer is
+ (‘C-c C-v’) Start a viewer without confirmation. The viewer is
started either on a region or the master file, depending on the
last command issued. This is especially useful for jumping to the
location corresponding to point in the viewer when using
- 'TeX-source-correlate-mode'.
+ ‘TeX-source-correlate-mode’.
AUCTeX will try to guess which type of viewer (DVI, PostScript or
PDF) has to be used and what options are to be passed over to it. This
@@ -4111,15 +4133,15 @@ decision is based on the output files present in the
working directory
as well as the class and style options used in the document. For
example, if there is a DVI file in your working directory, a DVI viewer
will be invoked. In case of a PDF file it will be a PDF viewer. If you
-specified a special paper format like 'a5paper' or use the 'landscape'
+specified a special paper format like ‘a5paper’ or use the ‘landscape’
option, this will be passed to the viewer by the appropriate options.
Especially some DVI viewers depend on this kind of information in order
-to display your document correctly. In case you are using 'pstricks' or
-'psfrag' in your document, a DVI viewer cannot display the contents
+to display your document correctly. In case you are using ‘pstricks’ or
+‘psfrag’ in your document, a DVI viewer cannot display the contents
correctly and a PostScript viewer will be invoked instead.
The association between the tests for the conditions mentioned above
-and the viewers is made in the variable 'TeX-view-program-selection'.
+and the viewers is made in the variable ‘TeX-view-program-selection’.
Therefore this variable is the starting point for customization if you
want to use other viewers than the ones suggested by default.
@@ -4128,20 +4150,20 @@ want to use other viewers than the ones suggested by
default.
front to back in order to find out which viewer to call under the
given conditions. In the first element of each list item you can
reference one or more predicates defined in
- 'TeX-view-predicate-list' or 'TeX-view-predicate-list-builtin'. In
+ ‘TeX-view-predicate-list’ or ‘TeX-view-predicate-list-builtin’. In
the second element you can reference a viewer defined in
- 'TeX-view-program-list' or 'TeX-view-program-list-builtin'. The
+ ‘TeX-view-program-list’ or ‘TeX-view-program-list-builtin’. The
viewer of the first item with a positively evaluated predicate is
selected.
- So 'TeX-view-program-selection' only contains references to the
+ So ‘TeX-view-program-selection’ only contains references to the
actual implementations of predicates and viewer commands respectively
which can be found elsewhere. AUCTeX comes with a set of preconfigured
predicates and viewer commands which are stored in the variables
-'TeX-view-predicate-list-builtin' and 'TeX-view-program-list-builtin'
+‘TeX-view-predicate-list-builtin’ and ‘TeX-view-program-list-builtin’
respectively. If you are not satisfied with those and want to overwrite
one of them or add your own definitions, you can do so via the variables
-'TeX-view-predicate-list' and 'TeX-view-program-list'.
+‘TeX-view-predicate-list’ and ‘TeX-view-program-list’.
-- User Option: TeX-view-predicate-list
This is a list of predicates for viewer selection and invocation.
@@ -4149,7 +4171,7 @@ one of them or add your own definitions, you can do so
via the variables
element a Lisp form to be evaluated. The form should return nil if
the predicate is not fulfilled.
- A built-in predicate from 'TeX-view-predicate-list-builtin' can be
+ A built-in predicate from ‘TeX-view-predicate-list-builtin’ can be
overwritten by defining a new predicate with the same symbol.
-- User Option: TeX-view-program-list
@@ -4157,27 +4179,27 @@ one of them or add your own definitions, you can do so
via the variables
symbolic name and either a command line or a function to be invoked
when the viewer is called. If a command line is used, parts of it
can be conditionalized by prefixing them with predicates from
- 'TeX-view-predicate-list' or 'TeX-view-predicate-list-builtin'.
+ ‘TeX-view-predicate-list’ or ‘TeX-view-predicate-list-builtin’.
(See the doc string for the exact format to use.) The command line
- can also contain placeholders as defined in 'TeX-expand-list' and
- 'TeX-expand-list-builtin' which are expanded before the viewer is
+ can also contain placeholders as defined in ‘TeX-expand-list’ and
+ ‘TeX-expand-list-builtin’ which are expanded before the viewer is
called.
The third element of each item is a string, or a list of strings,
with the name of the executable, or executables, needed to open the
output file in the viewer. Placeholders defined in
- 'TeX-expand-list' and 'TeX-expand-list-builtin' can be used here.
+ ‘TeX-expand-list’ and ‘TeX-expand-list-builtin’ can be used here.
This element is optional and is used to check whether the viewer is
actually available on the system.
- A built-in viewer spec from 'TeX-view-program-list-builtin' can be
+ A built-in viewer spec from ‘TeX-view-program-list-builtin’ can be
overwritten by defining a new viewer spec with the same name.
- After the viewer is called via either the 'View' command or the key
-stroke 'C-c C-v', the window system focus goes and stays on the viewer.
+ After the viewer is called via either the ‘View’ command or the key
+stroke ‘C-c C-v’, the window system focus goes and stays on the viewer.
If you prefer that the focus is pulled back to Emacs immediately after
that and you are using evince-compatible viewer, customize the option
-'TeX-view-enince-keep-focus'.
+‘TeX-view-enince-keep-focus’.
-- User Option: TeX-view-evince-keep-focus
When this option is non-nil and the viewer is compatible with
@@ -4187,11 +4209,11 @@ that and you are using evince-compatible viewer,
customize the option
Note that the viewer selection and invocation as described above will
only work if certain default settings in AUCTeX are intact. For one,
the whole viewer selection machinery will only be triggered if there is
-no '%V' expander in 'TeX-expand-list'. So if you have trouble with the
+no ‘%V’ expander in ‘TeX-expand-list’. So if you have trouble with the
viewer invocation you might check if there is an older customization of
the variable in place. In addition, the use of a function in
-'TeX-view-program-list' only works if the 'View' command in
-'TeX-command-list' makes use of the hook 'TeX-run-discard-or-function'.
+‘TeX-view-program-list’ only works if the ‘View’ command in
+‘TeX-command-list’ makes use of the hook ‘TeX-run-discard-or-function’.
File: auctex.info, Node: I/O Correlation, Prev: Starting Viewers, Up:
Viewing
@@ -4209,25 +4231,25 @@ search vice versa.
specials (only DVI output), the pdfsync LaTeX package (only PDF output)
and SyncTeX (any type of output). If you want to make use of forward
and inverse searching with source specials or SyncTeX, switch on
-'TeX-source-correlate-mode'. *Note Processor Options::, on how to do
+‘TeX-source-correlate-mode’. *Note Processor Options::, on how to do
that. The use of the pdfsync package is detected automatically if
document parsing is enabled. Customize the variable
-'TeX-source-correlate-method' to select the method to use.
+‘TeX-source-correlate-method’ to select the method to use.
-- User Option: TeX-source-correlate-method
Method to use for enabling forward and inverse search. This can be
- 'source-specials' if source specials should be used, 'synctex' if
- SyncTeX should be used, or 'auto' if AUCTeX should decide.
+ ‘source-specials’ if source specials should be used, ‘synctex’ if
+ SyncTeX should be used, or ‘auto’ if AUCTeX should decide.
- When the variable is set to 'auto', AUCTeX will always use SyncTeX
- if your 'latex' processor supports it, source specials otherwise.
+ When the variable is set to ‘auto’, AUCTeX will always use SyncTeX
+ if your ‘latex’ processor supports it, source specials otherwise.
You must make sure your viewer supports the same method.
It is also possible to specify a different method depending on the
output, either DVI or PDF, by setting the variable to an alist of
the kind
- ((dvi . '<source-specials or synctex>')
- (pdf . '<source-specials or synctex>'))
+ ((dvi . ‘<source-specials or synctex>’)
+ (pdf . ‘<source-specials or synctex>’))
in which the CDR of each entry is a symbol specifying the method to
be used in the corresponding mode. The default value of the
variable is
@@ -4236,31 +4258,31 @@ document parsing is enabled. Customize the variable
which is compatible with the majority of viewers.
Forward search happens automatically upon calling the viewer, e.g. by
-typing 'C-c C-v' ('TeX-view'). This will open the viewer or bring it to
+typing ‘C-c C-v’ (‘TeX-view’). This will open the viewer or bring it to
front and display the output page corresponding to the position of point
in the source file. AUCTeX will automatically pass the necessary
command line options to the viewer for this to happen.
You can also make special mouse event do forward search at the
-clicked position. Use 'TeX-source-correlate-map'(1) and
-'TeX-view-mouse' like this:
+clicked position. Use ‘TeX-source-correlate-map’(1) and
+‘TeX-view-mouse’ like this:
(eval-after-load "tex"
'(define-key TeX-source-correlate-map [C-down-mouse-1]
#'TeX-view-mouse))
- This example binds 'C-down-mouse-1', which usually opens a concise
+ This example binds ‘C-down-mouse-1’, which usually opens a concise
menu to select buffer, to the command to do forward search.
Upon opening the viewer you will be asked if you want to start a
server process (Gnuserv or Emacs server) which is necessary for inverse
search. This happens only if there is no server running already. You
-can customize the variable 'TeX-source-correlate-start-server' to
+can customize the variable ‘TeX-source-correlate-start-server’ to
inhibit the question and always or never start the server respectively.
-- User Option: TeX-source-correlate-start-server
- If 'TeX-source-correlate-mode' is active and a viewer is invoked,
+ If ‘TeX-source-correlate-mode’ is active and a viewer is invoked,
the default behavior is to ask if a server process should be
- started. Set this variable to 't' if the question should be
- inhibited and the server should always be started. Set it to 'nil'
+ started. Set this variable to ‘t’ if the question should be
+ inhibited and the server should always be started. Set it to ‘nil’
if the server should never be started. Inverse search will not be
available in the latter case.
@@ -4268,11 +4290,11 @@ inhibit the question and always or never start the
server respectively.
Emacs corresponding to a certain position in the viewer, is triggered
from the viewer, typically by a mouse click. Refer to the documentation
of your viewer to find out how it has to be configured and what you have
-to do exactly. In xdvi you normally have to use 'C-down-mouse-1'.
+to do exactly. In xdvi you normally have to use ‘C-down-mouse-1’.
Note that inverse search with the Evince PDF viewer or its MATE fork
Atril might fail in raising the Emacs frame after updating point in your
-document's buffer. There is simply no way to raise the Emacs frame
+document’s buffer. There is simply no way to raise the Emacs frame
reliably accross different operating systems and different window
managers with their different focus stealing policies. If the Emacs
frame is not raised after performing an inverse search from Evince or
@@ -4283,7 +4305,7 @@ Atril, you can customize the following option.
from Evince or Atril in order to raise the current Emacs frame.
If your Emacs frame is already raised in that situation, just leave
- this variable set to its default value 'raise-frame'. Otherwise,
+ this variable set to its default value ‘raise-frame’. Otherwise,
here are some alternative settings that work for some users.
;; Alternative 1: For some users, `x-focus-frame' works.
@@ -4308,10 +4330,10 @@ Atril, you can customize the following option.
---------- Footnotes ----------
- (1) The keymap name is 'TeX-source-correlate-map', not
-'TeX-source-correlate-mode-map'. Actually, this keymap isn't
-implemented as minor mode map of 'TeX-source-correlate-mode', in order
-that its bindings don't affect buffers outside of AUCTeX.
+ (1) The keymap name is ‘TeX-source-correlate-map’, not
+‘TeX-source-correlate-mode-map’. Actually, this keymap isn’t
+implemented as minor mode map of ‘TeX-source-correlate-mode’, in order
+that its bindings don’t affect buffers outside of AUCTeX.
File: auctex.info, Node: Debugging, Next: Checking, Prev: Viewing, Up:
Processing
@@ -4319,52 +4341,52 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Debugging, Next: Checking,
Prev: Viewing, Up: Proce
4.3 Catching the errors
=======================
-Once you've formatted your document you may 'debug' it, i.e. browse
+Once you’ve formatted your document you may ‘debug’ it, i.e. browse
through the errors (La)TeX reported. You may also have a look at a
nicely formatted list of all errors and warnings reported by the
compiler.
-- Command: TeX-next-error ARG REPARSE
- ('C-c `') Go to the next error reported by TeX. The view will be
+ (‘C-c `’) Go to the next error reported by TeX. The view will be
split in two, with the cursor placed as close as possible to the
error in the top view. In the bottom view, the error message will
be displayed along with some explanatory text.
An optional numeric ARG, positive or negative, specifies how many
error messages to move. A negative ARG means to move back to
- previous error messages, see also 'TeX-previous-error'.
+ previous error messages, see also ‘TeX-previous-error’.
The optional REPARSE argument makes AUCTeX reparse the error
message buffer and start the debugging from the first error. This
can also be achieved by calling the function with a prefix argument
- ('C-u').
+ (‘C-u’).
-- Command: TeX-previous-error ARG
- ('M-g p') Go to the previous error reported by TeX. An optional
+ (‘M-g p’) Go to the previous error reported by TeX. An optional
numeric ARG specifies how many error messages to move backward.
- This is like calling 'TeX-next-error' with a negative argument.
+ This is like calling ‘TeX-next-error’ with a negative argument.
- The command 'TeX-previous-error' works only if AUCTeX can parse the
-whole TeX log buffer. This is controlled by the 'TeX-parse-all-errors'
+ The command ‘TeX-previous-error’ works only if AUCTeX can parse the
+whole TeX log buffer. This is controlled by the ‘TeX-parse-all-errors’
variable.
-- User Option: TeX-parse-all-errors
If t, AUCTeX automatically parses the whole output log buffer right
after running a TeX command, in order to collect all warnings and
errors. This makes it possible to navigate back and forth between
- the error messages using 'TeX-next-error' and 'TeX-previous-error'.
+ the error messages using ‘TeX-next-error’ and ‘TeX-previous-error’.
This is the default. If nil, AUCTeX does not parse the whole
- output log buffer and 'TeX-previous-error' cannot be used.
+ output log buffer and ‘TeX-previous-error’ cannot be used.
As default, AUCTeX will display a special help buffer containing the
error reported by TeX along with the documentation. There is however an
-'expert' option, which allows you to display the real TeX output.
+‘expert’ option, which allows you to display the real TeX output.
-- User Option: TeX-display-help
If t AUCTeX will automatically display a help text whenever an
- error is encountered using 'TeX-next-error' ('C-c `'). If nil a
+ error is encountered using ‘TeX-next-error’ (‘C-c `’). If nil a
terse information about the error is displayed in the echo area.
- If 'expert' AUCTeX will display the output buffer with the raw TeX
+ If ‘expert’ AUCTeX will display the output buffer with the raw TeX
output.
* Menu:
@@ -4379,16 +4401,16 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Ignoring warnings, Next:
Error overview, Up: Debuggi
-----------------------------------------
Normally AUCTeX will only report real errors, but you may as well ask it
-to report 'bad boxes' and warnings as well.
+to report ‘bad boxes’ and warnings as well.
-- Command: TeX-toggle-debug-bad-boxes
- ('C-c C-t C-b') Toggle whether AUCTeX should stop at bad boxes
+ (‘C-c C-t C-b’) Toggle whether AUCTeX should stop at bad boxes
(i.e. overfull and underfull boxes) as well as normal errors. The
- boolean option 'TeX-debug-bad-boxes' is set accordingly.
+ boolean option ‘TeX-debug-bad-boxes’ is set accordingly.
-- Command: TeX-toggle-debug-warnings
- ('C-c C-t C-w') Toggle whether AUCTeX should stop at warnings as
- well as normal errors. The boolean option 'TeX-debug-warnings' is
+ (‘C-c C-t C-w’) Toggle whether AUCTeX should stop at warnings as
+ well as normal errors. The boolean option ‘TeX-debug-warnings’ is
set accordingly.
While many users desire to have warnings reported after compilation,
@@ -4405,19 +4427,19 @@ options.
More advanced users can set also this option to a symbol with the
name of a custom function taking as arguments all the information
- of the warning listed in 'TeX-error-list' variable, except the last
+ of the warning listed in ‘TeX-error-list’ variable, except the last
one about whether to ignore the warning. See the code of
- 'TeX-warning' function and the documentation of 'TeX-error-list'
+ ‘TeX-warning’ function and the documentation of ‘TeX-error-list’
for more details.
-- Command: TeX-toggle-suppress-ignored-warnings
- ('C-c C-t C-x') Toggle whether AUCTeX should actually hide the
- ignored warnings specified with 'TeX-ignore-warnings'. The boolean
- option 'TeX-suppress-ignored-warnings' is set accordingly. If this
+ (‘C-c C-t C-x’) Toggle whether AUCTeX should actually hide the
+ ignored warnings specified with ‘TeX-ignore-warnings’. The boolean
+ option ‘TeX-suppress-ignored-warnings’ is set accordingly. If this
is nil, all warnings are shown, even those matched by
- 'TeX-ignore-warnings', otherwise these are hidden.
+ ‘TeX-ignore-warnings’, otherwise these are hidden.
- Note that 'TeX-debug-warnings' takes the precedence: if it is nil,
+ Note that ‘TeX-debug-warnings’ takes the precedence: if it is nil,
all warnings are hidden in any case.
@@ -4426,7 +4448,7 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Error overview, Prev: Ignoring
warnings, Up: Debuggi
4.3.2 List of all errors and warnings
-------------------------------------
-When the option 'TeX-parse-all-errors' is non-nil, you will be also able
+When the option ‘TeX-parse-all-errors’ is non-nil, you will be also able
to open an overview of all errors and warnings reported by the TeX
compiler.
@@ -4452,15 +4474,15 @@ compiler.
The error overview is opened in a new window of the current frame by
default, but you can change this behavior by customizing the option
-'TeX-error-overview-setup'.
+‘TeX-error-overview-setup’.
-- User Option: TeX-error-overview-setup
Controls the frame setup of the error overview. The possible value
- is: 'separate-frame'; with a nil value the current frame is used
+ is: ‘separate-frame’; with a nil value the current frame is used
instead.
The parameters of the separate frame can be set with the
- 'TeX-error-overview-frame-parameters' option.
+ ‘TeX-error-overview-frame-parameters’ option.
If the display does not support multi frame, the current frame will
be used regardless of the value of this variable.
@@ -4473,29 +4495,29 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Checking, Next: Control,
Prev: Debugging, Up: Proce
Running TeX or LaTeX will only find regular errors in the document, not
examples of bad style. Furthermore, description of the errors may often
-be confusing. The utilities 'lacheck' and 'chktex' can be used to find
+be confusing. The utilities ‘lacheck’ and ‘chktex’ can be used to find
style errors, such as forgetting to escape the space after an
-abbreviation or using '...' instead of '\ldots' and other similar
-problems. You start 'lacheck' with 'C-c C-c Check <RET>' and 'chktex'
-with 'C-c C-c ChkTeX <RET>'. The result will be a list of errors in the
-'*compilation*' buffer. You can go through the errors with 'C-x `'
-('next-error', *note (emacs)Compilation::), which will move point to the
+abbreviation or using ‘...’ instead of ‘\ldots’ and other similar
+problems. You start ‘lacheck’ with ‘C-c C-c Check <RET>’ and ‘chktex’
+with ‘C-c C-c ChkTeX <RET>’. The result will be a list of errors in the
+‘*compilation*’ buffer. You can go through the errors with ‘C-x `’
+(‘next-error’, *note (emacs)Compilation::), which will move point to the
location of the next error.
Alternatively, you may want in-buffer notation. AUCTeX provides
support for this using the Flymake package in Emacs 26 or newer (*note
-(Flymake)Using Flymake:: for details). To enable, call 'M-x
-flymake-mode <RET>' in the buffer or enable it in all buffers by adding
+(Flymake)Using Flymake:: for details). To enable, call ‘M-x
+flymake-mode <RET>’ in the buffer or enable it in all buffers by adding
this to your init file:
(add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook #'flymake-mode)
- Note that AUCTeX currently only provides support for using 'chktex'
+ Note that AUCTeX currently only provides support for using ‘chktex’
as the flymake backend.
- Each of the two utilities 'lacheck' and 'chktex' will find some
-errors the other doesn't, but 'chktex' is more configurable, allowing
+ Each of the two utilities ‘lacheck’ and ‘chktex’ will find some
+errors the other doesn’t, but ‘chktex’ is more configurable, allowing
you to create your own errors. You may need to install the programs
-before using them. You can get 'lacheck' from
-URL:<https://www.ctan.org/pkg/lacheck> and 'chktex' from
+before using them. You can get ‘lacheck’ from
+URL:<https://www.ctan.org/pkg/lacheck> and ‘chktex’ from
URL:<https://www.ctan.org/pkg/chktex>. TeX Live contains both.
@@ -4508,15 +4530,15 @@ A number of commands are available for controlling the
output of an
application running under AUCTeX
-- Command: TeX-kill-job
- ('C-c C-k') Kill currently running external application. This may
+ (‘C-c C-k’) Kill currently running external application. This may
be either of TeX, LaTeX, previewer, BibTeX, etc.
-- Command: TeX-recenter-output-buffer
- ('C-c C-l') Recenter the output buffer so that the bottom line is
+ (‘C-c C-l’) Recenter the output buffer so that the bottom line is
visible.
-- Command: TeX-home-buffer
- ('C-c ^') Go to the 'master' file in the document associated with
+ (‘C-c ^’) Go to the ‘master’ file in the document associated with
the current buffer, or if already there, to the file where the
current process was started.
@@ -4539,17 +4561,17 @@ separate directory.
%%% TeX-output-dir: "build"
%%% End:
- Alternatively, you may use 'setq-default' to set the default value
+ Alternatively, you may use ‘setq-default’ to set the default value
of this option or set it as a directory local variable (*note
(emacs)Directory Variables::).
- Note that a non-nil value of 'TeX-output-dir' might be incompatible
+ Note that a non-nil value of ‘TeX-output-dir’ might be incompatible
with some TeX commands and macros. In particular, the LaTeX macro
- '\include' is known to not work with this option. Some TeX
+ ‘\include’ is known to not work with this option. Some TeX
packages which produce intermediary files might also be
incompatible. A possible workaround for those packages is to
- append the value of 'TeX-output-dir' to the environment variables
- 'TEXINPUTS' and 'BIBINPUTS'.
+ append the value of ‘TeX-output-dir’ to the environment variables
+ ‘TEXINPUTS’ and ‘BIBINPUTS’.
File: auctex.info, Node: Cleaning, Next: Documentation, Prev: Control, Up:
Processing
@@ -4561,25 +4583,25 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Cleaning, Next:
Documentation, Prev: Control, Up: P
Remove generated intermediate files. In case a prefix argument is
given, remove output files as well.
- Canonical access to the function is provided by the 'Clean' and
- 'Clean All' entries in 'TeX-command-list', invokable with 'C-c C-c'
+ Canonical access to the function is provided by the ‘Clean’ and
+ ‘Clean All’ entries in ‘TeX-command-list’, invokable with ‘C-c C-c’
or the Command menu.
The patterns governing which files to remove can be adapted
separately for each AUCTeX mode by means of the following
variables:
- * 'plain-TeX-clean-intermediate-suffixes'
- * 'plain-TeX-clean-output-suffixes'
- * 'LaTeX-clean-intermediate-suffixes'
- * 'LaTeX-clean-output-suffixes'
- * 'docTeX-clean-intermediate-suffixes'
- * 'docTeX-clean-output-suffixes'
- * 'Texinfo-clean-intermediate-suffixes'
- * 'Texinfo-clean-output-suffixes'
- * 'ConTeXt-clean-intermediate-suffixes'
- * 'ConTeXt-clean-output-suffixes'
- * 'AmSTeX-clean-intermediate-suffixes'
- * 'AmSTeX-clean-output-suffixes'
+ • ‘plain-TeX-clean-intermediate-suffixes’
+ • ‘plain-TeX-clean-output-suffixes’
+ • ‘LaTeX-clean-intermediate-suffixes’
+ • ‘LaTeX-clean-output-suffixes’
+ • ‘docTeX-clean-intermediate-suffixes’
+ • ‘docTeX-clean-output-suffixes’
+ • ‘Texinfo-clean-intermediate-suffixes’
+ • ‘Texinfo-clean-output-suffixes’
+ • ‘ConTeXt-clean-intermediate-suffixes’
+ • ‘ConTeXt-clean-output-suffixes’
+ • ‘AmSTeX-clean-intermediate-suffixes’
+ • ‘AmSTeX-clean-output-suffixes’
-- User Option: TeX-clean-confirm
Control if deletion of intermediate and output files has to be
@@ -4593,8 +4615,8 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Documentation, Prev: Cleaning,
Up: Processing
===========================================
-- Command: TeX-documentation-texdoc
- ('C-c ?') Get documentation about the packages installed on your
- system, using 'texdoc' to find the manuals. The function will
+ (‘C-c ?’) Get documentation about the packages installed on your
+ system, using ‘texdoc’ to find the manuals. The function will
prompt for the name of packages. If point is on a word, this will
be suggested as default.
@@ -4602,7 +4624,7 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Documentation, Prev: Cleaning,
Up: Processing
a list of manuals of the given package among to choose.
The command can be invoked by the key binding mentioned above as
- well as the 'Find Documentation...' entry in the mode menu.
+ well as the ‘Find Documentation...’ entry in the mode menu.
File: auctex.info, Node: Customization, Next: Appendices, Prev: Processing,
Up: Top
@@ -4628,24 +4650,24 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Modes and Hooks, Next:
Multifile, Up: Customization
AUCTeX supports a wide variety of derivatives and extensions of TeX.
Besides plain TeX those are LaTeX, AMS-TeX, ConTeXt, Texinfo and docTeX.
For each of them there is a separate major mode in AUCTeX and each major
-mode runs 'text-mode-hook', 'TeX-mode-hook' as well as a hook special to
+mode runs ‘text-mode-hook’, ‘TeX-mode-hook’ as well as a hook special to
the mode in this order. (As an exception, Texinfo mode does not run
-'TeX-mode-hook'.) The following table provides an overview of the
+‘TeX-mode-hook’.) The following table provides an overview of the
respective mode functions and hooks.
Type Mode function Hook
-------------------------------------------------------
-Plain TeX 'plain-tex-mode' 'plain-TeX-mode-hook'
-LaTeX 'latex-mode' 'LaTeX-mode-hook'
-AMS-TeX 'ams-tex-mode' 'AmS-TeX-mode-hook'
-ConTeXt 'context-mode' 'ConTeXt-mode-hook'
-Texinfo 'texinfo-mode' 'Texinfo-mode-hook'
-DocTeX 'doctex-mode' 'docTeX-mode-hook'
+Plain TeX ‘plain-tex-mode’ ‘plain-TeX-mode-hook’
+LaTeX ‘latex-mode’ ‘LaTeX-mode-hook’
+AMS-TeX ‘ams-tex-mode’ ‘AmS-TeX-mode-hook’
+ConTeXt ‘context-mode’ ‘ConTeXt-mode-hook’
+Texinfo ‘texinfo-mode’ ‘Texinfo-mode-hook’
+DocTeX ‘doctex-mode’ ‘docTeX-mode-hook’
If you need to make a customization via a hook which is only relevant
for one of the modes listed above, put it into the respective mode hook,
-if it is relevant for any AUCTeX mode, add it to 'TeX-mode-hook' and if
-it is relevant for all text modes, append it to 'text-mode-hook'.
+if it is relevant for any AUCTeX mode, add it to ‘TeX-mode-hook’ and if
+it is relevant for all text modes, append it to ‘text-mode-hook’.
Other useful hooks are listed below.
@@ -4657,7 +4679,7 @@ it is relevant for all text modes, append it to
'text-mode-hook'.
This is useful for automatically refreshing the viewer after
re-compilation especially when using Emacs viewers such as DocView
- or PDF Tools. The function 'TeX-revert-document-buffer' can be
+ or PDF Tools. The function ‘TeX-revert-document-buffer’ can be
added to the hook for this purpose.
@@ -4669,15 +4691,15 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Multifile, Next: Parsing
Files, Prev: Modes and Hook
You may wish to spread a document over many files (as you are likely to
do if there are multiple authors, or if you have not yet discovered the
power of the outline commands (*note Outline::)). This can be done by
-having a "master" file in which you include the various files with the
-TeX macro '\input' or the LaTeX macro '\include'. These files may also
+having a “master” file in which you include the various files with the
+TeX macro ‘\input’ or the LaTeX macro ‘\include’. These files may also
include other files themselves. However, to format the document you
must run the commands on the top level master file.
When you, for example, ask AUCTeX to run a command on the master
file, it has no way of knowing the name of the master file. By default,
it will assume that the current file is the master file. If you insert
-the following in your init file ('init.el' or '.emacs'), AUCTeX will use
+the following in your init file (‘init.el’ or ‘.emacs’), AUCTeX will use
a more advanced algorithm.
(setq-default TeX-master nil) ; Query for master file.
@@ -4694,8 +4716,8 @@ yourself, by putting the following text at the end of
your files.
You should always set this variable to the name of the top level
document. If you always use the same name for your top level documents,
-you can set 'TeX-master' in your init file such as 'init.el' or
-'.emacs'.
+you can set ‘TeX-master’ in your init file such as ‘init.el’ or
+‘.emacs’.
(setq-default TeX-master "master") ; All master files called "master".
@@ -4706,32 +4728,32 @@ you can set 'TeX-master' in your init file such as
'init.el' or
If there are multiple levels of nesting, specify the top level
file.
- If this variable is 'nil', AUCTeX will query you for the name.
+ If this variable is ‘nil’, AUCTeX will query you for the name.
- If the variable is 't', then AUCTeX will assume the file is a
+ If the variable is ‘t’, then AUCTeX will assume the file is a
master file itself.
- If the variable is 'shared', then AUCTeX will query for the name,
+ If the variable is ‘shared’, then AUCTeX will query for the name,
but will not change the file.
- If the variable is 'dwim', AUCTeX will try to avoid querying by
- attempting to "do what I mean"; and then change the file.
+ If the variable is ‘dwim’, AUCTeX will try to avoid querying by
+ attempting to “do what I mean”; and then change the file.
-- User Option: TeX-one-master
Regular expression matching ordinary TeX files.
You should set this variable to match the name of all files, for
- which it is a good idea to append a 'TeX-master' file variable
+ which it is a good idea to append a ‘TeX-master’ file variable
entry automatically. When AUCTeX adds the name of the master file
as a file variable, it does not need to ask next time you edit the
file.
If you dislike AUCTeX automatically modifying your files, you can
- set this variable to '"<none>"'. By default, AUCTeX will modify
- any file with an extension of '.tex', '.texi' or '.dtx'.
+ set this variable to ‘"<none>"’. By default, AUCTeX will modify
+ any file with an extension of ‘.tex’, ‘.texi’ or ‘.dtx’.
-- Command: TeX-master-file-ask
- ('C-c _') Query for the name of a master file and add the
+ (‘C-c _’) Query for the name of a master file and add the
respective File Variables (*note (emacs)File Variables::) to the
file for setting this variable permanently.
@@ -4742,29 +4764,29 @@ you can set 'TeX-master' in your init file such as
'init.el' or
AUCTeX keeps track of macros, environments, labels, and style files
that are used in a given document. For this to work with multifile
documents, AUCTeX has to have a place to put the information about the
-files in the document. This is done by having an 'auto' subdirectory
+files in the document. This is done by having an ‘auto’ subdirectory
placed in the directory where your document is located. Each time you
save a file, AUCTeX will write information about the file into the
-'auto' directory. When you load a file, AUCTeX will read the
-information in the 'auto' directory about the file you loaded _and the
-master file specified by 'TeX-master'_. Since the master file (perhaps
+‘auto’ directory. When you load a file, AUCTeX will read the
+information in the ‘auto’ directory about the file you loaded _and the
+master file specified by ‘TeX-master’_. Since the master file (perhaps
indirectly) includes all other files in the document, AUCTeX will get
information from all files in the document. This means that you will
get from each file, for example, completion for all labels defined
anywhere in the document.
- AUCTeX will create the 'auto' directory automatically if
-'TeX-auto-save' is non-'nil'. Without it, the files in the document
+ AUCTeX will create the ‘auto’ directory automatically if
+‘TeX-auto-save’ is non-‘nil’. Without it, the files in the document
will not know anything about each other, except for the name of the
master file. *Note Automatic Local::.
-- Command: TeX-save-document
- ('C-c C-d') Save all buffers known to belong to the current
+ (‘C-c C-d’) Save all buffers known to belong to the current
document.
-- User Option: TeX-save-query
If non-nil, then query the user before saving each file with
- 'TeX-save-document'.
+ ‘TeX-save-document’.
File: auctex.info, Node: Parsing Files, Next: Internationalization, Prev:
Multifile, Up: Customization
@@ -4775,17 +4797,17 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Parsing Files, Next:
Internationalization, Prev: Mul
AUCTeX depends heavily on being able to extract information from the
buffers by parsing them. Since parsing the buffer can be somewhat slow,
the parsing is initially disabled. You are encouraged to enable them by
-adding the following lines to your init file such as 'init.el' or
-'.emacs'.
+adding the following lines to your init file such as ‘init.el’ or
+‘.emacs’.
(setq TeX-parse-self t) ; Enable parse on load.
(setq TeX-auto-save t) ; Enable parse on save.
The latter command will make AUCTeX store the parsed information in
-an 'auto' subdirectory in the directory each time the TeX files are
+an ‘auto’ subdirectory in the directory each time the TeX files are
stored, *note Automatic Local::. If AUCTeX finds the pre-parsed
information when loading a file, it will not need to reparse the buffer.
-The information in the 'auto' directory is also useful for multifile
+The information in the ‘auto’ directory is also useful for multifile
documents, *note Multifile::, since it allows each file to access the
parsed information from all the other files in the document. This is
done by first reading the information from the master file, and then
@@ -4800,7 +4822,7 @@ file local variables.
%%% End:
Even when you have disabled the automatic parsing, you can force the
-generation of style information by pressing 'C-c C-n'. This is often
+generation of style information by pressing ‘C-c C-n’. This is often
the best choice, as you will be able to decide when it is necessary to
reparse the file.
@@ -4811,16 +4833,16 @@ reparse the file.
Automatically save style information when saving the buffer.
-- Command: TeX-normal-mode ARG
- ('C-c C-n') Remove all information about this buffer, and apply the
+ (‘C-c C-n’) Remove all information about this buffer, and apply the
style hooks again. Save buffer first including style information.
With optional argument, also reload the style hooks.
When AUCTeX saves your buffer, it can optionally convert all tabs in
-your buffer into spaces. Tabs confuse AUCTeX's error message parsing
+your buffer into spaces. Tabs confuse AUCTeX’s error message parsing
and so should generally be avoided. However, tabs are significant in
some environments, and so by default AUCTeX does not remove them. To
convert tabs to spaces when saving a buffer, insert the following in
-your init file such as 'init.el' or '.emacs':
+your init file such as ‘init.el’ or ‘.emacs’:
(setq TeX-auto-untabify t)
@@ -4830,8 +4852,8 @@ your init file such as 'init.el' or '.emacs':
Instead of disabling the parsing entirely, you can also speed it
significantly up by limiting the information it will search for (and
store) when parsing the buffer. You can do this by setting the default
-values for the buffer local variables 'TeX-auto-regexp-list' and
-'TeX-auto-parse-length' in your init file such as 'init.el' or '.emacs'.
+values for the buffer local variables ‘TeX-auto-regexp-list’ and
+‘TeX-auto-parse-length’ in your init file such as ‘init.el’ or ‘.emacs’.
;; Only parse LaTeX class and package information.
(setq-default TeX-auto-regexp-list 'LaTeX-auto-minimal-regexp-list)
@@ -4913,10 +4935,10 @@ typesetting and editing documents in European languages.
high-quality typesetting of CJK languages: CTeX and ChinaTeX for
Chinese, ASCII pTeX, upTeX and NTT jTeX for Japanese, HLaTeX and kTeX
for Korean. They are necessary as well when you want to typeset
-documents saved in their domestic encodings such as 'Shift-JIS'.
+documents saved in their domestic encodings such as ‘Shift-JIS’.
Currently, AUCTeX offers native support for pTeX, upTeX and jTeX only.
- If you don't need fine tuning in the result with respect to the
+ If you don’t need fine tuning in the result with respect to the
typesetting rules of their respective national standards, most unicode
based TeX engines, e.g. LuaTeX and XeTeX, can handle CJK languages by
default if they are encoded in UTF-8. The CJK-LaTeX package is provided
@@ -4943,10 +4965,10 @@ and case change commands will work.
Recommended encoding for LaTeX document is UTF-8. Recent LaTeX2e has
native support for UTF-8. If your LaTeX2e is not recent enough, just
-add '\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}'.
+add ‘\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}’.
You can still use ISO 8859 Latin 1 encoding with
-'\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}'.
+‘\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}’.
To be able to display non-ASCII characters you will need an
appropriate font. All Emacs versions supported by current AUCTeX can
@@ -4955,10 +4977,10 @@ display 8-bit characters, provided that suitable fonts
are installed.
A compromise is to use an European character set when editing the
file, and convert to TeX macros when reading and writing the files.
-'iso-cvt.el'
- Much like 'iso-tex.el' but is bundled with Emacs 19.23 and later.
+‘iso-cvt.el’
+ Much like ‘iso-tex.el’ but is bundled with Emacs 19.23 and later.
-'X-Symbol'
+‘X-Symbol’
a much more complete package for Emacs that can also handle a lot
of mathematical characters and input methods.
@@ -4970,7 +4992,7 @@ modify AUCTeX to better support the language, and will
run a language
specific hook that will allow you to for example change ispell
dictionary, or run code to change the keyboard remapping. The following
will for example choose a Danish dictionary for documents including
-'\usepackage[danish]{babel}'. This requires parsing to be enabled,
+‘\usepackage[danish]{babel}’. This requires parsing to be enabled,
*note Parsing Files::.
(add-hook 'TeX-language-dk-hook
@@ -4978,95 +5000,95 @@ will for example choose a Danish dictionary for
documents including
The following style files are recognized:
-'brazilian'
-'brazil'
- Runs style hook 'TeX-language-pt-br-hook'. Gives '"' word syntax,
- makes the <"> key inserts '``' or '''' depending on context.
- Typing <"> twice will insert a literal '"'. Typing <-> twice will
- insert '"=', three times '--'.
-
-'bulgarian'
- Runs style hook 'TeX-language-bg-hook'. Gives '"' word syntax,
- makes the <"> key insert a literal '"'. Typing <"> twice will
- insert '"`' or '"'' depending on context. Typing <-> twice will
- insert '"=', three times '--'.
-
-'czech'
- Runs style hook 'TeX-language-cz-hook'. Pressing <"> will insert
- '\uv{' and '}' depending on context.
-
-'danish'
- Runs style hook 'TeX-language-dk-hook'. Pressing <"> will insert
- '"`' and '"'' depending on context. Typing <-> twice will insert
- '"=', i.e. a hyphen string allowing hyphenation in the composing
+‘brazilian’
+‘brazil’
+ Runs style hook ‘TeX-language-pt-br-hook’. Gives ‘"’ word syntax,
+ makes the <"> key inserts ‘``’ or ‘''’ depending on context.
+ Typing <"> twice will insert a literal ‘"’. Typing <-> twice will
+ insert ‘"=’, three times ‘--’.
+
+‘bulgarian’
+ Runs style hook ‘TeX-language-bg-hook’. Gives ‘"’ word syntax,
+ makes the <"> key insert a literal ‘"’. Typing <"> twice will
+ insert ‘"`’ or ‘"'’ depending on context. Typing <-> twice will
+ insert ‘"=’, three times ‘--’.
+
+‘czech’
+ Runs style hook ‘TeX-language-cz-hook’. Pressing <"> will insert
+ ‘\uv{’ and ‘}’ depending on context.
+
+‘danish’
+ Runs style hook ‘TeX-language-dk-hook’. Pressing <"> will insert
+ ‘"`’ and ‘"'’ depending on context. Typing <-> twice will insert
+ ‘"=’, i.e. a hyphen string allowing hyphenation in the composing
words.
-'dutch'
- Runs style hook 'TeX-language-nl-hook'.
-
-'english'
-'australian'
-'canadian'
-'newzealand'
- Runs style hook 'TeX-language-en-hook'.
-
-'frenchb'
-'francais'
- Runs style hook 'TeX-language-fr-hook'. Pressing <"> will insert
- '\og' and '\fg' depending on context. Note that the language name
- for customizing 'TeX-quote-language-alist' is 'french'.
-
-'german'
-'ngerman'
- Runs style hook 'TeX-language-de-hook'. Gives '"' word syntax,
- makes the <"> key insert a literal '"'. Pressing the key twice
- will give you opening or closing German quotes ('"`' or '"'').
- Typing <-> twice will insert '"=', three times '--'.
-
-'icelandic'
- Runs style hook 'TeX-language-is-hook'. Gives '"' word syntax,
- makes the <"> key insert a literal '"'. Typing <"> twice will
- insert '"`' or '"'' depending on context. Typing <-> twice will
- insert '"=', three times '--'.
-
-'italian'
- Runs style hook 'TeX-language-it-hook'. Pressing <"> will insert
- '"<' and '">' depending on context.
-
-'polish'
- Runs style hook 'TeX-language-pl-hook'. Gives '"' word syntax and
- makes the <"> key insert a literal '"'. Pressing <"> twice will
- insert '"`' or '"'' depending on context.
-
-'polski'
- Runs style hook 'TeX-language-pl-hook'. Makes the <"> key insert a
- literal '"'. Pressing <"> twice will insert ',,' or '''' depending
+‘dutch’
+ Runs style hook ‘TeX-language-nl-hook’.
+
+‘english’
+‘australian’
+‘canadian’
+‘newzealand’
+ Runs style hook ‘TeX-language-en-hook’.
+
+‘frenchb’
+‘francais’
+ Runs style hook ‘TeX-language-fr-hook’. Pressing <"> will insert
+ ‘\og’ and ‘\fg’ depending on context. Note that the language name
+ for customizing ‘TeX-quote-language-alist’ is ‘french’.
+
+‘german’
+‘ngerman’
+ Runs style hook ‘TeX-language-de-hook’. Gives ‘"’ word syntax,
+ makes the <"> key insert a literal ‘"’. Pressing the key twice
+ will give you opening or closing German quotes (‘"`’ or ‘"'’).
+ Typing <-> twice will insert ‘"=’, three times ‘--’.
+
+‘icelandic’
+ Runs style hook ‘TeX-language-is-hook’. Gives ‘"’ word syntax,
+ makes the <"> key insert a literal ‘"’. Typing <"> twice will
+ insert ‘"`’ or ‘"'’ depending on context. Typing <-> twice will
+ insert ‘"=’, three times ‘--’.
+
+‘italian’
+ Runs style hook ‘TeX-language-it-hook’. Pressing <"> will insert
+ ‘"<’ and ‘">’ depending on context.
+
+‘polish’
+ Runs style hook ‘TeX-language-pl-hook’. Gives ‘"’ word syntax and
+ makes the <"> key insert a literal ‘"’. Pressing <"> twice will
+ insert ‘"`’ or ‘"'’ depending on context.
+
+‘polski’
+ Runs style hook ‘TeX-language-pl-hook’. Makes the <"> key insert a
+ literal ‘"’. Pressing <"> twice will insert ‘,,’ or ‘''’ depending
on context.
-'portuguese'
-'portuges'
- Runs style hook 'TeX-language-pt-hook'. Gives '"' word syntax,
- makes the <"> key inserts '"<' or '">' depending on context.
- Typing <"> twice will insert a literal '"'. Typing <-> twice will
- insert '"=', three times '--'. Note that the language name for
- customizing 'TeX-quote-language-alist' is 'portuguese'.
+‘portuguese’
+‘portuges’
+ Runs style hook ‘TeX-language-pt-hook’. Gives ‘"’ word syntax,
+ makes the <"> key inserts ‘"<’ or ‘">’ depending on context.
+ Typing <"> twice will insert a literal ‘"’. Typing <-> twice will
+ insert ‘"=’, three times ‘--’. Note that the language name for
+ customizing ‘TeX-quote-language-alist’ is ‘portuguese’.
-'slovak'
- Runs style hook 'TeX-language-sk-hook'. Pressing <"> will insert
- '\uv{' and '}' depending on context.
+‘slovak’
+ Runs style hook ‘TeX-language-sk-hook’. Pressing <"> will insert
+ ‘\uv{’ and ‘}’ depending on context.
-'swedish'
- Runs style hook 'TeX-language-sv-hook'. Pressing <"> will insert
- ''''. Typing <-> twice will insert '"=', three times '--'.
+‘swedish’
+ Runs style hook ‘TeX-language-sv-hook’. Pressing <"> will insert
+ ‘''’. Typing <-> twice will insert ‘"=’, three times ‘--’.
- Replacement of language-specific hyphen strings like '"=' with dashes
+ Replacement of language-specific hyphen strings like ‘"=’ with dashes
does not require to type <-> three times in a row. You can put point
after the hypen string anytime and trigger the replacement by typing
<->.
In case you are not satisfied with the suggested behavior of quote
and hyphen insertion you can change it by customizing the variables
-'TeX-quote-language-alist' and 'LaTeX-babel-hyphen-language-alist'
+‘TeX-quote-language-alist’ and ‘LaTeX-babel-hyphen-language-alist’
respectively.
-- User Option: TeX-quote-language-alist
@@ -5079,7 +5101,7 @@ respectively.
can be specified directly as strings or as functions returning a
string. The fourth item is a boolean controlling quote insertion.
It should be non-nil if if the special quotes should only be used
- after inserting a literal '"' character first, i.e. on second key
+ after inserting a literal ‘"’ character first, i.e. on second key
press.
-- User Option: LaTeX-babel-hyphen-language-alist
@@ -5089,16 +5111,16 @@ respectively.
The second item denotes the hyphen string to be used as a string.
The third item, a boolean, controls the behavior of hyphen
insertion and should be non-nil if the special hyphen should be
- inserted after inserting a literal '-' character, i.e. on second
+ inserted after inserting a literal ‘-’ character, i.e. on second
key press.
The defaults of hyphen insertion are defined by the variables
-'LaTeX-babel-hyphen' and 'LaTeX-babel-hyphen-after-hyphen' respectively.
+‘LaTeX-babel-hyphen’ and ‘LaTeX-babel-hyphen-after-hyphen’ respectively.
-- User Option: LaTeX-babel-hyphen
String to be used when typing <->. This usually is a hyphen
- alternative or hyphenation aid provided by 'babel' and the related
- language style files, like '"=', '"~' or '"-'.
+ alternative or hyphenation aid provided by ‘babel’ and the related
+ language style files, like ‘"=’, ‘"~’ or ‘"-’.
Set it to an empty string or nil in order to disable
language-specific hyphen insertion.
@@ -5106,7 +5128,7 @@ respectively.
-- User Option: LaTeX-babel-hyphen-after-hyphen
Control insertion of hyphen strings. If non-nil insert normal
hyphen on first key press and swap it with the language-specific
- hyphen string specified in the variable 'LaTeX-babel-hyphen' on
+ hyphen string specified in the variable ‘LaTeX-babel-hyphen’ on
second key press. If nil do it the other way round.
@@ -5119,58 +5141,58 @@ To write Japanese text with AUCTeX, you need the
versions of TeX and
Emacs that support Japanese. AUCTeX supports three Japanese TeX engines
by default: NTT jTeX, ASCII pTeX and upTeX.
- Activate 'japanese-plain-tex-mode' or 'japanese-latex-mode' to use
-the Japanese TeX engines. If it doesn't work, send mail to Masayuki
+ Activate ‘japanese-plain-tex-mode’ or ‘japanese-latex-mode’ to use
+the Japanese TeX engines. If it doesn’t work, send mail to Masayuki
Ataka <masayuki.ataka@gmail.com> or Ikumi Keita
<ikumikeita@jcom.home.ne.jp>, who currently concern with stuff related
to Japanese in AUCTeX. None of the primary AUCTeX maintainers
understand Japanese, so they cannot help you.
- It is recommended to enable 'TeX-parse-self' for typical Japanese
-LaTeX users. When enabled, 'japanese-latex-mode' selects the suitable
+ It is recommended to enable ‘TeX-parse-self’ for typical Japanese
+LaTeX users. When enabled, ‘japanese-latex-mode’ selects the suitable
Japanese TeX engine automatically based on the class file name (such as
-'jbook', 'jsarticle' and 'tjreport') and its option. *Note Parsing
+‘jbook’, ‘jsarticle’ and ‘tjreport’) and its option. *Note Parsing
Files::.
It is important to select the suitable Japanese TeX engine because
-the selected engine determines the command name such as 'platex' and
-'uptex' to typeset the document. If you find that wrong command is
-used, check the value of 'TeX-engine' on that buffer. If the value does
-not suit the current document, change the value by the 'TeXing Options'
-submenu below the 'Command' menu. *Note Processor Options::.
+the selected engine determines the command name such as ‘platex’ and
+‘uptex’ to typeset the document. If you find that wrong command is
+used, check the value of ‘TeX-engine’ on that buffer. If the value does
+not suit the current document, change the value by the ‘TeXing Options’
+submenu below the ‘Command’ menu. *Note Processor Options::.
To make the selected engine to persist across Emacs sessions, there
are two ways from which you can choose one according to your needs:
1. If you use a specific engine (almost) exclusively, customize the
- option 'japanese-TeX-engine-default'.
+ option ‘japanese-TeX-engine-default’.
-- User Option: japanese-TeX-engine-default
- The default 'TeX-engine' in Japanese TeX mode.
+ The default ‘TeX-engine’ in Japanese TeX mode.
- The default value is 'ptex'.
+ The default value is ‘ptex’.
2. If you want to set the engine on a per file basis, use the file
- local variables to set 'TeX-engine'.
+ local variables to set ‘TeX-engine’.
- Here is a sample code to set 'TeX-engine' to 'uptex':
+ Here is a sample code to set ‘TeX-engine’ to ‘uptex’:
%%% Local Variables:
%%% mode: japanese-latex
%%% TeX-engine: uptex
%%% End:
- In the both cases above, the valid value is one of 'ptex', 'jtex' and
-'uptex'.
+ In the both cases above, the valid value is one of ‘ptex’, ‘jtex’ and
+‘uptex’.
You can override the command names associated with the above three
-engines or define your own engine by customizing 'TeX-engine-alist'.
+engines or define your own engine by customizing ‘TeX-engine-alist’.
*Note Processor Options::.
It is sometimes necessary to use an engine which differs from the one
AUCTeX selects automatically. For example, even when you want to use
-'j-article' document class deliberately with ASCII pLaTeX, AUCTeX
-selects NTT jLaTeX command if 'TeX-parse-self' is enabled, because
-'j-article' originally belongs to NTT jLaTeX. In such cases, use the
+‘j-article’ document class deliberately with ASCII pLaTeX, AUCTeX
+selects NTT jLaTeX command if ‘TeX-parse-self’ is enabled, because
+‘j-article’ originally belongs to NTT jLaTeX. In such cases, use the
file local variable method above to select the engine you intend to use.
If you usually use AUCTeX in Japanese, setting the following
@@ -5188,17 +5210,17 @@ variables is useful.
The default style/class when creating a new Japanese LaTeX
document.
- The default value is '"jarticle"'.
+ The default value is ‘"jarticle"’.
It is recommended also for Japanese users to customize the option
-'TeX-PDF-from-DVI' to '"Dvipdfmx"'. *Note Processor Options::.
+‘TeX-PDF-from-DVI’ to ‘"Dvipdfmx"’. *Note Processor Options::.
There are three customize options with regard to the encoding of
Japanese text.
-- User Option: japanese-TeX-use-kanji-opt-flag
- If non-nil, AUCTeX adds '-kanji' option to the typesetting command
- when 'TeX-engine' is 'ptex'.
+ If non-nil, AUCTeX adds ‘-kanji’ option to the typesetting command
+ when ‘TeX-engine’ is ‘ptex’.
Usually AUCTeX guesses the right coding systems for input to and
output from the Japanese TeX process, but you can override them by the
@@ -5206,33 +5228,33 @@ following two customize options.
-- User Option: TeX-japanese-process-input-coding-system
If non-nil, used for encoding input to Japanese TeX process. When
- 'nil', AUCTeX tries to choose suitable coding system.
+ ‘nil’, AUCTeX tries to choose suitable coding system.
-- User Option: TeX-japanese-process-output-coding-system
If non-nil, used for decoding output from Japanese TeX process.
- When 'nil', AUCTeX tries to choose suitable coding system.
+ When ‘nil’, AUCTeX tries to choose suitable coding system.
- The former customize options 'japanese-TeX-command-default',
-'japanese-LaTeX-command-default' and 'japanese-TeX-command-list' are
-removed from AUCTeX. Use 'japanese-TeX-engine-default' instead. If you
-need to customize the executable file name such as '"latex"', the
-options for them, or both, customize 'TeX-engine-alist'.
+ The former customize options ‘japanese-TeX-command-default’,
+‘japanese-LaTeX-command-default’ and ‘japanese-TeX-command-list’ are
+removed from AUCTeX. Use ‘japanese-TeX-engine-default’ instead. If you
+need to customize the executable file name such as ‘"latex"’, the
+options for them, or both, customize ‘TeX-engine-alist’.
The following two additional font commands are available in LaTeX
mode buffer.
-'C-c C-f g'
- Insert gothic font command '\textgt{-!-}' or '\mathgt{-!-}'
- depending on the context.
+‘C-c C-f g’
+ Insert gothic font command ‘\textgt{★}’ or ‘\mathgt{★}’ depending
+ on the context.
-'C-c C-f m'
- Insert mincho font command '\textmc{-!-}' or '\mathmc{-!-}'
- depending on the context.
+‘C-c C-f m’
+ Insert mincho font command ‘\textmc{★}’ or ‘\mathmc{★}’ depending
+ on the context.
- Although they are meaningful only with 'ptex' and 'uptex' engines, it
-won't matter in buffers with other engines.
+ Although they are meaningful only with ‘ptex’ and ‘uptex’ engines, it
+won’t matter in buffers with other engines.
- See 'tex-jp.el' for more information.
+ See ‘tex-jp.el’ for more information.
File: auctex.info, Node: Automatic, Next: Style Files, Prev:
Internationalization, Up: Customization
@@ -5249,14 +5271,14 @@ global level is the level shared by all users at your
site, and consists
of scanning the standard TeX style files, and any extra styles added
locally for all users on the site. The private level deals with those
style files you have written for your own use, and use in different
-documents. You may have a '~/lib/TeX/' directory where you store useful
+documents. You may have a ‘~/lib/TeX/’ directory where you store useful
style files for your own use. The local level is for a specific
directory, and deals with writing customization for the files for your
normal TeX documents.
- If compared with the environment variable 'TEXINPUTS', the global
+ If compared with the environment variable ‘TEXINPUTS’, the global
level corresponds to the directories built into TeX. The private level
-corresponds to the directories you add yourself, except for '.', which
+corresponds to the directories you add yourself, except for ‘.’, which
is the local level.
* Menu:
@@ -5268,8 +5290,8 @@ is the local level.
By default AUCTeX will search for customization files in all the
global, private, and local style directories, but you can also set the
path directly. This is useful if you for example want to add another
-person's style hooks to your path. Please note that all matching files
-found in 'TeX-style-path' are loaded, and all hooks defined in the files
+person’s style hooks to your path. Please note that all matching files
+found in ‘TeX-style-path’ are loaded, and all hooks defined in the files
will be executed.
-- User Option: TeX-style-path
@@ -5283,8 +5305,8 @@ recursively search through subdirectories.
recurse, a positive integer means go that far deep in the directory
hierarchy, t means recurse indefinitely.
- By default, AUCTeX will ignore files named '.', '..', 'SCCS', 'RCS',
-and 'CVS'.
+ By default, AUCTeX will ignore files named ‘.’, ‘..’, ‘SCCS’, ‘RCS’,
+and ‘CVS’.
-- User Option: TeX-ignore-file
Regular expression matching file names to ignore.
@@ -5306,10 +5328,10 @@ load time when you edit a new file and perhaps too many
confusing
symbols when you try to do a completion.
You can disable the automatic generated global style hooks by setting
-the variable 'TeX-auto-global' to nil.
+the variable ‘TeX-auto-global’ to nil.
-- User Option: TeX-macro-global
- Directories containing the site's TeX style files.
+ Directories containing the site’s TeX style files.
-- User Option: TeX-style-global
Directory containing hand generated TeX information.
@@ -5330,15 +5352,15 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Automatic Private, Next:
Automatic Local, Prev: Auto
You should specify where you store your private TeX macros, so AUCTeX
can extract their information. The extracted information will go to the
-directories listed in 'TeX-auto-private'
+directories listed in ‘TeX-auto-private’
- Use 'M-x TeX-auto-generate <RET>' to extract the information.
+ Use ‘M-x TeX-auto-generate <RET>’ to extract the information.
-- User Option: TeX-macro-private
Directories where you store your personal TeX macros. The value
- defaults to the directories listed in the 'TEXINPUTS' and
- 'BIBINPUTS' environment variables or to the respective directories
- in '$TEXMFHOME' of 'kpsewhich' setting if no results can be
+ defaults to the directories listed in the ‘TEXINPUTS’ and
+ ‘BIBINPUTS’ environment variables or to the respective directories
+ in ‘$TEXMFHOME’ of ‘kpsewhich’ setting if no results can be
obtained from the environment variables.
-- User Option: TeX-auto-private
@@ -5346,7 +5368,7 @@ directories listed in 'TeX-auto-private'
files. These correspond to the personal TeX macros.
-- Command: TeX-auto-generate TEX AUTO
- ('M-x TeX-auto-generate <RET>') Generate style hook for TEX and
+ (‘M-x TeX-auto-generate <RET>’) Generate style hook for TEX and
store it in AUTO. If TEX is a directory, generate style hooks for
all files in the directory.
@@ -5361,13 +5383,13 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Automatic Local, Prev:
Automatic Private, Up: Automa
---------------------------------------------
AUCTeX can update the style information about a file each time you save
-it if 'TeX-auto-save' option is enabled. Saved information will be
-stored in the directory 'TeX-auto-local', set to '"auto"' by default.
+it if ‘TeX-auto-save’ option is enabled. Saved information will be
+stored in the directory ‘TeX-auto-local’, set to ‘"auto"’ by default.
The advantage of doing this is that macros, labels, etc. defined in
any file in a multifile document will be known in all the files in the
document. The disadvantage is that saving will be slower. To disable,
-set 'TeX-auto-local' to 'nil'.
+set ‘TeX-auto-local’ to ‘nil’.
-- User Option: TeX-style-local
Directory containing hand generated TeX information.
@@ -5380,12 +5402,12 @@ set 'TeX-auto-local' to 'nil'.
These correspond to TeX macros found in the current directory.
-- User Option: TeX-auto-save-aggregate
- When non-'nil', save parsed information in 'auto' subdirectory of
+ When non-‘nil’, save parsed information in ‘auto’ subdirectory of
master directory.
- Otherwise, save in each 'auto' subdirectory of the parsed file.
+ Otherwise, save in each ‘auto’ subdirectory of the parsed file.
- Subdirectory name is actually taken from 'TeX-auto-local'.
+ Subdirectory name is actually taken from ‘TeX-auto-local’.
File: auctex.info, Node: Style Files, Prev: Automatic, Up: Customization
@@ -5395,8 +5417,8 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Style Files, Prev: Automatic,
Up: Customization
*Note Automatic::, for a discussion about automatically generated
global, private, and local style files. The hand generated style files
-are equivalent, except that they by default are found in 'style'
-directories instead of 'auto' directories.
+are equivalent, except that they by default are found in ‘style’
+directories instead of ‘auto’ directories.
* Menu:
@@ -5429,9 +5451,9 @@ Here is a simple example of a style file.
document using the book document class (or style before LaTeX2e). (Note
that the above code is much simplified for explanatory purpose.) The
file specifies that the largest kind of section in such a document is
-'part'. The interesting thing to notice is that the style file defines
+‘part’. The interesting thing to notice is that the style file defines
an (anonymous) function, and adds it to the list of loaded style hooks
-by calling 'TeX-add-style-hook'.
+by calling ‘TeX-add-style-hook’.
The first time the user indirectly tries to access some
style-specific information, such as the largest sectioning command
@@ -5451,48 +5473,48 @@ hook should usually be identical.
DIALECT-EXPR may be one of:
- * A symbol indicating a singleton containing one basic TeX
+ • A symbol indicating a singleton containing one basic TeX
dialect, this symbol shall be selected among:
- ':latex'
+ ‘:latex’
For all files in LaTeX mode, or any mode derived thereof.
- ':bibtex'
+ ‘:bibtex’
For all files in BibTeX mode, or any mode derived
thereof.
- ':texinfo'
+ ‘:texinfo’
For all files in Texinfo mode.
- ':plain-tex'
+ ‘:plain-tex’
For all files in plain-TeX mode, or any mode derived
thereof.
- ':context'
+ ‘:context’
For all files in ConTeXt mode.
- ':classopt'
+ ‘:classopt’
For class options of LaTeX document. This is provided as
pseudo-dialect for style hooks associated with class
options.
- * A logical expression like:
- '(or DIALECT-EXPRESSION1 ... DIALECT-EXPRESSION_N)'
+ • A logical expression like:
+ ‘(or DIALECT-EXPRESSION1 ... DIALECT-EXPRESSION_N)’
For union of the sets of dialects corresponding to
DIALECT-EXPRESSION1 through DIALECT-EXPRESSION_N
- '(and DIALECT-EXPRESSION1 ... DIALECT-EXPRESSION_N)'
+ ‘(and DIALECT-EXPRESSION1 ... DIALECT-EXPRESSION_N)’
For intersection of the sets of dialects corresponding to
DIALECT-EXPRESSION1 through DIALECT-EXPRESSION_N
- '(nor DIALECT-EXPRESSION1 ... DIALECT-EXPRESSION_N)'
+ ‘(nor DIALECT-EXPRESSION1 ... DIALECT-EXPRESSION_N)’
For complement of the union sets of dialects
corresponding to DIALECT-EXPRESSION1 through
DIALECT-EXPRESSION_N relatively to the set of all
supported dialects
- '(not DIALECT-EXPR)'
+ ‘(not DIALECT-EXPR)’
For complement set of dialect corresponding to
DIALECT-EXPR relatively to the set of all supported
dialects
In case of adding a style hook for LaTeX, when calling function
-'TeX-add-style-hook' it is thought more futureproof for argument
-DIALECT-EXPR to pass constant 'TeX-dialect' currently defined to
-':latex', rather than passing ':latex' directly.
+‘TeX-add-style-hook’ it is thought more futureproof for argument
+DIALECT-EXPR to pass constant ‘TeX-dialect’ currently defined to
+‘:latex’, rather than passing ‘:latex’ directly.
-- Constant: TeX-dialect
- Default dialect for use with function 'TeX-add-style-hook' for
+ Default dialect for use with function ‘TeX-add-style-hook’ for
argument DIALECT-EXPR when the hook is to be run only on LaTeX
file, or any mode derived thereof.
@@ -5506,7 +5528,7 @@ The most common thing to define in a style hook is new
symbols (TeX
macros). Most likely along with a description of the arguments to the
function, since the symbol itself can be defined automatically.
- Here are a few examples from 'latex.el'.
+ Here are a few examples from ‘latex.el’.
(TeX-add-style-hook
"latex"
@@ -5523,7 +5545,7 @@ function, since the symbol itself can be defined
automatically.
-- Function: TeX-add-symbols SYMBOL ...
Add each SYMBOL to the list of known symbols.
- Each argument to 'TeX-add-symbols' is a list describing one symbol.
+ Each argument to ‘TeX-add-symbols’ is a list describing one symbol.
The head of the list is the name of the symbol, the remaining elements
describe each argument.
@@ -5540,37 +5562,37 @@ the longest definition (i.e. the one with the most
arguments).
you can specify
'("tref" TeX-arg-ref ignore) ; two arguments
- 'ignore' is a function that does not do anything, so when you insert
-a 'tref' you will be prompted for a label and no more.
+ ‘ignore’ is a function that does not do anything, so when you insert
+a ‘tref’ you will be prompted for a label and no more.
You can use the following types of specifiers for arguments:
-'string'
+‘string’
Use the string as a prompt to prompt for the argument.
-'number'
+‘number’
Insert that many braces, leave point inside the first. 0 and -1
are special. 0 means that no braces are inserted. -1 means that
braces are inserted around the macro and an active region (e.g.
- '{\tiny foo}'). If there is no active region, no braces are
+ ‘{\tiny foo}’). If there is no active region, no braces are
inserted.
-'nil'
+‘nil’
Insert empty braces.
-'t'
+‘t’
Insert empty braces, leave point between the braces.
-'other symbols'
+‘other symbols’
Call the symbol as a function. You can define your own hook, or
use one of the predefined argument hooks.
-'list'
+‘list’
If the car is a string, insert it as a prompt and the next element
as initial input. Otherwise, call the car of the list with the
remaining elements as arguments.
-'vector'
+‘vector’
Optional argument. If it has more than one element, parse it as a
list, otherwise parse the only element as above. Use square
brackets instead of curly braces, and is not inserted on empty user
@@ -5582,197 +5604,197 @@ argument. It is up to the hook to determine what to
do with the
remaining arguments, if any. Typically the next argument is used to
overwrite the default prompt.
-'TeX-arg-conditional'
+‘TeX-arg-conditional’
Implements if EXPR THEN ELSE. If EXPR evaluates to true, parse
THEN as an argument list, else parse ELSE as an argument list.
-'TeX-arg-literal'
+‘TeX-arg-literal’
Insert its arguments into the buffer. Used for specifying extra
syntax for a macro.
-'TeX-arg-free'
+‘TeX-arg-free’
Parse its arguments but use no braces when they are inserted.
-'TeX-arg-eval'
+‘TeX-arg-eval’
Evaluate arguments and insert the result in the buffer.
-'TeX-arg-label'
+‘TeX-arg-label’
Prompt for a label completing with known labels. If RefTeX is
active, prompt for the reference format.
-'TeX-arg-ref'
+‘TeX-arg-ref’
Prompt for a label completing with known labels. If RefTeX is
active, do not prompt for the reference format. Usually, reference
- macros should use this function instead of 'TeX-arg-label'.
+ macros should use this function instead of ‘TeX-arg-label’.
-'TeX-arg-index-tag'
+‘TeX-arg-index-tag’
Prompt for an index tag. This is the name of an index, not the
entry.
-'TeX-arg-index'
+‘TeX-arg-index’
Prompt for an index entry completing with known entries.
-'TeX-arg-length'
+‘TeX-arg-length’
Prompt for a LaTeX length completing with known lengths.
-'TeX-arg-macro'
+‘TeX-arg-macro’
Prompt for a TeX macro with completion.
-'TeX-arg-date'
+‘TeX-arg-date’
Prompt for a date, defaulting to the current date. The format of
- the date is specified by the 'TeX-date-format' option. If you want
- to change the format when the 'babel' package is loaded with a
- specific language, set 'TeX-date-format' inside the appropriate
+ the date is specified by the ‘TeX-date-format’ option. If you want
+ to change the format when the ‘babel’ package is loaded with a
+ specific language, set ‘TeX-date-format’ inside the appropriate
language hook (for details *note European::).
-'TeX-arg-version'
+‘TeX-arg-version’
Prompt for the version of a file, using as initial input the
current date.
-'TeX-arg-environment'
+‘TeX-arg-environment’
Prompt for a LaTeX environment with completion.
-'TeX-arg-cite'
+‘TeX-arg-cite’
Prompt for a BibTeX citation. If the variable
- 'TeX-arg-cite-note-p' is non-nil, ask also for optional note in
+ ‘TeX-arg-cite-note-p’ is non-nil, ask also for optional note in
citations.
-'TeX-arg-counter'
+‘TeX-arg-counter’
Prompt for a LaTeX counter completing with known counters.
-'TeX-arg-savebox'
+‘TeX-arg-savebox’
Prompt for a LaTeX savebox completing with known saveboxes.
-'TeX-arg-file'
+‘TeX-arg-file’
Prompt for a filename in the current directory, and use it with the
extension.
-'TeX-arg-file-name'
+‘TeX-arg-file-name’
Prompt for a filename and use as initial input the name of the file
being visited in the current buffer, with extension.
-'TeX-arg-file-name-sans-extension'
+‘TeX-arg-file-name-sans-extension’
Prompt for a filename and use as initial input the name of the file
being visited in the current buffer, without extension.
-'TeX-arg-input-file'
- Prompt for the name of an input file in TeX's search path, and use
+‘TeX-arg-input-file’
+ Prompt for the name of an input file in TeX’s search path, and use
it without the extension. Run the style hooks for the file. (Note
that the behavior (type of prompt and inserted file name) of the
function can be controlled by the variable
- 'TeX-arg-input-file-search'.)
+ ‘TeX-arg-input-file-search’.)
-'TeX-arg-define-label'
+‘TeX-arg-define-label’
Prompt for a label completing with known labels. Add label to list
of defined labels.
-'TeX-arg-define-length'
+‘TeX-arg-define-length’
Prompt for a LaTeX length completing with known lengths. Add
length to list of defined lengths.
-'TeX-arg-define-macro'
+‘TeX-arg-define-macro’
Prompt for a TeX macro with completion. Add macro to list of
defined macros.
-'TeX-arg-define-environment'
+‘TeX-arg-define-environment’
Prompt for a LaTeX environment with completion. Add environment to
list of defined environments.
-'TeX-arg-define-cite'
+‘TeX-arg-define-cite’
Prompt for a BibTeX citation.
-'TeX-arg-define-counter'
+‘TeX-arg-define-counter’
Prompt for a LaTeX counter.
-'TeX-arg-define-savebox'
+‘TeX-arg-define-savebox’
Prompt for a LaTeX savebox.
-'TeX-arg-document'
- Prompt for a LaTeX document class, using 'LaTeX-default-style' as
- default value and 'LaTeX-default-options' as default list of
- options. If the variable 'TeX-arg-input-file-search' is t, you
+‘TeX-arg-document’
+ Prompt for a LaTeX document class, using ‘LaTeX-default-style’ as
+ default value and ‘LaTeX-default-options’ as default list of
+ options. If the variable ‘TeX-arg-input-file-search’ is t, you
will be able to complete with all LaTeX classes available on your
- system, otherwise classes listed in the variable 'LaTeX-style-list'
+ system, otherwise classes listed in the variable ‘LaTeX-style-list’
will be used for completion. It is also provided completion for
options of many common classes.
-'LaTeX-arg-usepackage'
+‘LaTeX-arg-usepackage’
Prompt for LaTeX packages. If the variable
- 'TeX-arg-input-file-search' is t, you will be able to complete with
+ ‘TeX-arg-input-file-search’ is t, you will be able to complete with
all LaTeX packages available on your system. It is also provided
completion for options of many common packages.
-'TeX-arg-bibstyle'
+‘TeX-arg-bibstyle’
Prompt for a BibTeX style file completing with all style available
on your system.
-'TeX-arg-bibliography'
+‘TeX-arg-bibliography’
Prompt for BibTeX database files completing with all databases
available on your system.
-'TeX-arg-corner'
+‘TeX-arg-corner’
Prompt for a LaTeX side or corner position with completion.
-'TeX-arg-lr'
+‘TeX-arg-lr’
Prompt for a LaTeX side with completion.
-'TeX-arg-tb'
+‘TeX-arg-tb’
Prompt for a LaTeX side with completion.
-'TeX-arg-pagestyle'
+‘TeX-arg-pagestyle’
Prompt for a LaTeX pagestyle with completion.
-'TeX-arg-verb'
+‘TeX-arg-verb’
Prompt for delimiter and text.
-'TeX-arg-verb-delim-or-brace'
+‘TeX-arg-verb-delim-or-brace’
Prompt for delimiter and text. This function is similar to
- 'TeX-arg-verb', but is intended for macros which take their
+ ‘TeX-arg-verb’, but is intended for macros which take their
argument enclosed in delimiters or in braces.
-'TeX-arg-pair'
+‘TeX-arg-pair’
Insert a pair of numbers, use arguments for prompt. The numbers
are surrounded by parentheses and separated with a comma.
-'TeX-arg-size'
+‘TeX-arg-size’
Insert width and height as a pair. No arguments.
-'TeX-arg-coordinate'
+‘TeX-arg-coordinate’
Insert x and y coordinates as a pair. No arguments.
-'LaTeX-arg-author'
- Prompt for document author, using 'LaTeX-default-author' as initial
+‘LaTeX-arg-author’
+ Prompt for document author, using ‘LaTeX-default-author’ as initial
input.
-'TeX-read-hook'
+‘TeX-read-hook’
Prompt for a LaTeX hook and return it.
-'TeX-arg-hook'
+‘TeX-arg-hook’
Prompt for a LaTeX hook and insert it as a TeX macro argument.
-'TeX-read-key-val'
- Prompt for a 'key=value' list of options and return them.
+‘TeX-read-key-val’
+ Prompt for a ‘key=value’ list of options and return them.
-'TeX-arg-key-val'
- Prompt for a 'key=value' list of options and insert it as a TeX
+‘TeX-arg-key-val’
+ Prompt for a ‘key=value’ list of options and insert it as a TeX
macro argument.
If you add new hooks, you can assume that point is placed directly
after the previous argument, or after the macro name if this is the
first argument. Please leave point located after the argument you are
inserting. If you want point to be located somewhere else after all
-hooks have been processed, set the value of 'TeX-exit-mark'. It will
+hooks have been processed, set the value of ‘TeX-exit-mark’. It will
point nowhere, until the argument hook sets it.
Some packages provide macros that are rarely useful to non-expert
users. Those should be marked as expert macros using
-'TeX-declare-expert-macros'.
+‘TeX-declare-expert-macros’.
-- Function: TeX-declare-expert-macros STYLE MACROS...
Declare MACROS as expert macros of STYLE.
Expert macros are completed depending on
- 'TeX-complete-expert-commands'.
+ ‘TeX-complete-expert-commands’.
File: auctex.info, Node: Adding Environments, Next: Adding Other, Prev:
Adding Macros, Up: Style Files
@@ -5783,7 +5805,7 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Adding Environments, Next:
Adding Other, Prev: Addin
Adding support for environments is very much like adding support for TeX
macros, except that each environment normally only takes one argument,
an environment hook. The example is again a short version of
-'latex.el'.
+‘latex.el’.
(TeX-add-style-hook
"latex"
@@ -5795,18 +5817,18 @@ an environment hook. The example is again a short
version of
'("list" LaTeX-env-list))))
It is completely up to the environment hook to insert the
-environment, but the function 'LaTeX-insert-environment' may be of some
+environment, but the function ‘LaTeX-insert-environment’ may be of some
help. The hook will be called with the name of the environment as its
first argument, and extra arguments can be provided by adding them to a
list after the hook.
For simple environments with arguments, for example defined with
-'\newenvironment', you can make AUCTeX prompt for the arguments by
-giving the prompt strings in the call to 'LaTeX-add-environments'. The
+‘\newenvironment’, you can make AUCTeX prompt for the arguments by
+giving the prompt strings in the call to ‘LaTeX-add-environments’. The
fact that an argument is optional can be indicated by wrapping the
prompt string in a vector.
- For example, if you have defined a 'loop' environment with the three
+ For example, if you have defined a ‘loop’ environment with the three
arguments FROM, TO, and STEP, you can add support for them in a style
file.
@@ -5825,7 +5847,7 @@ file.
If an environment is defined multiple times, AUCTeX will choose the
one with the longest definition. Thus, if you have an enumerate style
file, and want it to replace the standard LaTeX enumerate hook above,
-you could define an 'enumerate.el' file as follows, and place it in the
+you could define an ‘enumerate.el’ file as follows, and place it in the
appropriate style directory.
(TeX-add-style-hook
@@ -5836,9 +5858,9 @@ appropriate style directory.
(defun LaTeX-env-enumerate (environment &optional _ignore) ...)
- The symbol 'foo' will be passed to 'LaTeX-env-enumerate' as the
+ The symbol ‘foo’ will be passed to ‘LaTeX-env-enumerate’ as the
second argument, but since we only added it to overwrite the definition
-in 'latex.el' it is just ignored.
+in ‘latex.el’ it is just ignored.
-- Function: LaTeX-add-environments ENV ...
Add each ENV to list of loaded environments.
@@ -5846,53 +5868,68 @@ in 'latex.el' it is just ignored.
-- Function: LaTeX-insert-environment ENV [ EXTRA ]
Insert environment of type ENV, with optional argument EXTRA.
- Following is a list of available hooks for 'LaTeX-add-environments':
+ Following is a list of available hooks for ‘LaTeX-add-environments’:
-'LaTeX-env-item'
+‘LaTeX-env-item’
Insert the given environment and the first item.
-'LaTeX-env-figure'
+‘LaTeX-env-item-args’
+ Insert the given environment plus further arguments, and the first
+ item. You can use this as a hook in case you want to specify
+ multiple complex arguments just like in elements of
+ ‘TeX-add-symbols’. Here is an example from ‘enumitem.el’ in order
+ to prompt for a ‘key=value’ list to be inserted as an optional
+ argument to the ‘itemize’ environment:
+ (LaTeX-add-environments
+ '("itemize" LaTeX-env-item-args
+ [TeX-arg-key-val (LaTeX-enumitem-key-val-options)]))
+
+‘LaTeX-env-figure’
Insert the given figure-like environment with a caption and a
label.
-'LaTeX-env-array'
+‘LaTeX-env-array’
Insert the given array-like environment with position and column
specifications.
-'LaTeX-env-label'
+‘LaTeX-env-label’
Insert the given environment with a label.
-'LaTeX-env-list'
+‘LaTeX-env-label-args’
+ Insert the given environment with a label and further arguments to
+ the environment.
+
+‘LaTeX-env-list’
Insert the given list-like environment, a specifier for the label
and the first item.
-'LaTeX-env-minipage'
+‘LaTeX-env-minipage’
Insert the given minipage-like environment with position and width
specifications.
-'LaTeX-env-tabular*'
+‘LaTeX-env-tabular*’
Insert the given tabular*-like environment with width, position and
column specifications.
-'LaTeX-env-picture'
+‘LaTeX-env-picture’
Insert the given environment with width and height specifications.
-'LaTeX-env-bib'
+‘LaTeX-env-bib’
Insert the given environment with a label for a bibitem.
-'LaTeX-env-contents'
+‘LaTeX-env-contents’
Insert the given environment with a filename as its argument.
-'LaTeX-env-args'
+‘LaTeX-env-args’
Insert the given environment with arguments. You can use this as a
hook in case you want to specify multiple complex arguments just
- like in elements of 'TeX-add-symbols'. This is most useful if the
+ like in elements of ‘TeX-add-symbols’. This is most useful if the
specification of arguments to be prompted for with strings and
strings wrapped in a vector as described above is too limited.
- Here is an example from 'listings.el' which calls a function with
- one argument in order to prompt for a 'key=value' list to be
- inserted as an optional argument of the 'lstlisting' environment:
+ Here is an example from ‘listings.el’ which calls a function with
+ one argument in order to prompt for a ‘key=value’ list to be
+ inserted as an optional argument of the ‘lstlisting’ environment:
(LaTeX-add-environments
'("lstlisting" LaTeX-env-args
@@ -5900,13 +5937,13 @@ in 'latex.el' it is just ignored.
Some packages provide environments that are rarely useful to
non-expert users. Those should be marked as expert environments using
-'LaTeX-declare-expert-environments'.
+‘LaTeX-declare-expert-environments’.
-- Function: LaTeX-declare-expert-environments STYLE ENVIRONMENTS...
Declare ENVIRONMENTS as expert environments of STYLE.
Expert environments are completed depending on
- 'TeX-complete-expert-commands'.
+ ‘TeX-complete-expert-commands’.
File: auctex.info, Node: Adding Other, Next: Hacking the Parser, Prev:
Adding Environments, Up: Style Files
@@ -5931,36 +5968,36 @@ usually be automatically generated from the TeX file
anyway.
.......................................
In LaTeX documents, style hooks can find the package names and those
-options given as optional argument(s) of '\usepackage' in
-'LaTeX-provided-package-options'.
+options given as optional argument(s) of ‘\usepackage’ in
+‘LaTeX-provided-package-options’.
-- Variable: LaTeX-provided-package-options
Buffer local variable holding alist of options provided to LaTeX
- packages. Each element is a cons cell '(PACKAGE . OPTION-LIST)'.
+ packages. Each element is a cons cell ‘(PACKAGE . OPTION-LIST)’.
For example, its value will be
(("babel" . ("german"))
("geometry" . ("a4paper" "top=2cm" "left=2.5cm" "right=2.5cm"))
...)
You can examine whether there is a specific package-option pair by
-'LaTeX-provided-package-options-member'.
+‘LaTeX-provided-package-options-member’.
-- Function: LaTeX-provided-package-options-member PACKAGE OPTION
- Return non-'nil' if OPTION has been given to PACKAGE. The value is
+ Return non-‘nil’ if OPTION has been given to PACKAGE. The value is
actually the tail of the list of options given to PACKAGE.
There are similar facilities for class names and those options given
-in '\documentclass' declaration.
+in ‘\documentclass’ declaration.
-- Variable: LaTeX-provided-class-options
Buffer local variable holding alist of options provided to LaTeX
- classes. Each element is a cons cell '(CLASS . OPTION-LIST)'. For
+ classes. Each element is a cons cell ‘(CLASS . OPTION-LIST)’. For
example, its value will be
(("book" . ("a4paper" "11pt" "openany" "fleqn"))
...)
-- Function: LaTeX-provided-class-options-member CLASS OPTION
- Return non-'nil' if OPTION has been given to CLASS. The value is
+ Return non-‘nil’ if OPTION has been given to CLASS. The value is
actually the tail of the list of options given to CLASS.
-- Function: LaTeX-match-class-option REGEXP
@@ -5968,19 +6005,19 @@ in '\documentclass' declaration.
first found class option matching REGEXP, or nil if not found.
These functions are also useful to implement customized predicate(s)
-in 'TeX-view-predicate-list'. *Note Starting Viewers::.
+in ‘TeX-view-predicate-list’. *Note Starting Viewers::.
5.6.4.3 Adding Support for Option Completion
............................................
-When the user inserts '\usepackage' by 'C-c C-m', AUCTeX asks for the
+When the user inserts ‘\usepackage’ by ‘C-c C-m’, AUCTeX asks for the
optional arguments after the package name is given. The style file of
that package can provide completion support for the optional arguments.
-- Variable: LaTeX-PACKAGENAME-package-options
List of optional arguments available for the package.
- Here is an excerption from 'acronym.el':
+ Here is an excerption from ‘acronym.el’:
(defvar LaTeX-acronym-package-options
'("footnote" "nohyperlinks" "printonlyused" "withpage"
"smaller" "dua" "nolist")
@@ -5995,21 +6032,21 @@ provide dynamic completion support by custom elisp
function.
them as a string, instead of built-in option query facility. When
this function is defined, AUCTeX calls it with no argument.
- Here is an excerption from 'acro.el':
+ Here is an excerption from ‘acro.el’:
(defun LaTeX-acro-package-options ()
"Prompt for package options for the acro package."
(TeX-read-key-val t LaTeX-acro-package-options-list))
As you can see in the above example, a utility function
-'TeX-read-key-val' is available to read key-value pair(s) from users.
+‘TeX-read-key-val’ is available to read key-value pair(s) from users.
- Note that 'defvar' or 'defun' of 'LaTeX-PACKAGENAME-package-options'
+ Note that ‘defvar’ or ‘defun’ of ‘LaTeX-PACKAGENAME-package-options’
should be at the top level of the style file and not inside the style
hook, because the style hook is not yet called when the user inputs the
-optional arguments in response to 'C-c C-m'.
+optional arguments in response to ‘C-c C-m’.
There are similar facilities for class options. When the user
-inserts '\documentclass' by 'C-c C-e', the respective class style file
+inserts ‘\documentclass’ by ‘C-c C-e’, the respective class style file
can provide completion support for the optional arguments.
-- Variable: LaTeX-CLASSNAME-class-options
@@ -6029,14 +6066,14 @@ expressions in the TeX files, and storing the matched
information. You
can add support for new constructs to the parser, something that is
needed when you add new commands to define symbols.
- For example, in the file 'macro.tex' I define the following macro.
+ For example, in the file ‘macro.tex’ I define the following macro.
\newcommand{\newmacro}[5]{%
\def#1{#3\index{#4@#5~cite{#4}}\nocite{#4}}%
\def#2{#5\index{#4@#5~cite{#4}}\nocite{#4}}%
}
- AUCTeX will automatically figure out that 'newmacro' is a macro that
+ AUCTeX will automatically figure out that ‘newmacro’ is a macro that
takes five arguments. However, it is not smart enough to automatically
see that each time we use the macro, two new macros are defined. We can
specify this information in a style hook file.
@@ -6083,13 +6120,13 @@ specify this information in a style hook file.
;;; macro.el ends here
When this file is first loaded, it adds a new entry to
-'TeX-newmacro-regexp', and defines a function to be called before the
+‘TeX-newmacro-regexp’, and defines a function to be called before the
parsing starts, and one to be called after the parsing is done. It also
declares a variable to contain the data collected during parsing.
-Finally, it adds a style hook which describes the 'newmacro' macro, as
+Finally, it adds a style hook which describes the ‘newmacro’ macro, as
we have seen it before.
- So the general strategy is: Add a new entry to 'TeX-newmacro-regexp'.
+ So the general strategy is: Add a new entry to ‘TeX-newmacro-regexp’.
Declare a variable to contain intermediate data during parsing. Add
hook to be called before and after parsing. In this case, the hook
before parsing just initializes the variable, and the hook after parsing
@@ -6109,7 +6146,7 @@ symbols found.
TABLE. The symbol table to store the data. This can be a
function, in which case the function is called with the argument
- MATCH. Use 'TeX-match-buffer' to get match data. If it is not a
+ MATCH. Use ‘TeX-match-buffer’ to get match data. If it is not a
function, it is presumed to be the name of a variable containing a
list of match data. The matched data (a string if MATCH is a
number, a list of strings if MATCH is a list of numbers) is put in
@@ -6143,10 +6180,10 @@ A.1 Copying this Manual
The copyright notice for this manual is:
- This manual is for AUCTeX (version 13.1.5 from 2022-10-20), a
+ This manual is for AUCTeX (version 13.1.6 from 2022-11-18), a
sophisticated TeX environment for Emacs.
- Copyright (C) 1992-1995, 2001, 2002, 2004-2022 Free Software
+ Copyright © 1992-1995, 2001, 2002, 2004-2022 Free Software
Foundation, Inc.
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
@@ -6154,7 +6191,7 @@ Foundation, Inc.
Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts and no
Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section
- entitled "GNU Free Documentation License."
+ entitled “GNU Free Documentation License.”
The full license text can be read here:
@@ -6170,7 +6207,7 @@ A.1.1 GNU Free Documentation License
Version 1.3, 3 November 2008
- Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software
+ Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software
Foundation, Inc. <https://fsf.org/>
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
@@ -6179,14 +6216,14 @@ A.1.1 GNU Free Documentation License
0. PREAMBLE
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
- functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
+ functional and useful document “free” in the sense of freedom: to
assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
with or without modifying it, either commercially or
noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the
author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not
being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
- This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
+ This License is a kind of “copyleft”, which means that derivative
works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
license designed for free software.
@@ -6207,18 +6244,18 @@ A.1.1 GNU Free Documentation License
be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice
grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration,
to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The
- "Document", below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member
- of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "you". You accept
+ “Document”, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member
+ of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as “you”. You accept
the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way
requiring permission under copyright law.
- A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
+ A “Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the
Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
modifications and/or translated into another language.
- A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section
+ A “Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter section
of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
- publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
+ publishers or authors of the Document to the Document’s overall
subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could
fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document
is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not
@@ -6227,7 +6264,7 @@ A.1.1 GNU Free Documentation License
of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position
regarding them.
- The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
+ The “Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose
titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the
notice that says that the Document is released under this License.
If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it
@@ -6235,13 +6272,13 @@ A.1.1 GNU Free Documentation License
contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify
any Invariant Sections then there are none.
- The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
+ The “Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are
listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
that says that the Document is released under this License. A
Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may
be at most 25 words.
- A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
+ A “Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
represented in a format whose specification is available to the
general public, that is suitable for revising the document
straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed
@@ -6253,7 +6290,7 @@ A.1.1 GNU Free Documentation License
been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by
readers is not Transparent. An image format is not Transparent if
used for any substantial amount of text. A copy that is not
- "Transparent" is called "Opaque".
+ “Transparent” is called “Opaque”.
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
@@ -6266,23 +6303,23 @@ A.1.1 GNU Free Documentation License
the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word
processors for output purposes only.
- The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
+ The “Title Page” means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
material this License requires to appear in the title page. For
- works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
- Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
- work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
+ works in formats which do not have any title page as such, “Title
+ Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
+ work’s title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
- The "publisher" means any person or entity that distributes copies
+ The “publisher” means any person or entity that distributes copies
of the Document to the public.
- A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document
+ A section “Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document
whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses
following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ
stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as
- "Acknowledgements", "Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".)
- To "Preserve the Title" of such a section when you modify the
- Document means that it remains a section "Entitled XYZ" according
+ “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, “Endorsements”, or “History”.)
+ To “Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the
+ Document means that it remains a section “Entitled XYZ” according
to this definition.
The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice
@@ -6312,7 +6349,7 @@ A.1.1 GNU Free Documentation License
If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly
have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and
- the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must
+ the Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts, you must
enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all
these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly
@@ -6384,15 +6421,15 @@ A.1.1 GNU Free Documentation License
the Addendum below.
G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
- Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
+ Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document’s
license notice.
H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
- I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title,
+ I. Preserve the section Entitled “History”, Preserve its Title,
and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new
authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the
- Title Page. If there is no section Entitled "History" in the
+ Title Page. If there is no section Entitled “History” in the
Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and
publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add
an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the
@@ -6402,12 +6439,12 @@ A.1.1 GNU Free Documentation License
for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
likewise the network locations given in the Document for
previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the
- "History" section. You may omit a network location for a work
+ “History” section. You may omit a network location for a work
that was published at least four years before the Document
itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers
to gives permission.
- K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
+ K. For any section Entitled “Acknowledgements” or “Dedications”,
Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section
all the substance and tone of each of the contributor
acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.
@@ -6416,11 +6453,11 @@ A.1.1 GNU Free Documentation License
in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the
equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
- M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements". Such a section
+ M. Delete any section Entitled “Endorsements”. Such a section
may not be included in the Modified Version.
N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled
- "Endorsements" or to conflict in title with any Invariant
+ “Endorsements” or to conflict in title with any Invariant
Section.
O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
@@ -6429,15 +6466,15 @@ A.1.1 GNU Free Documentation License
appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate
some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their
- titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's
+ titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version’s
license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other
section titles.
- You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
+ You may add a section Entitled “Endorsements”, provided it contains
nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
- parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text
- has been approved by an organization as the authoritative
- definition of a standard.
+ parties—for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
+ been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of
+ a standard.
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of
@@ -6475,10 +6512,10 @@ A.1.1 GNU Free Documentation License
combined work.
In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled
- "History" in the various original documents, forming one section
- Entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled
- "Acknowledgements", and any sections Entitled "Dedications". You
- must delete all sections Entitled "Endorsements."
+ “History” in the various original documents, forming one section
+ Entitled “History”; likewise combine any sections Entitled
+ “Acknowledgements”, and any sections Entitled “Dedications”. You
+ must delete all sections Entitled “Endorsements.”
6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
@@ -6499,16 +6536,16 @@ A.1.1 GNU Free Documentation License
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a
- storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the
+ storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the
copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the
- legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual
+ legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual
works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this
License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which
are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half
- of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed
+ of the entire aggregate, the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed
on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic
form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket
@@ -6530,8 +6567,8 @@ A.1.1 GNU Free Documentation License
this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will
prevail.
- If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
- "Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to
+ If a section in the Document is Entitled “Acknowledgements”,
+ “Dedications”, or “History”, the requirement (section 4) to
Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the
actual title.
@@ -6572,7 +6609,7 @@ A.1.1 GNU Free Documentation License
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
- version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
+ version of this License “or any later version” applies to it, you
have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
that specified version or of any later version that has been
published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the
@@ -6580,29 +6617,29 @@ A.1.1 GNU Free Documentation License
choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Document specifies that a proxy can
decide which future versions of this License can be used, that
- proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently
+ proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently
authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
11. RELICENSING
- "Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site" (or "MMC Site") means any
+ “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site” (or “MMC Site”) means any
World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also
provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A
public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server.
- A "Massive Multiauthor Collaboration" (or "MMC") contained in the
+ A “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration” (or “MMC”) contained in the
site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC
site.
- "CC-BY-SA" means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
+ “CC-BY-SA” means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit
corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco,
California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license
published by that same organization.
- "Incorporate" means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or
+ “Incorporate” means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or
in part, as part of another Document.
- An MMC is "eligible for relicensing" if it is licensed under this
+ An MMC is “eligible for relicensing” if it is licensed under this
License, and if all works that were first published under this
License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently
incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover
@@ -6629,7 +6666,7 @@ notices just after the title page:
Free Documentation License''.
If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover
-Texts, replace the "with...Texts." line with this:
+Texts, replace the “with...Texts.” line with this:
with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with
the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts
@@ -6653,23 +6690,36 @@ A.2 Changes and New Features
News since last release
-----------------------
- * AUCTeX underlines the argument of macros which produce underlined
- text in the final product with 'font-latex-underline-face'. The
- corresponding keyword class is called 'underline-command'. *Note
+ • AUCTeX no longer refuses to insert dollar sign when you type ‘$’ at
+ point where AUCTeX thinks the current math mode didn’t start with
+ dollar(s). AUCTeX assumes the user knows that it isn’t in math
+ mode actually.
+
+ You can keep the former behavior by enabling the new customize
+ option ‘TeX-refuse-unmatched-dollar’.
+
+ • AUCTeX supports completion-at-point of macro and environment
+ arguments in LaTeX buffers. The responsible function recognizes
+ the argument position and extracts the corresponding candidates
+ from the variables ‘TeX-symbol-list’ and ‘LaTeX-environment-list’.
+
+ • AUCTeX underlines the argument of macros which produce underlined
+ text in the final product with ‘font-latex-underline-face’. The
+ corresponding keyword class is called ‘underline-command’. *Note
Fontification of macros:: if you dislike this feature and wish to
deactivate it.
- * Support for the Sioyek document viewer is added.
+ • Support for the Sioyek document viewer is added.
- * AUCTeX now requires GNU Emacs 25.1 or higher.
+ • AUCTeX now requires GNU Emacs 25.1 or higher.
- * AUCTeX tracks the change in Emacs where initial inputs in the
+ • AUCTeX tracks the change in Emacs where initial inputs in the
minibuffer during queries are getting phased out. Queries for the
mandatory arguments of macros and environments are adjusted where
- applicable. The value which will be used after hitting 'RET'
+ applicable. The value which will be used after hitting ‘RET’
without other input is shown in the prompt in parentheses prefixed
- with 'default'. For this change the signature of the function
- 'TeX-arg-length' is altered. The old argument list was:
+ with ‘default’. For this change the signature of the function
+ ‘TeX-arg-length’ is altered. The old argument list was:
(defun TeX-arg-length (optional &optional prompt
initial-input definition default)
@@ -6677,375 +6727,375 @@ News since last release
(defun TeX-arg-length (optional &optional prompt
default initial-input definition)
- Note the position change of 'DEFAULT'.
+ Note the position change of ‘DEFAULT’.
- * Indenting of conditionals is improved. Code inside constructs like
- '\ifx . \else . \fi' is correctly indented. An interface for style
+ • Indenting of conditionals is improved. Code inside constructs like
+ ‘\ifx . \else . \fi’ is correctly indented. An interface for style
files is also introduced which can add their macros to the
- indentation engine. Check the file 'algpseudocode.el' for an
+ indentation engine. Check the file ‘algpseudocode.el’ for an
example.
- * You can optionally enable indent inside square brackets '[]' by new
- user options 'TeX-indent-open-delimiters' and
- 'TeX-indent-close-delimiters'. *Note Indenting::.
+ • You can optionally enable indent inside square brackets ‘[]’ by new
+ user options ‘TeX-indent-open-delimiters’ and
+ ‘TeX-indent-close-delimiters’. *Note Indenting::.
- * Now 'tex-buf.el' is merged into 'tex.el' and no longer exists. If
- your personal code has '(require 'tex-buf)', one of the following
+ • Now ‘tex-buf.el’ is merged into ‘tex.el’ and no longer exists. If
+ your personal code has ‘(require 'tex-buf)’, one of the following
prescriptions would serve.
- 1. Remove '(require 'tex-buf)'.
- 2. Replace it with '(require 'tex)'.
- 3. Replace it with '(require 'latex)'.
+ 1. Remove ‘(require 'tex-buf)’.
+ 2. Replace it with ‘(require 'tex)’.
+ 3. Replace it with ‘(require 'latex)’.
- * When you edit a document divided into multiple files, auto parsed
- information for all sub files are saved under 'auto' subdirectory
- at master directory when 'TeX-parse-self' and 'TeX-auto-save'
- options are enabled. Now you can have support '.el' file saved
- under 'auto' subdirectory of each directory of the sub file when
- the sub files aren't located at the master directory.
+ • When you edit a document divided into multiple files, auto parsed
+ information for all sub files are saved under ‘auto’ subdirectory
+ at master directory when ‘TeX-parse-self’ and ‘TeX-auto-save’
+ options are enabled. Now you can have support ‘.el’ file saved
+ under ‘auto’ subdirectory of each directory of the sub file when
+ the sub files aren’t located at the master directory.
- To achieve that, set new user option 'TeX-auto-save-aggregate' to
- 'nil'.
+ To achieve that, set new user option ‘TeX-auto-save-aggregate’ to
+ ‘nil’.
- * There was another hook where former dynamic free variables could be
+ • There was another hook where former dynamic free variables could be
used. The usage was invalidated at version 13.1, by introduction
of lexical binding over AUCTeX.
- The functions in 'TeX-region-hook' could access the free variables
- 'master-buffer' and 'orig-buffer'. Those are now named
- 'TeX-region-master-buffer' and 'TeX-region-orig-buffer',
+ The functions in ‘TeX-region-hook’ could access the free variables
+ ‘master-buffer’ and ‘orig-buffer’. Those are now named
+ ‘TeX-region-master-buffer’ and ‘TeX-region-orig-buffer’,
respectively.
News in 13.1
------------
- * In math environments 'gather', 'gather*', 'gathered', 'multline'
- and 'multline*', fill commands such as 'M-q' and 'C-c C-q C-e' are
+ • In math environments ‘gather’, ‘gather*’, ‘gathered’, ‘multline’
+ and ‘multline*’, fill commands such as ‘M-q’ and ‘C-c C-q C-e’ are
disabled. This sorts out the inconsistency between those and
- 'equation', 'displaymath' environments, in latter of which filling
+ ‘equation’, ‘displaymath’ environments, in latter of which filling
is already disabled.
If you want filling in such environments, customize
- 'LaTeX-indent-environment-list' to remove them.
+ ‘LaTeX-indent-environment-list’ to remove them.
Auto fill continues to work in such environment anyway.
- In addition, AUCTeX adds support of alignment at '&' sign in
- 'align'-like environments such as 'alignat', 'aligned' and so on,
- as well as 'matrix'-like environments such as 'pmatrix', 'bmatrix'
+ In addition, AUCTeX adds support of alignment at ‘&’ sign in
+ ‘align’-like environments such as ‘alignat’, ‘aligned’ and so on,
+ as well as ‘matrix’-like environments such as ‘pmatrix’, ‘bmatrix’
and so on.
- * Now two commands 'Texindex' and 'Texi2dvi' are available when you
- type 'C-c C-c' in Texinfo mode. The command 'Texindex' runs
- 'texindex' on index files and 'Texi2dvi' runs 'pdftexi2dvi' or
- 'texi2dvi' according to the value of 'TeX-PDF-mode'.
+ • Now two commands ‘Texindex’ and ‘Texi2dvi’ are available when you
+ type ‘C-c C-c’ in Texinfo mode. The command ‘Texindex’ runs
+ ‘texindex’ on index files and ‘Texi2dvi’ runs ‘pdftexi2dvi’ or
+ ‘texi2dvi’ according to the value of ‘TeX-PDF-mode’.
So you can typeset Texinfo documents into PDF or DVI format from
within AUCTeX.
- * AUCTeX's own help messages for LaTeX errors are now shown only for
+ • AUCTeX’s own help messages for LaTeX errors are now shown only for
LaTeX runs. AUCTeX shows raw error/warning messages found in
- '.log' files for runs of formats other than LaTeX, such as plain
+ ‘.log’ files for runs of formats other than LaTeX, such as plain
TeX, ConTeXt and Texinfo, as it does even for LaTeX runs when it
- can't find a matching entry in its own help message catalogue.
+ can’t find a matching entry in its own help message catalogue.
- Due to this change, customize option 'TeX-error-description-list'
+ Due to this change, customize option ‘TeX-error-description-list’
can no longer have a fallback entry that matches any error. If
- your customized value includes such entry, typically '(".*" . "No
- help available")', please remove it.
+ your customized value includes such entry, typically ‘(".*" . "No
+ help available")’, please remove it.
- * Two functions 'TeX-split-string' and 'TeX-assoc' are now obsolete
+ • Two functions ‘TeX-split-string’ and ‘TeX-assoc’ are now obsolete
and will be removed in future release. If your personal code uses
- these functions, use 'split-string' and 'assoc-string' instead.
+ these functions, use ‘split-string’ and ‘assoc-string’ instead.
- * The function 'TeX-read-key-val' now accepts a function call as
+ • The function ‘TeX-read-key-val’ now accepts a function call as
second argument. This change should help AUCTeX style writers who
- use 'TeX-arg-key-val' and have to deal with dynamic key-values.
+ use ‘TeX-arg-key-val’ and have to deal with dynamic key-values.
Example of usage:
(TeX-add-style-hook "foo"
(lambda ()
(TeX-add-symbols
'("bar" (TeX-arg-key-val (function-returning-key-val))))))
- * Since AUCTeX 12.2, 'C-x C-w' accidentally disabled the parse on
- save in that buffer, even when you enabled 'TeX-auto-save' option.
+ • Since AUCTeX 12.2, ‘C-x C-w’ accidentally disabled the parse on
+ save in that buffer, even when you enabled ‘TeX-auto-save’ option.
This bug was fixed.
- * AUCTeX now requires GNU Emacs 24.3 or higher.
+ • AUCTeX now requires GNU Emacs 24.3 or higher.
- * Old implementations for viewers were discarded, as announced long
- before. The variables 'TeX-output-view-style' and 'TeX-view-style'
- have no effect now. The former placeholders '%v' and '%vv' in
- 'TeX-command-list' are ignored.
+ • Old implementations for viewers were discarded, as announced long
+ before. The variables ‘TeX-output-view-style’ and ‘TeX-view-style’
+ have no effect now. The former placeholders ‘%v’ and ‘%vv’ in
+ ‘TeX-command-list’ are ignored.
- * AUCTeX now uses lexical binding which has been introduced in Emacs
+ • AUCTeX now uses lexical binding which has been introduced in Emacs
24. This change should have no user-visible effect and require no
manual adaptions except in the following cases.
- - Entries added to the customization variable 'TeX-expand-list'
- also had access to variables 'command' and 'pos'. Those are
- now properly declared and named 'TeX-expand-command' and
- 'TeX-expand-pos'.
+ − Entries added to the customization variable ‘TeX-expand-list’
+ also had access to variables ‘command’ and ‘pos’. Those are
+ now properly declared and named ‘TeX-expand-command’ and
+ ‘TeX-expand-pos’.
- - Entries added to the customization variable 'TeX-expand-list'
- had access to a variable 'file' which was bound to
- 'TeX-active-master', i.e., it evaluated to either the master
+ − Entries added to the customization variable ‘TeX-expand-list’
+ had access to a variable ‘file’ which was bound to
+ ‘TeX-active-master’, i.e., it evaluated to either the master
or region file. This usage must be replaced with either
- 'TeX-active-master' or 'TeX-active-master-with-quotes'.
+ ‘TeX-active-master’ or ‘TeX-active-master-with-quotes’.
- - Viewer entries in 'TeX-view-program-list' also had access to a
- variable 'file' which was bound to the name of the master or
+ − Viewer entries in ‘TeX-view-program-list’ also had access to a
+ variable ‘file’ which was bound to the name of the master or
region file without extension. Instead, the function
- 'TeX-active-master' has to be used now.
+ ‘TeX-active-master’ has to be used now.
- - Macro argument parsing functions could set a variable
- 'exit-mark' to the buffer position where point should be left
+ − Macro argument parsing functions could set a variable
+ ‘exit-mark’ to the buffer position where point should be left
after all arguments have been read. This variable is now
- named 'TeX-exit-mark'.
-
- - The functions in 'LaTeX-section-hook' had access or modified
- the previously undeclared variables 'title', 'name', 'level',
- 'done-mark', and 'toc'. These variables are now properly
- declared and have the 'LaTeX-' prefix, e.g.,
- 'LaTeX-done-mark'.
-
- - The functions in 'ConTeXt-numbered-section-hook' and
- 'ConTeXt-unnumbered-section-hook' had access or modified the
- previously undeclared variables 'title', 'name', 'level',
- 'done-mark', and 'reference'. These variables are now
- properly declared and have the 'ConTeXt-' prefix, e.g.,
- 'ConTeXt-title'.
-
- - The functions in 'TeX-translate-location-hook' could access
- and modify the free variables 'file', 'line', 'error',
- 'offset', 'context', and 'string'. Those are now properly
- declared variables with the prefix 'TeX-translate-location-',
- e.g., 'TeX-translate-location-file'.
-
- * The constant 'LaTeX-dialect' has been renamed to 'TeX-dialect' and
- moved from 'latex.el' to 'tex.el'. 'LaTeX-dialect' now is an
+ named ‘TeX-exit-mark’.
+
+ − The functions in ‘LaTeX-section-hook’ had access or modified
+ the previously undeclared variables ‘title’, ‘name’, ‘level’,
+ ‘done-mark’, and ‘toc’. These variables are now properly
+ declared and have the ‘LaTeX-’ prefix, e.g.,
+ ‘LaTeX-done-mark’.
+
+ − The functions in ‘ConTeXt-numbered-section-hook’ and
+ ‘ConTeXt-unnumbered-section-hook’ had access or modified the
+ previously undeclared variables ‘title’, ‘name’, ‘level’,
+ ‘done-mark’, and ‘reference’. These variables are now
+ properly declared and have the ‘ConTeXt-’ prefix, e.g.,
+ ‘ConTeXt-title’.
+
+ − The functions in ‘TeX-translate-location-hook’ could access
+ and modify the free variables ‘file’, ‘line’, ‘error’,
+ ‘offset’, ‘context’, and ‘string’. Those are now properly
+ declared variables with the prefix ‘TeX-translate-location-’,
+ e.g., ‘TeX-translate-location-file’.
+
+ • The constant ‘LaTeX-dialect’ has been renamed to ‘TeX-dialect’ and
+ moved from ‘latex.el’ to ‘tex.el’. ‘LaTeX-dialect’ now is an
obsolete alias.
- * The style 'latexinfo.el' is removed from AUCTeX. 'latexinfo.el'
+ • The style ‘latexinfo.el’ is removed from AUCTeX. ‘latexinfo.el’
was meant to support latexinfo which in return was a LaTeX-2.09
- extension of Texinfo, but didn't manage to replace Texinfo.
+ extension of Texinfo, but didn’t manage to replace Texinfo.
- * The style 'siunitx.el' is updated to support package version 3.
+ • The style ‘siunitx.el’ is updated to support package version 3.
Key-value options provided by older package versions are removed,
deprecated macros and units are not supported anymore.
- * AUCTeX has preliminary support for LaTeX-hooks. Hooks provided by
+ • AUCTeX has preliminary support for LaTeX-hooks. Hooks provided by
LaTeX kernel are known and available for completion in
- '\AddToHook', '\RemoveFromHook' and '\AddToHookNext'.
+ ‘\AddToHook’, ‘\RemoveFromHook’ and ‘\AddToHookNext’.
- * AUCTeX is now able to place all generated output files, including
+ • AUCTeX is now able to place all generated output files, including
those that are produced by applications running under AUCTeX,
temporary files related to region processing and preview-latex
files, in an output directory. To use this feature, set the new
- user option 'TeX-output-dir' to the absolute path of the output
+ user option ‘TeX-output-dir’ to the absolute path of the output
directory or a relative path which would be interpreted as being
relative to the master file in a multifile document.
- Note that this feature doesn't work if the document includes sub
- file placed in sub directory below the main file via '\include'
+ Note that this feature doesn’t work if the document includes sub
+ file placed in sub directory below the main file via ‘\include’
command.
- * Many other bugs were fixed.
+ • Many other bugs were fixed.
News in 12.3
------------
- * Support for 'PSTricks' is now PDF-oriented. AUCTeX no longer turns
- off PDF mode for 'PSTricks' documents even without 'pst-pdf'. It
- now sets up 'TeX-PDF-from-DVI' option so that PDF output is
- generated when 'TeX-PDF-mode' is enabled (default). Users who want
+ • Support for ‘PSTricks’ is now PDF-oriented. AUCTeX no longer turns
+ off PDF mode for ‘PSTricks’ documents even without ‘pst-pdf’. It
+ now sets up ‘TeX-PDF-from-DVI’ option so that PDF output is
+ generated when ‘TeX-PDF-mode’ is enabled (default). Users who want
DVI output should disable PDF mode explicitly by file local
- variable, or customize 'TeX-PDF-mode' to 'nil'.
+ variable, or customize ‘TeX-PDF-mode’ to ‘nil’.
- * The function 'font-latex-update-font-lock' has been obsoleted in
- order to fix 'bug#37945'. That function was used by several style
+ • The function ‘font-latex-update-font-lock’ has been obsoleted in
+ order to fix ‘bug#37945’. That function was used by several style
files in order to refresh fontification after adding new symbols or
- verbatim constructs. It is better to call 'font-lock-flush' in the
- former case and 'font-latex-set-syntactic-keywords' in the latter
- case. The function 'font-latex-update-font-lock' still exists as a
+ verbatim constructs. It is better to call ‘font-lock-flush’ in the
+ former case and ‘font-latex-set-syntactic-keywords’ in the latter
+ case. The function ‘font-latex-update-font-lock’ still exists as a
no-op which only shows a warning explaining how to update font-lock
as mentioned above.
- * Math expression highlighting was improved. Highlighting for
- documents with a lot of inline math expressions '$...$' won't get
- scrambled now ('bug#33139').
+ • Math expression highlighting was improved. Highlighting for
+ documents with a lot of inline math expressions ‘$...$’ won’t get
+ scrambled now (‘bug#33139’).
In addition, it is no longer recommended to customize
- 'font-latex-math-environments'. Use 'texmathp-tex-commands'
+ ‘font-latex-math-environments’. Use ‘texmathp-tex-commands’
instead. *Note Fontification of math::.
- * AUCTeX tracks changes in LaTeX2e 2020-02-02 release. AUCTeX
+ • AUCTeX tracks changes in LaTeX2e 2020-02-02 release. AUCTeX
supports the improvements to LaTeX font selection mechanism (NFSS).
- New macros like '\textsw' or '\textulc' are added to font insertion
+ New macros like ‘\textsw’ or ‘\textulc’ are added to font insertion
keyboard commands. *Note Font Specifiers::, for details. Further,
- the entries in the menu 'LaTeX', 'Insert Font' are reorganized and
+ the entries in the menu ‘LaTeX’, ‘Insert Font’ are reorganized and
adjusted accordingly.
- Macros previously provided by 'textcomp.sty' are now part of LaTeX
+ Macros previously provided by ‘textcomp.sty’ are now part of LaTeX
kernel. AUCTeX tracks this change as well and support for the new
- macro '\legacyoldstylenums' is added.
+ macro ‘\legacyoldstylenums’ is added.
- * Insertion of environments in LaTeX documents (i.e. 'C-c C-e') was
+ • Insertion of environments in LaTeX documents (i.e. ‘C-c C-e’) was
improved. The former code had a few bugs, which sometimes resulted
in either spurious empty line or spurious comment prefix, or both,
especially when the region is active. Those bugs are now fixed.
- * More bugs fixed, other minor features implemented.
+ • More bugs fixed, other minor features implemented.
News in 12.2
------------
- * AUCTeX reflects the changes in LaTeX2e 2019-10-01 release.
- 'filecontents' environment now takes an optional argument and can
- be used anywhere in a document. The macros '\Ref' and
- '\labelformat' are moved from 'varioref.sty' to LaTeX kernel.
- 'amsmath' has a new macro '\overunderset'.
+ • AUCTeX reflects the changes in LaTeX2e 2019-10-01 release.
+ ‘filecontents’ environment now takes an optional argument and can
+ be used anywhere in a document. The macros ‘\Ref’ and
+ ‘\labelformat’ are moved from ‘varioref.sty’ to LaTeX kernel.
+ ‘amsmath’ has a new macro ‘\overunderset’.
- * A new method is implemented in preview-latex to adjust the
+ • A new method is implemented in preview-latex to adjust the
foreground colors of generated images to those of Emacs, when the
LaTeX command produces PDF. The traditional method became invalid
because of the change introduced in Ghostscript 9.27.
- Unfortunately, the new method doesn't work due to a bug in
+ Unfortunately, the new method doesn’t work due to a bug in
Ghostscript 9.27 and is valid only for Ghostscript > 9.27. There
is also a fallback method for gs 9.27 users which displays plain
- "black on white" images. For successful function of preview-latex,
+ “black on white” images. For successful function of preview-latex,
the users are encouraged to set up the new user option
- 'preview-pdf-color-adjust-method' to choose appropriate option
+ ‘preview-pdf-color-adjust-method’ to choose appropriate option
among the three: new, traditional and fallback method.
- * AUCTeX has support for the Flymake package in Emacs 26 or newer.
- To enable, call 'M-x flymake-mode <RET>' or add this to your
- '.emacs' file:
+ • AUCTeX has support for the Flymake package in Emacs 26 or newer.
+ To enable, call ‘M-x flymake-mode <RET>’ or add this to your
+ ‘.emacs’ file:
(add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook #'flymake-mode)
- * The way the option 'TeX-record-buffer' is used was corrected. It
+ • The way the option ‘TeX-record-buffer’ is used was corrected. It
was used in just the opposite way as the document says. Erase the
customization if you have customized this option since it now acts
in reverse to your expectation.
- * A former customize option 'japanese-TeX-command-list' is removed.
- Use 'japanese-TeX-engine-default', or if it's really necessary,
- customize 'TeX-command-list' directly if the task which the option
+ • A former customize option ‘japanese-TeX-command-list’ is removed.
+ Use ‘japanese-TeX-engine-default’, or if it’s really necessary,
+ customize ‘TeX-command-list’ directly if the task which the option
used to carry is required.
- * Support for standard LaTeX without e-TeX extension is now very
- limited. It doesn't work if raw TeX code is put on the command
- line to invoke 'latex' command. It also fails for region
- compilation ('C-c C-r' and so on) with documents of non-ascii file
+ • Support for standard LaTeX without e-TeX extension is now very
+ limited. It doesn’t work if raw TeX code is put on the command
+ line to invoke ‘latex’ command. It also fails for region
+ compilation (‘C-c C-r’ and so on) with documents of non-ascii file
name. In addition, it no longer works with preview-latex. We
consider this incompatibility is permissible because e-TeX
extension is enabled for standard LaTeX by default long ago. LaTeX
variants such as XeLaTeX and LuaLaTeX are not affected.
- * Key binds in Texinfo mode are improved. Typing '$', '^', '_' and
- '\' now just self-inserts without pointless side effects in Texinfo
+ • Key binds in Texinfo mode are improved. Typing ‘$’, ‘^’, ‘_’ and
+ ‘\’ now just self-inserts without pointless side effects in Texinfo
mode.
- In addition, the option 'TeX-electric-escape' is now effective in
- Texinfo mode. When it is enabled, typing '@' will invoke
- 'TeX-electric-macro' offering completion in similar style with
+ In addition, the option ‘TeX-electric-escape’ is now effective in
+ Texinfo mode. When it is enabled, typing ‘@’ will invoke
+ ‘TeX-electric-macro’ offering completion in similar style with
other TeX modes of AUCTeX.
- * Fontification support for 'biblatex' package is improved and
+ • Fontification support for ‘biblatex’ package is improved and
updated to macros provided by package version 3.12. For qualified
lists, at least 2 mandatory arguments are fontified.
- * Support for column specifiers 'w' and 'W' provided by 'array'
- package is added to 'array.el'. The correct counting of columns
- only works when the 'align' parameter is enclosed in braces, e.g.,
- 'w{l}{3cm}'. The short version 'wl{3cm}' is not supported.
+ • Support for column specifiers ‘w’ and ‘W’ provided by ‘array’
+ package is added to ‘array.el’. The correct counting of columns
+ only works when the ‘align’ parameter is enclosed in braces, e.g.,
+ ‘w{l}{3cm}’. The short version ‘wl{3cm}’ is not supported.
- * Entries for 'PDF Tools' are added in
- 'TeX-view-program-list-builtin' for Windows and macOS. This viewer
+ • Entries for ‘PDF Tools’ are added in
+ ‘TeX-view-program-list-builtin’ for Windows and macOS. This viewer
can be configured under these operating systems with an entry like
this in an init file:
(setq TeX-view-program-selection '((output-pdf "PDF Tools")))
- * Several other bugs were fixed, many minor features were added.
+ • Several other bugs were fixed, many minor features were added.
News in 12.1
------------
- * AUCTeX now requires GNU Emacs 24 or higher. Support for XEmacs has
+ • AUCTeX now requires GNU Emacs 24 or higher. Support for XEmacs has
been dropped.
- * Besides the change in the supported version of Emacs, there has
+ • Besides the change in the supported version of Emacs, there has
been no functional change in this release, which is equivalent to
version 11.92.
News in 11.92
-------------
- * preview-latex is compatible with Ghostscript 9.22 where the
- operator '.runandhide' is removed. All occurrences of
- '.runandhide' in preview-latex are replaced by alternative code
+ • preview-latex is compatible with Ghostscript 9.22 where the
+ operator ‘.runandhide’ is removed. All occurrences of
+ ‘.runandhide’ in preview-latex are replaced by alternative code
making it work with Ghostscript 9.22 again.
- * AUCTeX has a new customize option
- 'TeX-math-input-method-off-regexp'. When you begin to input a math
+ • AUCTeX has a new customize option
+ ‘TeX-math-input-method-off-regexp’. When you begin to input a math
formula, the current input method is turned off if its name matches
this regular expression.
In fact this variable was introduced long before, but has not been
documented in info files nor turned into a customize option with
- 'defcustom' until this release.
+ ‘defcustom’ until this release.
- * The window system focus is pulled back to Emacs when viewing with
+ • The window system focus is pulled back to Emacs when viewing with
evince-compatible viewers if a new customize option
- 'TeX-view-evince-keep-focus' is non-nil.
+ ‘TeX-view-evince-keep-focus’ is non-nil.
- * The usual dose of bug fixes was administered.
+ • The usual dose of bug fixes was administered.
News in 11.91
-------------
- * Now AUCTeX has a logo. The LaTeX code to create it is available in
- the 'etc/' directory of the package.
+ • Now AUCTeX has a logo. The LaTeX code to create it is available in
+ the ‘etc/’ directory of the package.
- * Add support for 'upmendex', an extension of 'makeindex' capable of
+ • Add support for ‘upmendex’, an extension of ‘makeindex’ capable of
sorting indexes by unicode based ICU.
- * Fix preview-latex to interact correctly with Japanese LaTeX. The
+ • Fix preview-latex to interact correctly with Japanese LaTeX. The
parsing routine was made robust not to be confused by the 7-bit
encoding of Japanese text and the necessary option to LaTeX command
is kept even when preamble caching is enabled.
- * The new "Glossaries" entry in 'TeX-command-list' runs the command
- 'makeglossaries'.
+ • The new “Glossaries” entry in ‘TeX-command-list’ runs the command
+ ‘makeglossaries’.
- * Fontification of control symbols has been improved. Characters
- defined in 'font-latex-match-simple-exclude-list' do not receive
- any fontification. In DocTeX mode, the character '_' is removed
- from 'font-latex-match-simple-exclude-list' in order to fontify
- macros like '\__module_foo:nnn' correctly.
+ • Fontification of control symbols has been improved. Characters
+ defined in ‘font-latex-match-simple-exclude-list’ do not receive
+ any fontification. In DocTeX mode, the character ‘_’ is removed
+ from ‘font-latex-match-simple-exclude-list’ in order to fontify
+ macros like ‘\__module_foo:nnn’ correctly.
- * Fontification of math environments has been improved. Optional
+ • Fontification of math environments has been improved. Optional
and/or mandatory argument(s) to environments are not fontified.
- * 'preview.sty' loads 'luatex85.sty' if possible and should be
+ • ‘preview.sty’ loads ‘luatex85.sty’ if possible and should be
compatible with newer luaTeX versions.
- * AUCTeX has a new customize option 'TeX-ispell-verb-delimiters'.
+ • AUCTeX has a new customize option ‘TeX-ispell-verb-delimiters’.
This string contains usual characters used as delimiters for
- in-line verbatim macros like '\verb'. Text between delimiters
+ in-line verbatim macros like ‘\verb’. Text between delimiters
after an in-line verbatim macro will be skipped during spell
checking.
- * Fontification of in-line verbatim macros has been improved.
- 'font-latex.el' recognizes an optional or a mandatory argument for
- macros like '\Verb' from 'fancyvrb.sty', '\mint' and '\mintinline'
- from 'minted.sty' and fontifies verbatim content correctly.
+ • Fontification of in-line verbatim macros has been improved.
+ ‘font-latex.el’ recognizes an optional or a mandatory argument for
+ macros like ‘\Verb’ from ‘fancyvrb.sty’, ‘\mint’ and ‘\mintinline’
+ from ‘minted.sty’ and fontifies verbatim content correctly.
- * AUCTeX can put and parse labels in optional argument of
+ • AUCTeX can put and parse labels in optional argument of
environments. Inserting labels is done by new function
- 'LaTeX-env-label-as-keyval'. A new customize option
- 'LaTeX-listing-label' is available as prefix to labels in code
- typesetting environments, e.g. 'lstlisting' environment provided by
- 'listings' package. 'LaTeX-listing-label' defaults to 'lst:'.
+ ‘LaTeX-env-label-as-keyval’. A new customize option
+ ‘LaTeX-listing-label’ is available as prefix to labels in code
+ typesetting environments, e.g. ‘lstlisting’ environment provided by
+ ‘listings’ package. ‘LaTeX-listing-label’ defaults to ‘lst:’.
Parsing of labels for later referencing relies on two requirements:
1. Label should come as last key-value argument, and
2. label must be enclosed in braces, e.g.
@@ -7053,504 +7103,504 @@ News in 11.91
...
\end{lstlisting}
- * The function 'LaTeX-label' now takes a second optional argument
- 'NO-INSERT'. When non-'nil', 'LaTeX-label' reads a label and
+ • The function ‘LaTeX-label’ now takes a second optional argument
+ ‘NO-INSERT’. When non-‘nil’, ‘LaTeX-label’ reads a label and
returns it as a string. This argument is also passed to any
- function bound to 'LaTeX-label-function' (see next item).
+ function bound to ‘LaTeX-label-function’ (see next item).
- * *Incompatible change:* The signature for the function passed with
- the customize option 'LaTeX-label-function' has changed. The
+ • *Incompatible change:* The signature for the function passed with
+ the customize option ‘LaTeX-label-function’ has changed. The
function bound to this variable is now expected to take an optional
- second argument 'NO-INSERT'. When this argument is non-'nil', the
+ second argument ‘NO-INSERT’. When this argument is non-‘nil’, the
function should read and only return a label as a string; insertion
is done by another function.
- * Directory local variables were ineffective for
- 'japanese-latex-mode' and 'japanese-plain-tex-mode'. This bug was
+ • Directory local variables were ineffective for
+ ‘japanese-latex-mode’ and ‘japanese-plain-tex-mode’. This bug was
fixed. (This was actually done in AUCTeX 11.90, but not
advertised)
- * The output of Japanese text from Japanese TeX engines is decoded
+ • The output of Japanese text from Japanese TeX engines is decoded
correctly for most cases, according to the encoding of the TeX
documents and the locale. The difference between MS Windows, macOS
and unix-like OS is taken into account. (This was actually done in
AUCTeX 11.90, but not advertised)
- * Quite a few new LaTeX packages are supported.
+ • Quite a few new LaTeX packages are supported.
- * As usual, many bugs were fixed.
+ • As usual, many bugs were fixed.
News in 11.90
-------------
- * In addition to the completion performed by 'TeX-complete-symbol',
+ • In addition to the completion performed by ‘TeX-complete-symbol’,
AUCTeX now also supports the new Emacs standard completion-at-point
- facility (see the Emacs command 'completion-at-point'). This also
+ facility (see the Emacs command ‘completion-at-point’). This also
means that modern completion UIs like company-mode work out of the
box in TeX and LaTeX buffers. *Note Completion::, for details.
- * Completion is now aware of being inside a math environment and then
+ • Completion is now aware of being inside a math environment and then
completes math macros.
- * AUCTeX is able to display several levels of super- and subscripts,
+ • AUCTeX is able to display several levels of super- and subscripts,
each one raised above and a bit smaller than its basis. For this
feature, have a look at the customize options
- 'font-latex-fontify-script' (especially the new values
- 'multi-level' and 'invisible') and
- 'font-latex-fontify-script-max-level'. Also, the script characters
- '^' and '_' are also fontified with a special face named
- 'font-latex-script-char-face'. *Note Fontification of math::, for
+ ‘font-latex-fontify-script’ (especially the new values
+ ‘multi-level’ and ‘invisible’) and
+ ‘font-latex-fontify-script-max-level’. Also, the script characters
+ ‘^’ and ‘_’ are also fontified with a special face named
+ ‘font-latex-script-char-face’. *Note Fontification of math::, for
details.
- * Parsing of format specification in various tabular environments has
- been improved. The function 'LaTeX-insert-item' ('C-c <LFD>')
- inserts suitable number of ampersands for '*{num}{cols}'
- constructs. Style files for LaTeX packages 'tabularx', 'tabulary',
- 'longtable', 'dcolumn' and 'siunitx' are adapted to take advantage
+ • Parsing of format specification in various tabular environments has
+ been improved. The function ‘LaTeX-insert-item’ (‘C-c <LFD>’)
+ inserts suitable number of ampersands for ‘*{num}{cols}’
+ constructs. Style files for LaTeX packages ‘tabularx’, ‘tabulary’,
+ ‘longtable’, ‘dcolumn’ and ‘siunitx’ are adapted to take advantage
of this improvement.
- * AUCTeX has a new Ispell dictionary 'tex-ispell.el' for macros and
+ • AUCTeX has a new Ispell dictionary ‘tex-ispell.el’ for macros and
environments which will be skipped during spell checking. The
activiation of this feature is controlled by a new customize option
- 'TeX-ispell-extend-skip-list', which is set to 't' and activated by
+ ‘TeX-ispell-extend-skip-list’, which is set to ‘t’ and activated by
default.
- * AUCTeX has a new customize option 'TeX-raise-frame-function' that
+ • AUCTeX has a new customize option ‘TeX-raise-frame-function’ that
is currently only used by Evince and Atril inverse search to raise
the Emacs frame.
- * When inserting a new float, AUCTeX will now prompt for a
+ • When inserting a new float, AUCTeX will now prompt for a
short-caption if the length of the caption provided is greater than
a certain size. This size is controlled via a new user option
- 'LaTeX-short-caption-prompt-length'.
+ ‘LaTeX-short-caption-prompt-length’.
- * Parsing of the compilation log has been reworked. You should
+ • Parsing of the compilation log has been reworked. You should
encounter fewer mistaken files while navigating through errors and
warnings.
- * Two new user options, 'TeX-ignore-warnings' and
- 'TeX-suppress-ignored-warnings', allow ignoring certain warnings
+ • Two new user options, ‘TeX-ignore-warnings’ and
+ ‘TeX-suppress-ignored-warnings’, allow ignoring certain warnings
after compilation of the document. *Note Ignoring warnings::, for
details.
- * A new option, 'TeX-PDF-from-DVI', controls if and how to produce a
+ • A new option, ‘TeX-PDF-from-DVI’, controls if and how to produce a
PDF file by converting a DVI file. This supersedes
- 'TeX-PDF-via-dvips-ps2pdf' which is still recognized but marked as
+ ‘TeX-PDF-via-dvips-ps2pdf’ which is still recognized but marked as
obsolete and may be removed in future releases.
- * Support for a number of external viewers has been added:
- * Atril viewer. Forward and inverse search requires version
+ • Support for a number of external viewers has been added:
+ • Atril viewer. Forward and inverse search requires version
1.9.1 or later to work.
- * dviout viewer on Windows. Note that this setup works when
- 'TeX-source-correlate-method' is set to use 'source-specials'
+ • dviout viewer on Windows. Note that this setup works when
+ ‘TeX-source-correlate-method’ is set to use ‘source-specials’
for DVI, e.g.:
(setq TeX-source-correlate-method
'((dvi . source-specials)
(pdf . synctex)))
which is the default.
- * SumatraPDF viewer on Windows.
+ • SumatraPDF viewer on Windows.
- * Zathura viewer. Forward and inverse search requires a recent
+ • Zathura viewer. Forward and inverse search requires a recent
version of the program to work (3.4 or later).
- * A new function, 'TeX-documentation-texdoc', for reading
- documentation with 'texdoc' has been added. 'TeX-doc' is still
- available but now 'C-c ?' runs 'TeX-documentation-texdoc'.
+ • A new function, ‘TeX-documentation-texdoc’, for reading
+ documentation with ‘texdoc’ has been added. ‘TeX-doc’ is still
+ available but now ‘C-c ?’ runs ‘TeX-documentation-texdoc’.
- * AUCTeX has a new custom option
- 'LaTeX-reftex-cite-format-auto-activate' which controls the
+ • AUCTeX has a new custom option
+ ‘LaTeX-reftex-cite-format-auto-activate’ which controls the
automatic activation of citation formats provided by RefTeX when a
style file is loaded and RefTeX is enabled. Currently,
- 'biblatex.el', 'harvard.el', 'jurabib.el' and 'natbib.el' use this
- feature. If you have customized 'reftex-cite-format' and want to
- use your settings, you should set this variable to 'nil'.
+ ‘biblatex.el’, ‘harvard.el’, ‘jurabib.el’ and ‘natbib.el’ use this
+ feature. If you have customized ‘reftex-cite-format’ and want to
+ use your settings, you should set this variable to ‘nil’.
- * AUCTeX now has limited support for the TikZ package. For the
+ • AUCTeX now has limited support for the TikZ package. For the
moment, this includes some basic support for prompting the user of
- arguments to the '\draw' macro.
+ arguments to the ‘\draw’ macro.
- * The style 'graphicx.el' went through a bigger overhaul. The
- optional argument of command '\includegraphics' now supports
+ • The style ‘graphicx.el’ went through a bigger overhaul. The
+ optional argument of command ‘\includegraphics’ now supports
key-val query; keys can independently be chosen anytime by pressing
the <,> key. As a side effect, the variable
- 'LaTeX-includegraphics-options-alist' is now no-op and is removed
- from 'tex-style.el'. You can safely remove any customization of it
- from your init file. The mandatory argument of '\includegraphics'
+ ‘LaTeX-includegraphics-options-alist’ is now no-op and is removed
+ from ‘tex-style.el’. You can safely remove any customization of it
+ from your init file. The mandatory argument of ‘\includegraphics’
knows about image file extensions supported by the used engine and
offers them for inclusion.
- * Support for other LaTeX packages was improved, and style files for
+ • Support for other LaTeX packages was improved, and style files for
several new packages were added.
- * Many bugs were crushed along the way.
+ • Many bugs were crushed along the way.
News in 11.89
-------------
- * You can now run all commands needed to compile a document and then
- open the viewer with a single command: 'TeX-command-run-all', bound
- to 'C-c C-a'.
+ • You can now run all commands needed to compile a document and then
+ open the viewer with a single command: ‘TeX-command-run-all’, bound
+ to ‘C-c C-a’.
- * Commands such as 'LaTeX' and 'View' can now be executed
+ • Commands such as ‘LaTeX’ and ‘View’ can now be executed
conveniently on the current section (or part, chapter, subsection,
- etc). See 'LaTeX-command-section' and
- 'LaTeX-command-section-change-level'. *Note Starting a Command::,
+ etc). See ‘LaTeX-command-section’ and
+ ‘LaTeX-command-section-change-level’. *Note Starting a Command::,
for details.
- * Forward and backward search with Evince now also work when only a
+ • Forward and backward search with Evince now also work when only a
region of the document is compiled/viewed.
- * To open the PDF output file you can now use also PDF Tools, a
+ • To open the PDF output file you can now use also PDF Tools, a
document viewer for Emacs. With it, as a plus, forward and
backward search is accurate at word level.
- * With new option 'TeX-PDF-via-dvips-ps2pdf' it is possible to
+ • With new option ‘TeX-PDF-via-dvips-ps2pdf’ it is possible to
compile a document to DVI and then convert it to PDF using
- 'dvips'-'ps2pdf' before viewing it.
+ ‘dvips’–‘ps2pdf’ before viewing it.
- * New option 'TeX-file-line-error' allows to select file:line:error
+ • New option ‘TeX-file-line-error’ allows to select file:line:error
style for error messages.
- * Indent '\[...\]' math mode as a regular environment by default.
+ • Indent ‘\[...\]’ math mode as a regular environment by default.
- * Now AUCTeX suggests to run 'makeindex' when appropriate.
+ • Now AUCTeX suggests to run ‘makeindex’ when appropriate.
- * 'TeX-view-program-list' can contain, as third optional element of
+ • ‘TeX-view-program-list’ can contain, as third optional element of
each item, the name of the executable(s) needed to open the viewer.
- * 'TeX-expand-list' variable has been split into 'TeX-expand-list'
- and 'TeX-expand-list-builtin'. Only the former is intended to be
+ • ‘TeX-expand-list’ variable has been split into ‘TeX-expand-list’
+ and ‘TeX-expand-list-builtin’. Only the former is intended to be
customized by the user, the latter contains built-in expanders.
- You might want to keep in 'TeX-expand-list' only new expansion
+ You might want to keep in ‘TeX-expand-list’ only new expansion
strings.
- * Before running commands like TeX and LaTeX, now AUCTeX performs
- some checks. If 'TeX-check-TeX' is non-nil, it will test whether a
+ • Before running commands like TeX and LaTeX, now AUCTeX performs
+ some checks. If ‘TeX-check-TeX’ is non-nil, it will test whether a
working TeX distribution is actually present in the system and
- available to Emacs. Instead, when 'TeX-check-engine' is non-nil,
+ available to Emacs. Instead, when ‘TeX-check-engine’ is non-nil,
before running LaTeX commands AUCTeX will check whether the correct
engine has been set, based upon known restrictions posed by LaTeX
packages.
- * Basic support to ConTeXt Mark IV has been added. Users can now
+ • Basic support to ConTeXt Mark IV has been added. Users can now
select the Mark version to be used with new option
- 'ConTeXt-Mark-version', and AUCTeX is able to catch error messages
+ ‘ConTeXt-Mark-version’, and AUCTeX is able to catch error messages
in the output log of a Mark IV document.
- * Support for tons of LaTeX packages has been added.
+ • Support for tons of LaTeX packages has been added.
- * Numbers of bugs have been fixed, many minor features have been
+ • Numbers of bugs have been fixed, many minor features have been
added.
News in 11.88
-------------
- * 'TeX-PDF-mode' is now enabled by default.
+ • ‘TeX-PDF-mode’ is now enabled by default.
- * Now 'TeX-previous-error' works with TeX commands if the new option
- 'TeX-parse-all-errors' is non-nil, which is the default. When this
+ • Now ‘TeX-previous-error’ works with TeX commands if the new option
+ ‘TeX-parse-all-errors’ is non-nil, which is the default. When this
option is non-nil, an overview of errors and warnings reported by
- the TeX compiler can be opened with 'M-x TeX-error-overview <RET>'.
+ the TeX compiler can be opened with ‘M-x TeX-error-overview <RET>’.
*Note Debugging::, for details.
- * Style file authors are encouraged to distinguish common from expert
+ • Style file authors are encouraged to distinguish common from expert
macros and environments, and mark the latter using
- 'TeX-declare-expert-macros' and
- 'LaTeX-declare-expert-environments'.
+ ‘TeX-declare-expert-macros’ and
+ ‘LaTeX-declare-expert-environments’.
Users can then restrict completion using
- 'TeX-complete-expert-commands'.
+ ‘TeX-complete-expert-commands’.
- * Management of LaTeX package options in the parser was improved.
+ • Management of LaTeX package options in the parser was improved.
You might need to reparse your documents, especially if you loaded
- the 'babel' package with language options.
+ the ‘babel’ package with language options.
- * Now you can insert '$...$' or '\(...\)' by typing a single '$'. To
- do this, customize the new option 'TeX-electric-math'.
- 'TeX-math-close-double-dollar' was removed. *Note Quotes::, for
+ • Now you can insert ‘$...$’ or ‘\(...\)’ by typing a single ‘$’. To
+ do this, customize the new option ‘TeX-electric-math’.
+ ‘TeX-math-close-double-dollar’ was removed. *Note Quotes::, for
details.
- * 'C-c <RET> documentclass <RET>' completes with all available LaTeX
- classes, if the 'TeX-arg-input-file-search' variable is non-nil.
+ • ‘C-c <RET> documentclass <RET>’ completes with all available LaTeX
+ classes, if the ‘TeX-arg-input-file-search’ variable is non-nil.
Completion for class options of the standard LaTeX classes is
provided as well.
- * New user options 'LaTeX-default-author',
- 'LaTeX-fontspec-arg-font-search',
- 'LaTeX-fontspec-font-list-default', 'TeX-date-format', and
- 'TeX-insert-braces-alist'. A new possible value
- ('show-all-optional-args') for 'TeX-insert-macro-default-style' was
- added. The default value of 'TeX-source-correlate-method' has been
+ • New user options ‘LaTeX-default-author’,
+ ‘LaTeX-fontspec-arg-font-search’,
+ ‘LaTeX-fontspec-font-list-default’, ‘TeX-date-format’, and
+ ‘TeX-insert-braces-alist’. A new possible value
+ (‘show-all-optional-args’) for ‘TeX-insert-macro-default-style’ was
+ added. The default value of ‘TeX-source-correlate-method’ has been
changed.
- * 'biblatex' support was greatly expanded. If parsing is enabled,
- AUCTeX looks at 'backend' option to decide whether to use Biber or
- BibTeX. The 'LaTeX-biblatex-use-Biber' variable was changed to be
+ • ‘biblatex’ support was greatly expanded. If parsing is enabled,
+ AUCTeX looks at ‘backend’ option to decide whether to use Biber or
+ BibTeX. The ‘LaTeX-biblatex-use-Biber’ variable was changed to be
file local only and is no more customizable.
- * With some LaTeX classes, the default environment suggested by
- 'LaTeX-environment' ('C-c C-e') when the current environment is
- 'document' was changed. With 'beamer' class the default
- environment is 'frame', with 'letter' it is 'letter', with 'slides'
- it is 'slide'.
+ • With some LaTeX classes, the default environment suggested by
+ ‘LaTeX-environment’ (‘C-c C-e’) when the current environment is
+ ‘document’ was changed. With ‘beamer’ class the default
+ environment is ‘frame’, with ‘letter’ it is ‘letter’, with ‘slides’
+ it is ‘slide’.
- * Brace pairing feature was enhanced in LaTeX documents. Support for
- '\bigl', '\Bigl', '\biggl' and '\Biggl', the same as the one for
- '\left', was added to 'TeX-insert-macro'. For example, 'C-c <RET>
- bigl <RET> ( <RET>' inserts '\bigl(\bigr)'.
+ • Brace pairing feature was enhanced in LaTeX documents. Support for
+ ‘\bigl’, ‘\Bigl’, ‘\biggl’ and ‘\Biggl’, the same as the one for
+ ‘\left’, was added to ‘TeX-insert-macro’. For example, ‘C-c <RET>
+ bigl <RET> ( <RET>’ inserts ‘\bigl(\bigr)’.
- You can insert brace pair '()', '{}' and '[]' by typing a single
- left brace if the new user option 'LaTeX-electric-left-right-brace'
+ You can insert brace pair ‘()’, ‘{}’ and ‘[]’ by typing a single
+ left brace if the new user option ‘LaTeX-electric-left-right-brace’
is enabled.
- Macros '\langle', '\lfloor' and '\lceil', which produce the left
- part of the paired braces, are treated similarly as '(', '{' and
- '[' during the course of 'TeX-insert-macro'. *Note Quotes::, for
+ Macros ‘\langle’, ‘\lfloor’ and ‘\lceil’, which produce the left
+ part of the paired braces, are treated similarly as ‘(’, ‘{’ and
+ ‘[’ during the course of ‘TeX-insert-macro’. *Note Quotes::, for
details.
- * Support for dozens of LaTeX packages was added.
+ • Support for dozens of LaTeX packages was added.
- * Tabular-like environments ('tabular', 'tabular*', 'tabularx',
- 'tabulary', 'array', 'align', ...) are indented in a nicer and
+ • Tabular-like environments (‘tabular’, ‘tabular*’, ‘tabularx’,
+ ‘tabulary’, ‘array’, ‘align’, ...) are indented in a nicer and
more informative way when the column values of a table line are
written across multiple lines in the tex file.
- * The suitable number of ampersands are inserted when you insert
- 'array', 'tabular' and 'tabular*' environments with 'C-c C-e'.
+ • The suitable number of ampersands are inserted when you insert
+ ‘array’, ‘tabular’ and ‘tabular*’ environments with ‘C-c C-e’.
Similar experience is obtained if you terminate rows in these
- environments with 'C-c <LFD>'. It supplies line break macro '\\'
+ environments with ‘C-c <LFD>’. It supplies line break macro ‘\\’
and inserts the suitable number of ampersands on the next line.
- Similar supports are provided for various 'amsmath' environments.
+ Similar supports are provided for various ‘amsmath’ environments.
*Note Tabular-like::, for details.
- * Commands for narrowing to a group ('TeX-narrow-to-group') and to
- LaTeX environments ('LaTeX-narrow-to-environment') were added.
+ • Commands for narrowing to a group (‘TeX-narrow-to-group’) and to
+ LaTeX environments (‘LaTeX-narrow-to-environment’) were added.
- * Now arbitrary options can be passed to the TeX processor on a per
- file basis using the 'TeX-command-extra-options' option. *Note
+ • Now arbitrary options can be passed to the TeX processor on a per
+ file basis using the ‘TeX-command-extra-options’ option. *Note
Processor Options::, for details.
- * Now 'C-c C-e document <RET>', in an empty document, prompts for
- '\usepackage' macros in addition to '\documentclass'.
+ • Now ‘C-c C-e document <RET>’, in an empty document, prompts for
+ ‘\usepackage’ macros in addition to ‘\documentclass’.
- * 'TeX-add-style-hook' has now a third argument to tell AUCTeX for
+ • ‘TeX-add-style-hook’ has now a third argument to tell AUCTeX for
which dialect (LaTeX, Texinfo or BibTeX) the style hook is
registers. Labelling style hook by dialect will avoid applying
them not in the right context.
- * There have been lots of bug fixes and feature additions.
+ • There have been lots of bug fixes and feature additions.
News in 11.87
-------------
- * AUCTeX now supports Biber in conjunction with biblatex in addition
+ • AUCTeX now supports Biber in conjunction with biblatex in addition
to BibTeX.
- * Each AUCTeX mode now has its own abbrev table. On Emacsen which
+ • Each AUCTeX mode now has its own abbrev table. On Emacsen which
provide the possibility to inherit abbrevs from other tables, the
abbrevs from the Text mode abbrev table are available as well.
Newly defined abbrevs are written to the mode-specific tables,
though.
- * The file 'tex-fptex.el' was removed.
+ • The file ‘tex-fptex.el’ was removed.
- * Forward/backward search for Evince has been improved. If Emacs is
+ • Forward/backward search for Evince has been improved. If Emacs is
compiled with DBUS support and a recent Evince version (3.x) is
installed, the communication goes over the desktop bus instead of
the command line, resulting in more accurate positioning of point
in Emacs and highlighting of the target paragraph in Evince.
- * A problem where Ghostscript threw an '/invalidfileaccess' error
+ • A problem where Ghostscript threw an ‘/invalidfileaccess’ error
when running preview-latex was fixed.
- * A lot of smaller fixes and additions have been made.
+ • A lot of smaller fixes and additions have been made.
News in 11.86
-------------
- * Parsing of LaTeX output was improved. It is now less likely that
- AUCTeX opens a non-existent file upon calling 'TeX-next-error'; a
+ • Parsing of LaTeX output was improved. It is now less likely that
+ AUCTeX opens a non-existent file upon calling ‘TeX-next-error’; a
problem for example encountered when using MiKTeX 2.8. In addition
quoted file names as emitted by MiKTeX are now supported.
- * A new framework for the definition and selection of viewers was
+ • A new framework for the definition and selection of viewers was
implemented. If you have customizations regarding viewers you will
have to redo them in this new framework or reenable the old one.
*Note Starting Viewers::, for details.
- * Comprehensive editing support for PSTricks was added.
+ • Comprehensive editing support for PSTricks was added.
- * Support for various LaTeX packages was added, e.g. 'tabularx',
- 'CJK', and 'hyperref'.
+ • Support for various LaTeX packages was added, e.g. ‘tabularx’,
+ ‘CJK’, and ‘hyperref’.
- * An easy way to switch between TeX engines (PDFTeX, LuaTeX, XeTeX,
+ • An easy way to switch between TeX engines (PDFTeX, LuaTeX, XeTeX,
Omega) was added.
- * Support for SyncTeX was added. This involves the command line
+ • Support for SyncTeX was added. This involves the command line
options for LaTeX and the viewer.
- * Folding can now be customized to use macro arguments as replacement
+ • Folding can now be customized to use macro arguments as replacement
text.
- * 'preview.sty' now works with XeTeX.
+ • ‘preview.sty’ now works with XeTeX.
- * A lot of smaller and larger bugs have been squashed.
+ • A lot of smaller and larger bugs have been squashed.
News in 11.85
-------------
- * Font locking has been improved significantly. It is now less prone
+ • Font locking has been improved significantly. It is now less prone
to color bleeding which could lead to high resource usage. In
addition it now includes information about LaTeX macro syntax and
can indicate syntactically incorrect macros in LaTeX mode.
- * The license was updated to GPLv3.
+ • The license was updated to GPLv3.
- * Support for the nomencl, flashcards and comment LaTeX packages as
+ • Support for the nomencl, flashcards and comment LaTeX packages as
well as the Icelandic language option of babel were added.
- * Support for folding of math macros was added.
+ • Support for folding of math macros was added.
- * Lots of minor bugs in features and documentation fixed.
+ • Lots of minor bugs in features and documentation fixed.
News in 11.84
-------------
- * There have been problems with the '-without-texmf-dir' option to
- 'configure' when the value of '-with-kpathsea-sep' was set or
+ • There have been problems with the ‘-without-texmf-dir’ option to
+ ‘configure’ when the value of ‘-with-kpathsea-sep’ was set or
determined for an installation system with a default different from
- that of the runtime system. 'with-kpathsea-sep' has been removed;
+ that of the runtime system. ‘with-kpathsea-sep’ has been removed;
the setting is now usually determined at runtime.
Due to this and other problems, preview-latex in the released
XEmacs package failed under Windows or with anything except recent
21.5 XEmacsen.
- * AUCTeX and preview-latex have been changed in order to accommodate
+ • AUCTeX and preview-latex have been changed in order to accommodate
file names containing spaces. preview-latex now tolerates bad
PostScript code polluting the stack (like some Omega fonts).
- * 'preview.sty' had in some cases failed to emit PostScript header
+ • ‘preview.sty’ had in some cases failed to emit PostScript header
specials.
- * Support for folding of comments was added.
+ • Support for folding of comments was added.
- * The 'polish' language option of the babel LaTeX package as well as
+ • The ‘polish’ language option of the babel LaTeX package as well as
the polski LaTeX package are now supported. Most notably this
means that AUCTeX will help to insert quotation marks as defined by
- 'polish.sty' ('"`..."'') and 'polski.sty' (',,...''').
+ ‘polish.sty’ (‘"`..."'’) and ‘polski.sty’ (‘,,...''’).
- * The TeX tool bar is now available and enabled by default in plain
+ • The TeX tool bar is now available and enabled by default in plain
TeX mode. *Note Processing Facilities::.
- * Bug fix in the display of math subscripts and superscripts.
+ • Bug fix in the display of math subscripts and superscripts.
- * Bug fix 'TeX-doc' for Emacs 21.
+ • Bug fix ‘TeX-doc’ for Emacs 21.
- * There has been quite a number of other bug fixes to various
+ • There has been quite a number of other bug fixes to various
features and documentation across the board.
News in 11.83
-------------
- * The new function 'TeX-doc' provides easy access to documentation
+ • The new function ‘TeX-doc’ provides easy access to documentation
about commands and packages or information related to TeX and
friends in general. *Note Documentation::.
- * You can now get rid of generated intermediate and output files by
- means of the new 'Clean' and 'Clean All' entries in
- 'TeX-command-list' accessible with 'C-c C-c' or the Command menu.
+ • You can now get rid of generated intermediate and output files by
+ means of the new ‘Clean’ and ‘Clean All’ entries in
+ ‘TeX-command-list’ accessible with ‘C-c C-c’ or the Command menu.
*Note Cleaning::.
- * Support for forward search with PDF files was added. That means
+ • Support for forward search with PDF files was added. That means
you can jump to a place in the output file corresponding to the
position in the source file. *Note Viewing::.
Adding support for this feature required the default value of the
- variable 'TeX-output-view-style' to be changed. Please make sure
+ variable ‘TeX-output-view-style’ to be changed. Please make sure
you either remove any customizations overriding the new default or
incorporate the changes into your customizations if you want to use
this feature.
- * TeX error messages of the '-file-line-error' kind are now
+ • TeX error messages of the ‘-file-line-error’ kind are now
understood in AUCTeX and preview-latex (parsers are still
separate).
- * Bug fix in XyMTeX support.
+ • Bug fix in XyMTeX support.
- * The LaTeX tool bar is now enabled by default. *Note Processing
+ • The LaTeX tool bar is now enabled by default. *Note Processing
Facilities::.
News in 11.82
-------------
- * Support for the MinionPro LaTeX package was added.
+ • Support for the MinionPro LaTeX package was added.
- * Warnings and underfull/overfull boxes are now being indicated in
+ • Warnings and underfull/overfull boxes are now being indicated in
the echo area after a LaTeX run, if the respective debugging
- options are activated with 'TeX-toggle-debug-warnings' ('C-c C-t
- C-w') or 'TeX-toggle-debug-bad-boxes' ('C-c C-t C-b'). In this
- case 'TeX-next-error' will find these warnings in addition to
+ options are activated with ‘TeX-toggle-debug-warnings’ (‘C-c C-t
+ C-w’) or ‘TeX-toggle-debug-bad-boxes’ (‘C-c C-t C-b’). In this
+ case ‘TeX-next-error’ will find these warnings in addition to
normal errors.
- The key binding 'C-c C-w' for 'TeX-toggle-debug-bad-boxes' (which
- was renamed from 'TeX-toggle-debug-boxes') now is deprecated.
+ The key binding ‘C-c C-w’ for ‘TeX-toggle-debug-bad-boxes’ (which
+ was renamed from ‘TeX-toggle-debug-boxes’) now is deprecated.
- * AUCTeX now can automatically insert a pair of braces after typing
+ • AUCTeX now can automatically insert a pair of braces after typing
<_> or <^> in math constructs if the new variable
- 'TeX-electric-sub-and-superscript' is set to a non-nil value.
+ ‘TeX-electric-sub-and-superscript’ is set to a non-nil value.
- * Some language-specific support for French was added. There now is
- completion support for the commands provided by the 'frenchb' (and
- 'francais') options of the babel LaTeX package and easier input of
- French quotation marks ('\og ...\fg') which can now be inserted by
+ • Some language-specific support for French was added. There now is
+ completion support for the commands provided by the ‘frenchb’ (and
+ ‘francais’) options of the babel LaTeX package and easier input of
+ French quotation marks (‘\og ...\fg’) which can now be inserted by
typing <">.
- * Completion support for options of some LaTeX packages was added.
+ • Completion support for options of some LaTeX packages was added.
- * Already in version 11.81 the way to activate AUCTeX changed
- substantially. This should now be done with '(load "auctex.el" nil
- t t)' instead of the former '(require 'tex-site)'. Related to this
- change 'tex-mik.el' does not load 'tex-site.el' anymore. That
- means if you used only '(require 'tex-mik)' in order to activate
- AUCTeX, you have to add '(load "auctex.el" nil t t)' before the
+ • Already in version 11.81 the way to activate AUCTeX changed
+ substantially. This should now be done with ‘(load "auctex.el" nil
+ t t)’ instead of the former ‘(require 'tex-site)’. Related to this
+ change ‘tex-mik.el’ does not load ‘tex-site.el’ anymore. That
+ means if you used only ‘(require 'tex-mik)’ in order to activate
+ AUCTeX, you have to add ‘(load "auctex.el" nil t t)’ before the
latter statement. *Note Loading the package::.
- * Handling of verbatim constructs was consolidated across AUCTeX.
+ • Handling of verbatim constructs was consolidated across AUCTeX.
This resulted in the font-latex-specific variables
- 'font-latex-verb-like-commands', 'font-latex-verbatim-macros', and
- 'font-latex-verbatim-environments' being removed and the more
- general variables 'LaTeX-verbatim-macros-with-delims',
- 'LaTeX-verbatim-macros-with-braces', and
- 'LaTeX-verbatim-environments' being added.
+ ‘font-latex-verb-like-commands’, ‘font-latex-verbatim-macros’, and
+ ‘font-latex-verbatim-environments’ being removed and the more
+ general variables ‘LaTeX-verbatim-macros-with-delims’,
+ ‘LaTeX-verbatim-macros-with-braces’, and
+ ‘LaTeX-verbatim-environments’ being added.
- * The output of a BibTeX run is now checked for warnings and errors,
+ • The output of a BibTeX run is now checked for warnings and errors,
which are reported in the echo area.
- * The aliases for 'font-latex-title-fontify' were removed. Use
- 'font-latex-fontify-sectioning' instead.
+ • The aliases for ‘font-latex-title-fontify’ were removed. Use
+ ‘font-latex-fontify-sectioning’ instead.
- * The problem that Japanese macros where broken across lines was
+ • The problem that Japanese macros where broken across lines was
fixed.
- * Various bug fixes.
+ • Various bug fixes.
News in 11.81
-------------
- * 'LaTeX-mark-section' now marks subsections of a given section as
+ • ‘LaTeX-mark-section’ now marks subsections of a given section as
well. The former behavior is available via the prefix argument.
- * preview-latex which was previously available separately became a
+ • preview-latex which was previously available separately became a
subsystem of AUCTeX. There is no documented provision for building
or installing preview-latex separately. It is still possible to
use and install AUCTeX without preview-latex, however.
- * The installation procedures have been overhauled and now also
+ • The installation procedures have been overhauled and now also
install startup files as part of the process (those had to be
copied manually previously). You are advised to remove previous
installations of AUCTeX and preview-latex before starting the
@@ -7558,220 +7608,220 @@ News in 11.81
tarball no longer requires Makeinfo or Perl.
Also note that the way AUCTeX is supposed to be activated changed.
- Instead of '(require 'tex-site)' you should now use '(load
- "auctex.el" nil t t)'. While the former method may still work, the
+ Instead of ‘(require 'tex-site)’ you should now use ‘(load
+ "auctex.el" nil t t)’. While the former method may still work, the
new method has the advantage that you can deactivate a preactivated
- AUCTeX with the statement '(unload-feature 'tex-site)' before any
+ AUCTeX with the statement ‘(unload-feature 'tex-site)’ before any
of its modes have been used. This may be important especially for
site-wide installations.
- * Support for the babel LaTeX package was added.
+ • Support for the babel LaTeX package was added.
- * Folding a buffer now ensures that the whole buffer is fontified
+ • Folding a buffer now ensures that the whole buffer is fontified
before the actual folding is carried out. If this results in
unbearably long execution times, you can fall back to the old
behavior of relying on stealth font locking to do this job in the
- background by customizing the variable 'TeX-fold-force-fontify'.
+ background by customizing the variable ‘TeX-fold-force-fontify’.
- * Folded content now reveals part of its original text in a tooltip
+ • Folded content now reveals part of its original text in a tooltip
or the echo area when hovering with the mouse pointer over it.
- * The language-specific insertion of quotation marks was generalized.
- The variables 'LaTeX-german-open-quote',
- 'LaTeX-german-close-quote', 'LaTeX-german-quote-after-quote',
- 'LaTeX-italian-open-quote', 'LaTeX-italian-close-quote', and
- 'LaTeX-italian-quote-after-quote' are now obsolete. If you are not
+ • The language-specific insertion of quotation marks was generalized.
+ The variables ‘LaTeX-german-open-quote’,
+ ‘LaTeX-german-close-quote’, ‘LaTeX-german-quote-after-quote’,
+ ‘LaTeX-italian-open-quote’, ‘LaTeX-italian-close-quote’, and
+ ‘LaTeX-italian-quote-after-quote’ are now obsolete. If you are not
satisfied with the default settings, you should customize
- 'TeX-quote-language-alist' instead.
+ ‘TeX-quote-language-alist’ instead.
- * Similar to language-specific quote insertion, AUCTeX now helps you
+ • Similar to language-specific quote insertion, AUCTeX now helps you
with hyphens in different languages as well. *Note European::, for
details.
- * Fill problems in Japanese text introduced in AUCTeX 11.55 were
+ • Fill problems in Japanese text introduced in AUCTeX 11.55 were
fixed. AUCTeX tries not to break lines between 1-byte and 2-byte
chars. These features will work in Chinese text, too.
- * The scaling factor of the fontification of sectioning commands can
+ • The scaling factor of the fontification of sectioning commands can
now be customized using the variable
- 'font-latex-fontify-sectioning'. This variable was previously
- called 'font-latex-title-fontify'; In this release we provide an
+ ‘font-latex-fontify-sectioning’. This variable was previously
+ called ‘font-latex-title-fontify’; In this release we provide an
alias but this will disappear in one of the the next releases. The
faces for the sectioning commands are now called
- 'font-latex-sectioning-N-face' (N=0...5) instead of
- 'font-latex-title-N-face' (N=1...4). Analogously the names of the
+ ‘font-latex-sectioning-N-face’ (N=0...5) instead of
+ ‘font-latex-title-N-face’ (N=1...4). Analogously the names of the
variables holding the related keyword lists were changed from
- 'font-latex-title-N-keywords' to
- 'font-latex-sectioning-N-keywords'. *Note Font Locking::, for
+ ‘font-latex-title-N-keywords’ to
+ ‘font-latex-sectioning-N-keywords’. *Note Font Locking::, for
details. Make sure to adjust your customizations.
- * Titles in beamer slides marked by the "\frametitle" command are
- know displayed with the new face 'font-latex-slide-title-face'.
+ • Titles in beamer slides marked by the “\frametitle” command are
+ know displayed with the new face ‘font-latex-slide-title-face’.
You can add macros to be highlighted with this face to
- 'font-latex-match-slide-title-keywords'.
+ ‘font-latex-match-slide-title-keywords’.
- * Of course a lot of bugs have been fixed.
+ • Of course a lot of bugs have been fixed.
News in 11.55
-------------
- * A bug was fixed which lead to the insertion of trailing whitespace
+ • A bug was fixed which lead to the insertion of trailing whitespace
during filling. In particular extra spaces were added to sentence
endings at the end of lines. You can make this whitespace visible
- by setting the variable 'show-trailing-whitespace' to 't'. If you
- want to delete all trailing whitespace in a buffer, type 'M-x
- delete-trailing-whitespace <RET>'.
+ by setting the variable ‘show-trailing-whitespace’ to ‘t’. If you
+ want to delete all trailing whitespace in a buffer, type ‘M-x
+ delete-trailing-whitespace <RET>’.
- * A bug was fixed which lead to a '*Compile-Log*' buffer popping up
+ • A bug was fixed which lead to a ‘*Compile-Log*’ buffer popping up
when the first LaTeX file was loaded in an Emacs session.
- * On some systems the presence of an outdated Emacspeak package lead
- to the error message 'File mode specification error: (error
- "Variable binding depth exceeds max-specpdl-size")'. Precautions
+ • On some systems the presence of an outdated Emacspeak package lead
+ to the error message ‘File mode specification error: (error
+ "Variable binding depth exceeds max-specpdl-size")’. Precautions
were added which prevent this error from happening. But
nevertheless, it is advised to upgrade or uninstall the outdated
Emacspeak package.
- * The value of 'TeX-macro-global' is not determined during
+ • The value of ‘TeX-macro-global’ is not determined during
configuration anymore but at load time of AUCTeX. Consequently the
- associated configuration option '--with-tex-input-dirs' was
+ associated configuration option ‘--with-tex-input-dirs’ was
removed.
- * Support for the LaTeX Japanese classes 'jsarticle' and 'jsbook' was
+ • Support for the LaTeX Japanese classes ‘jsarticle’ and ‘jsbook’ was
added.
News in 11.54
-------------
- * The parser (used e.g. for 'TeX-auto-generate-global') was extended
+ • The parser (used e.g. for ‘TeX-auto-generate-global’) was extended
to recognize keywords common in LaTeX packages and classes, like
- "\DeclareRobustCommand" or "\RequirePackage". Additionally a bug
+ “\DeclareRobustCommand” or “\RequirePackage”. Additionally a bug
was fixed which led to duplicate entries in AUCTeX style files.
- * Folding can now be done for paragraphs and regions besides single
- constructs and the whole buffer. With the new 'TeX-fold-dwim'
+ • Folding can now be done for paragraphs and regions besides single
+ constructs and the whole buffer. With the new ‘TeX-fold-dwim’
command content can both be hidden and shown with a single key
binding. In course of these changes new key bindings for unfolding
commands where introduced. The old bindings are still present but
will be phased out in future releases.
- * Info files of the manual now have a .info extension.
+ • Info files of the manual now have a .info extension.
- * There is an experimental tool bar support now. It is not activated
+ • There is an experimental tool bar support now. It is not activated
by default. If you want to use it, add
(add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook 'LaTeX-install-toolbar)
to your init file.
- * The manual now contains a new chapter "Quick Start". It explains
+ • The manual now contains a new chapter “Quick Start”. It explains
the main features and how to use them, and should be enough for a
new user to start using AUCTeX.
- * A new section "Font Locking" was added to the manual which explains
+ • A new section “Font Locking” was added to the manual which explains
syntax highlighting in AUCTeX and its customization. Together with
the sections related to folding and outlining, the section is part
- of the new chapter "Display".
+ of the new chapter “Display”.
- * Keywords for syntax highlighting of LaTeX constructs to be typeset
+ • Keywords for syntax highlighting of LaTeX constructs to be typeset
in bold, italic or typewriter fonts may now be customized. Besides
the built-in classes, new keyword classes may be added by
- customizing the variable 'font-latex-user-keyword-classes'. The
+ customizing the variable ‘font-latex-user-keyword-classes’. The
customization options can be found in the customization group
- 'font-latex-keywords'.
+ ‘font-latex-keywords’.
- * Verbatim content is now displayed with the 'fixed-pitch' face.
+ • Verbatim content is now displayed with the ‘fixed-pitch’ face.
(GNU Emacs only)
- * Syntax highlighting should not spill out of verbatim content
+ • Syntax highlighting should not spill out of verbatim content
anymore. (GNU Emacs only)
- * Verbatim commands like '\verb|...|' will not be broken anymore
+ • Verbatim commands like ‘\verb|...|’ will not be broken anymore
during filling.
- * You can customize the completion for graphic files with
- 'LaTeX-includegraphics-read-file'.
+ • You can customize the completion for graphic files with
+ ‘LaTeX-includegraphics-read-file’.
- * Support for the LaTeX packages 'url', 'listings', 'jurabib' and
- 'csquotes' was added with regard to command completion and syntax
+ • Support for the LaTeX packages ‘url’, ‘listings’, ‘jurabib’ and
+ ‘csquotes’ was added with regard to command completion and syntax
highlighting.
- * Performance of fontification and filling was improved.
+ • Performance of fontification and filling was improved.
- * Insertion of nodes in Texinfo mode now supports completion of
+ • Insertion of nodes in Texinfo mode now supports completion of
existing node names.
- * Setting the variable 'LaTeX-float' to 'nil' now means that you will
+ • Setting the variable ‘LaTeX-float’ to ‘nil’ now means that you will
not be prompted for the float position of figures and tables. You
- can get the old behaviour of 'nil' by setting the variable to '""',
+ can get the old behaviour of ‘nil’ by setting the variable to ‘""’,
i.e. an empty string. See also *note Floats::.
- * The XEmacs-specific bug concerning 'overlays-at' was fixed.
+ • The XEmacs-specific bug concerning ‘overlays-at’ was fixed.
- * Lots of bug fixes.
+ • Lots of bug fixes.
News in 11.53
-------------
- * The LaTeX math menu can include Unicode characters if your Emacs
- built supports it. See the variable 'LaTeX-math-menu-unicode',
+ • The LaTeX math menu can include Unicode characters if your Emacs
+ built supports it. See the variable ‘LaTeX-math-menu-unicode’,
*note Mathematics::.
- * Bug fixes for XEmacs.
+ • Bug fixes for XEmacs.
- * Completion for graphic files in the TeX search path has been added.
+ • Completion for graphic files in the TeX search path has been added.
- * 'start' is used for the viewer for MiKTeX and fpTeX.
+ • ‘start’ is used for the viewer for MiKTeX and fpTeX.
- * The variable 'TeX-fold-preserve-comments' can now be customized to
+ • The variable ‘TeX-fold-preserve-comments’ can now be customized to
deactivate folding in comments.
News in 11.52
-------------
- * Installation and menus under XEmacs work again (maybe for the first
+ • Installation and menus under XEmacs work again (maybe for the first
time).
- * Fontification of subscripts and superscripts is now disabled when
+ • Fontification of subscripts and superscripts is now disabled when
the fontification engine is not able to support it properly.
- * Bug fixes in the build process.
+ • Bug fixes in the build process.
News in 11.51
-------------
- * PDFTeX and Source Special support did not work with ConTeXt, this
+ • PDFTeX and Source Special support did not work with ConTeXt, this
has been fixed. Similar for Source Special support under Windows.
- * Omega support has been added.
+ • Omega support has been added.
- * Bug fixes in the build process.
+ • Bug fixes in the build process.
- * 'TeX-fold' now supports folding of environments in Texinfo mode.
+ • ‘TeX-fold’ now supports folding of environments in Texinfo mode.
News in 11.50
-------------
- * The use of source specials when processing or viewing the document
- can now be controlled with the new 'TeX-source-specials' minor mode
+ • The use of source specials when processing or viewing the document
+ can now be controlled with the new ‘TeX-source-specials’ minor mode
which can be toggled via an entry in the Command menu or the key
- binding 'C-c C-t C-s'. If you have customized the variable
- 'TeX-command-list', you have to re-initialize it for this to work.
+ binding ‘C-c C-t C-s’. If you have customized the variable
+ ‘TeX-command-list’, you have to re-initialize it for this to work.
This means to open a customization buffer for the variable by
- typing 'M-x customize-variable <RET> TeX-command-list <RET>',
- selecting "Erase Customization" and do your customization again
+ typing ‘M-x customize-variable <RET> TeX-command-list <RET>’,
+ selecting “Erase Customization” and do your customization again
with the new default.
- * The content of the command menu now depends on the mode (plain TeX,
+ • The content of the command menu now depends on the mode (plain TeX,
LaTeX, ConTeXt etc.). Any former customization of the variable
- 'TeX-command-list' has to be erased. Otherwise the command menu
+ ‘TeX-command-list’ has to be erased. Otherwise the command menu
and the customization will not work correctly.
- * Support for hiding and auto-revealing macros, e.g. footnotes or
+ • Support for hiding and auto-revealing macros, e.g. footnotes or
citations, and environments in a buffer was added, *note Folding::.
- * You can now control if indentation is done upon typing <RET> by
- customizing the variable 'TeX-newline-function', *note Indenting::.
+ • You can now control if indentation is done upon typing <RET> by
+ customizing the variable ‘TeX-newline-function’, *note Indenting::.
- * Limited support for 'doc.sty' and 'ltxdoc.cls' ('dtx' files) was
+ • Limited support for ‘doc.sty’ and ‘ltxdoc.cls’ (‘dtx’ files) was
added. The new docTeX mode provides functionality for editing
documentation parts. This includes formatting (indenting and
filling), adding and completion of macros and environments while
@@ -7779,87 +7829,87 @@ News in 11.50
that the mode is not finished yet. For example syntax highlighting
does not work yet in XEmacs.)
- * For macro completion in docTeX mode the AUCTeX style files
- 'doc.el', 'ltxdoc.el' and 'ltx-base.el' were included. The latter
+ • For macro completion in docTeX mode the AUCTeX style files
+ ‘doc.el’, ‘ltxdoc.el’ and ‘ltx-base.el’ were included. The latter
provides general support for low-level LaTeX macros and may be used
with LaTeX class and style files as well. It is currently not
loaded automatically for those files.
- * Support for ConTeXt with a separate ConTeXt mode is now included.
+ • Support for ConTeXt with a separate ConTeXt mode is now included.
Macro definitions for completion are available in Dutch and
English.
- * The filling and indentation code was overhauled and is now able to
+ • The filling and indentation code was overhauled and is now able to
format commented parts of the source syntactically correct. Newly
available functionality and customization options are explained in
the manual.
- * Filling and indentation in XEmacs with preview-latex and activated
+ • Filling and indentation in XEmacs with preview-latex and activated
previews lead to the insertion of whitespace before multi-line
previews. AUCTeX now contains facilities to prevent this problem.
- * If 'TeX-master' is set to 't', AUCTeX will now query for a master
+ • If ‘TeX-master’ is set to ‘t’, AUCTeX will now query for a master
file only when a new file is opened. Existing files will be left
- alone. The new function 'TeX-master-file-ask' (bound to 'C-c _' is
+ alone. The new function ‘TeX-master-file-ask’ (bound to ‘C-c _’ is
provided for adding the variable manually.
- * Sectioning commands are now shown in a larger font on display
+ • Sectioning commands are now shown in a larger font on display
devices which support such fontification. The variable
- 'font-latex-title-fontify' can be customized to restore the old
+ ‘font-latex-title-fontify’ can be customized to restore the old
appearance, i.e. the usage of a different color instead of a change
in size.
- * Support for 'alphanum.sty', 'beamer.cls', 'booktabs.sty',
- 'captcont.sty', 'emp.sty', 'paralist.sty', 'subfigure.sty' and
- 'units.sty'/'nicefrac.sty' was added. Credits go to the authors
+ • Support for ‘alphanum.sty’, ‘beamer.cls’, ‘booktabs.sty’,
+ ‘captcont.sty’, ‘emp.sty’, ‘paralist.sty’, ‘subfigure.sty’ and
+ ‘units.sty’/‘nicefrac.sty’ was added. Credits go to the authors
mentioned in the respective AUCTeX style files.
- * Inserting graphics with 'C-c <RET> includegraphics <RET>' was
- improved. See the variable 'LaTeX-includegraphics-options-alist'.
+ • Inserting graphics with ‘C-c <RET> includegraphics <RET>’ was
+ improved. See the variable ‘LaTeX-includegraphics-options-alist’.
- * If 'LaTeX-default-position' is 'nil', don't prompt for position
+ • If ‘LaTeX-default-position’ is ‘nil’, don’t prompt for position
arguments in Tabular-like environments, see *note Tabular-like::.
- * Completion for available packages when using 'C-c <RET> usepackage
- <RET>' was improved on systems using the kpathsea library.
+ • Completion for available packages when using ‘C-c <RET> usepackage
+ <RET>’ was improved on systems using the kpathsea library.
- * The commenting functionality was fixed. The separate functions for
+ • The commenting functionality was fixed. The separate functions for
commenting and uncommenting were unified in one function for
paragraphs and regions respectively which do both.
- * Syntax highlighting can be customized to fontify quotes delimited
+ • Syntax highlighting can be customized to fontify quotes delimited
by either >>German<< or <<French>> quotation marks by changing the
- variable 'font-latex-quotes'.
+ variable ‘font-latex-quotes’.
- * Certain TeX/LaTeX keywords for functions, references, variables and
+ • Certain TeX/LaTeX keywords for functions, references, variables and
warnings will now be fontified specially. You may add your own
keywords by customizing the variables
- 'font-latex-match-function-keywords',
- 'font-latex-match-reference-keywords',
- 'font-latex-match-variable-keywords' and
- 'font-latex-match-warning-keywords'.
-
- * If you include the style files 'german' or 'ngerman' in a document
- (directly or via the 'babel' package), you should now customize
- 'LaTeX-german-open-quote', 'LaTeX-german-close-quote' and
- 'LaTeX-german-quote-after-quote' instead of 'TeX-open-quote',
- 'TeX-close-quote' and 'TeX-quote-after-quote' if you want to
+ ‘font-latex-match-function-keywords’,
+ ‘font-latex-match-reference-keywords’,
+ ‘font-latex-match-variable-keywords’ and
+ ‘font-latex-match-warning-keywords’.
+
+ • If you include the style files ‘german’ or ‘ngerman’ in a document
+ (directly or via the ‘babel’ package), you should now customize
+ ‘LaTeX-german-open-quote’, ‘LaTeX-german-close-quote’ and
+ ‘LaTeX-german-quote-after-quote’ instead of ‘TeX-open-quote’,
+ ‘TeX-close-quote’ and ‘TeX-quote-after-quote’ if you want to
influence the type of quote insertion.
- * Upon viewing an output file, the right viewer and command line
+ • Upon viewing an output file, the right viewer and command line
options for it are now determined automatically by looking at the
extension of the output file and certain options used in the source
file. The behavior can be adapted or extended respectively by
- customizing the variable 'TeX-output-view-style'.
+ customizing the variable ‘TeX-output-view-style’.
- * You can control whether 'TeX-insert-macro' ('C-c <RET>') ask for
+ • You can control whether ‘TeX-insert-macro’ (‘C-c <RET>’) ask for
all optional arguments by customizing the variable
- 'TeX-insert-macro-default-style', *note Completion::.
+ ‘TeX-insert-macro-default-style’, *note Completion::.
- * 'TeX-run-discard' is now able to completely detach a process that
+ • ‘TeX-run-discard’ is now able to completely detach a process that
it started.
- * The build process was enhanced and is now based on 'autoconf'
+ • The build process was enhanced and is now based on ‘autoconf’
making installing AUCTeX a mostly automatic process. See *note
Installation:: and *note Installation under MS Windows:: for
details.
@@ -7867,74 +7917,74 @@ News in 11.50
News in 11.14
-------------
- * Many more LaTeX and LaTeX2e commands are supported. Done by
+ • Many more LaTeX and LaTeX2e commands are supported. Done by
Masayuki Ataka <ataka@milk.freemail.ne.jp>
News in 11.12
-------------
- * Support for the KOMA-Script classes. Contributed by Mark Trettin
+ • Support for the KOMA-Script classes. Contributed by Mark Trettin
<Mark.Trettin@gmx.de>.
News in 11.11
-------------
- * Support for 'prosper.sty', see <http://prosper.sourceforge.net/>.
+ • Support for ‘prosper.sty’, see <http://prosper.sourceforge.net/>.
Contributed by Phillip Lord <p.lord@russet.org.uk>.
News in 11.10
-------------
- * 'comment-region' now inserts %% by default. Suggested by "Davide
+ • ‘comment-region’ now inserts %% by default. Suggested by "Davide
G. M. Salvetti" <salve@debian.org>>.
News in 11.06
-------------
- * You can now switch between using the 'font-latex' (all emacsen),
- the 'tex-font' (Emacs 21 only) or no special package for font
- locking. Customize 'TeX-install-font-lock' for this.
+ • You can now switch between using the ‘font-latex’ (all emacsen),
+ the ‘tex-font’ (Emacs 21 only) or no special package for font
+ locking. Customize ‘TeX-install-font-lock’ for this.
News in 11.04
-------------
- * Now use -t landscape by default when landscape option appears.
+ • Now use -t landscape by default when landscape option appears.
Suggested by Erik Frisk <frisk@isy.liu.se>.
News in 11.03
-------------
- * Use 'tex-fptex.el' for fpTeX support. Contributed by Fabrice
+ • Use ‘tex-fptex.el’ for fpTeX support. Contributed by Fabrice
Popineau <Fabrice.Popineau@supelec.fr>.
News in 11.02
-------------
- * New user option 'LaTeX-top-caption-list' specifies environments
+ • New user option ‘LaTeX-top-caption-list’ specifies environments
where the caption should go at top. Contributed by
<ataka@milk.freemail.ne.jp> (Masayuki Ataka).
- * Allow explicit dimensions in 'graphicx.sty'. Contributed by
+ • Allow explicit dimensions in ‘graphicx.sty’. Contributed by
<ataka@milk.freemail.ne.jp> (Masayuki Ataka).
- * Limited support for 'verbatim.sty'. Contributed by
+ • Limited support for ‘verbatim.sty’. Contributed by
<ataka@milk.freemail.ne.jp> (Masayuki Ataka).
- * Better support for amsmath items. Patch by
+ • Better support for amsmath items. Patch by
<ataka@milk.freemail.ne.jp> (Masayuki Ataka).
- * More accurate error parsing. Added by David Kastrup
+ • More accurate error parsing. Added by David Kastrup
<David.Kastrup@t-online.de>.
News in 11.01
-------------
- * Bug fixes.
+ • Bug fixes.
Older versions
--------------
-See the file 'history.texi' for older changes.
+See the file ‘history.texi’ for older changes.
File: auctex.info, Node: Development, Next: FAQ, Prev: Changes, Up:
Appendices
@@ -7946,7 +7996,7 @@ The following sections describe future development of
AUCTeX. Besides
mid-term goals, bug reports and requests we cannot fix or honor right
away are being gathered here. If you have some time for Emacs Lisp
hacking, you are encouraged to try to provide a solution to one of the
-following problems. If you don't know Lisp, you may help us to improve
+following problems. If you don’t know Lisp, you may help us to improve
the documentation. It might be a good idea to discuss proposed changes
on the mailing list of AUCTeX first.
@@ -7962,7 +8012,7 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Mid-term Goals, Next:
Wishlist, Up: Development
A.3.1 Mid-term Goals
--------------------
- * Integration of preview-latex into AUCTeX
+ • Integration of preview-latex into AUCTeX
As of AUCTeX 11.81 preview-latex is a part of AUCTeX in the sense
that the installation routines were merged and preview-latex is
@@ -7972,10 +8022,10 @@ A.3.1 Mid-term Goals
folding of error parsing and task management of both packages which
will ease development efforts and avoid redundant work.
- * Error help catalogs
+ • Error help catalogs
Currently, the help for errors is more or less hardwired into
- 'latex.el'. For supporting error help in other languages, it would
+ ‘latex.el’. For supporting error help in other languages, it would
be sensible to instead arrange error messages in language-specific
files, make a common info file from all such catalogs in a given
language and look the error texts up in an appropriate index. The
@@ -7983,49 +8033,49 @@ A.3.1 Mid-term Goals
errors would be looked up in the catalogs in sequence until they
were identified.
- * Combining 'docTeX' with RefTeX
+ • Combining ‘docTeX’ with RefTeX
Macro cross references should also be usable for document
navigation using RefTeX.
- * Fix remove-style feature
+ • Fix remove-style feature
- Currently 'TeX-remove-style' implementation isn't good. It is
+ Currently ‘TeX-remove-style’ implementation isn’t good. It is
common practice that major mode functions directly add macros and
- environments via 'TeX-add-symbols' and 'LaTeX-add-environments',
- but those macros and environments are lost once 'TeX-remove-style'
+ environments via ‘TeX-add-symbols’ and ‘LaTeX-add-environments’,
+ but those macros and environments are lost once ‘TeX-remove-style’
runs. It is necessary to run major mode function, by e.g.
- 'normal-mode', again to recover them, but that makes no point in
- running 'TeX-remove-style' itself because major mode function kills
+ ‘normal-mode’, again to recover them, but that makes no point in
+ running ‘TeX-remove-style’ itself because major mode function kills
all buffer-local variables.
- As of AUCTeX 12.3, 'TeX-remove-style' is no longer used by any
+ As of AUCTeX 12.3, ‘TeX-remove-style’ is no longer used by any
other codes.
- * Factor out syntax propertization from 'font-latex.el'
+ • Factor out syntax propertization from ‘font-latex.el’
- Syntax propertization is implemented in 'font-latex.el'. This
- means that features which depend on syntax parse don't work well
- for 'tex-font.el' users and those who disable font lock.
+ Syntax propertization is implemented in ‘font-latex.el’. This
+ means that features which depend on syntax parse don’t work well
+ for ‘tex-font.el’ users and those who disable font lock.
Hence syntax propertization should be factored out from
- 'font-latex.el' and implemented as a major mode facility.
+ ‘font-latex.el’ and implemented as a major mode facility.
(Texinfo mode is an exception because it already has its own syntax
propertize function, which just copies the one available in Emacs
built-in texinfo mode.)
- * Add documentation
+ • Add documentation
Following entries should be included in the document:
- - Variables 'LaTeX-insert-into-comments',
- 'TeX-translate-location-hook'
+ − Variables ‘LaTeX-insert-into-comments’,
+ ‘TeX-translate-location-hook’
- - How to use 'TeX-auto-add-type', as well as functions and
+ − How to use ‘TeX-auto-add-type’, as well as functions and
variables generated by that macro. They should be covered in
the node *note Hacking the Parser::.
- - Usage of ConTeXt mode
+ − Usage of ConTeXt mode
File: auctex.info, Node: Wishlist, Next: Bugs, Prev: Mid-term Goals, Up:
Development
@@ -8033,120 +8083,120 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Wishlist, Next: Bugs,
Prev: Mid-term Goals, Up: Dev
A.3.2 Wishlist
--------------
- * Enable syntactic font lock for verbatim constructs in 'docTeX' mode
+ • Enable syntactic font lock for verbatim constructs in ‘docTeX’ mode
- In 'docTeX' mode buffer, '%' sign at the line beginning hinders
+ In ‘docTeX’ mode buffer, ‘%’ sign at the line beginning hinders
syntactic font lock of verbatim constructs. This should be
improved.
- * Simplify tool bar implementation
+ • Simplify tool bar implementation
- The library 'toolbar-x.el' was developed as an abstraction layer to
+ The library ‘toolbar-x.el’ was developed as an abstraction layer to
absorb difference between XEmacs and GNU Emacs. Now that XEmacs is
- no longer supported, the library, together with 'tex-bar.el' as a
+ no longer supported, the library, together with ‘tex-bar.el’ as a
whole, can be much simplified (or even unified).
- * Documentation lookup for macros
+ • Documentation lookup for macros
A parser could gather information about which macros are defined in
which LaTeX packages and store the information in a hashtable which
- can be used in a backend for 'TeX-doc' in order to open the
+ can be used in a backend for ‘TeX-doc’ in order to open the
matching documentation for a given macro. The information could
- also be used to insert an appropriate '\usepackage' statement if
+ also be used to insert an appropriate ‘\usepackage’ statement if
the user tries to insert a macro for which the respective package
has not been requested yet.
- * Improvements to error reporting
+ • Improvements to error reporting
Fringe indicators for errors in the main text would be nice.
- * A math entry grid
+ • A math entry grid
A separate frame with a table of math character graphics to click
on in order to insert the respective sequence into the buffer (cf.
- the "grid" of 'x-symbol').
+ the “grid” of ‘x-symbol’).
- * Crossreferencing support
+ • Crossreferencing support
It would be nice if you could index process your favorite
- collection of '.dtx' files (such as the LaTeX source), just call a
+ collection of ‘.dtx’ files (such as the LaTeX source), just call a
command on arbitrary control sequence, and get either the DVI
viewer opened right at the definition of that macro (using Source
- Specials), or the source code of the '.dtx' file.
+ Specials), or the source code of the ‘.dtx’ file.
- * Better plain TeX support
+ • Better plain TeX support
- For starters, 'LaTeX-math-mode' is not very LaTeX-specific in the
+ For starters, ‘LaTeX-math-mode’ is not very LaTeX-specific in the
first place, and similar holds for indentation and formatting.
- * Page count when compiling should (optionally) go to modeline of the
+ • Page count when compiling should (optionally) go to modeline of the
window where the compilation command was invoked, instead of the
output window. Suggested by Karsten Tinnefeld
<tinnefeld@irb.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>.
- * Command to insert a macrodefinition in the preamble, without moving
+ • Command to insert a macrodefinition in the preamble, without moving
point from the current location. Suggested by "Jeffrey C. Ely"
<ely@nwu.edu>.
- * A database of all commands defined in all stylefiles. When a
+ • A database of all commands defined in all stylefiles. When a
command or environment gets entered that is provided in one of the
- styles, insert the appropriate '\usepackage' in the preamble.
+ styles, insert the appropriate ‘\usepackage’ in the preamble.
- * A way to add and overwrite math mode entries in style files, and to
+ • A way to add and overwrite math mode entries in style files, and to
decide where they should be. Suggested by Remo Badii
<Remo.Badii@psi.ch>.
- * Create template for (first) line of tabular environment.
+ • Create template for (first) line of tabular environment.
- * I think prompting for the master is the intended behaviour. It
- corresponds to a 'shared' value for 'TeX-master'.
+ • I think prompting for the master is the intended behaviour. It
+ corresponds to a ‘shared’ value for ‘TeX-master’.
- There should probably be a 'none' value which wouldn't query for
+ There should probably be a ‘none’ value which wouldn’t query for
the master, but instead disable all features that relies on
- 'TeX-master'.
+ ‘TeX-master’.
- This default value for 'TeX-master' could then be controled with
+ This default value for ‘TeX-master’ could then be controled with
mapping based on the extension.
- * Use index files (when available) to speed up 'C-c C-m include
- <RET>'.
+ • Use index files (when available) to speed up ‘C-c C-m include
+ <RET>’.
- * Option not to calculate very slow completions like for 'C-c C-m
- include <RET>'.
+ • Option not to calculate very slow completions like for ‘C-c C-m
+ include <RET>’.
- * Font menu should be created from 'TeX-font-list'.
+ • Font menu should be created from ‘TeX-font-list’.
- * Installation procedure written purely in emacs lisp.
+ • Installation procedure written purely in emacs lisp.
- * Included PostScript files should also be counted as part of the
+ • Included PostScript files should also be counted as part of the
document.
- * A nice hierarchical by-topic organization of all officially
+ • A nice hierarchical by-topic organization of all officially
documented LaTeX macros, available from the menu bar.
- * 'TeX-command-default' should be set from the master file, if not
+ • ‘TeX-command-default’ should be set from the master file, if not
set locally. Suggested by Peter Whaite <peta@cim.mcgill.ca>.
- * Make AUCTeX work with 'crypt++'. Suggested by Chris Moore
+ • Make AUCTeX work with ‘crypt++’. Suggested by Chris Moore
<Chris.Moore@src.bae.co.uk>.
- * Make AUCTeX work with 'longlines'. This would also apply to
+ • Make AUCTeX work with ‘longlines’. This would also apply to
preview-latex, though it might make sense to unify error processing
before attempting this.
- * The 'Spell' command should apply to all files in a document. Maybe
+ • The ‘Spell’ command should apply to all files in a document. Maybe
it could try to restrict to files that have been modified since
last spell check? Suggested by Ravinder Bhumbla
<rbhumbla@ucsd.edu>.
- * Make <.> check for abbreviations and sentences ending with capital
+ • Make <.> check for abbreviations and sentences ending with capital
letters.
- * Use Emacs 19 minibuffer history to choose between previewers, and
+ • Use Emacs 19 minibuffer history to choose between previewers, and
other stuff. Suggested by John Interrante
<interran@uluru.Stanford.EDU>.
- * Documentation of variables that can be set in a style hook.
+ • Documentation of variables that can be set in a style hook.
We need a list of what can safely be done in an ordinary style
hook. You can not set a variable that AUCTeX depends on, unless
@@ -8154,44 +8204,44 @@ A.3.2 Wishlist
Here is the start of such a list.
- 'LaTeX-add-environments'
+ ‘LaTeX-add-environments’
- 'TeX-add-symbols'
+ ‘TeX-add-symbols’
- 'LaTeX-add-labels'
+ ‘LaTeX-add-labels’
- 'LaTeX-add-bibliographies'
+ ‘LaTeX-add-bibliographies’
- 'LaTeX-largest-level'
+ ‘LaTeX-largest-level’
- * Outline should be (better) supported in TeX mode.
+ • Outline should be (better) supported in TeX mode.
At least, support headers, trailers, as well as
- 'TeX-outline-extra'.
+ ‘TeX-outline-extra’.
- * 'TeX-header-start' and 'TeX-trailer-end'.
+ • ‘TeX-header-start’ and ‘TeX-trailer-end’.
We might want these, just for fun (and outlines)
- * Plain TeX and LaTeX specific header and trailer expressions.
+ • Plain TeX and LaTeX specific header and trailer expressions.
We should have a way to globally specify the default value of the
header and trailer regexps.
- * Get closer to original 'TeX-mode' keybindings.
+ • Get closer to original ‘TeX-mode’ keybindings.
- A third initialization file ('tex-mode.el') containing an emulator
- of the standard 'TeX-mode' would help convince some people to
+ A third initialization file (‘tex-mode.el’) containing an emulator
+ of the standard ‘TeX-mode’ would help convince some people to
change to AUCTeX.
- * Use markers in 'TeX-error-list' to remember buffer positions in
+ • Use markers in ‘TeX-error-list’ to remember buffer positions in
order to be more robust with regard to line numbers and changed
files.
- * Finish the Texinfo mode. For one thing, many Texinfo mode commands
+ • Finish the Texinfo mode. For one thing, many Texinfo mode commands
do not accept braces around their arguments.
- * Hook up the letter environment with 'bbdb.el'.
+ • Hook up the letter environment with ‘bbdb.el’.
File: auctex.info, Node: Bugs, Prev: Wishlist, Up: Development
@@ -8199,30 +8249,30 @@ File: auctex.info, Node: Bugs, Prev: Wishlist, Up:
Development
A.3.3 Bugs
----------
- * The style hooks automatically generated by parsing files for
- 'example.dtx', 'example.sty', 'example.drv' and 'example.bib' all
+ • The style hooks automatically generated by parsing files for
+ ‘example.dtx’, ‘example.sty’, ‘example.drv’ and ‘example.bib’ all
clash. Bad. Clash with hand-written style hooks should be removed
- by dialect discrimination -- to be checked.
+ by dialect discrimination — to be checked.
- * 'C-c `' should always stay in the current window, also when it
+ • ‘C-c `’ should always stay in the current window, also when it
finds a new file.
- * Do not overwrite emacs warnings about existing auto-save files when
+ • Do not overwrite emacs warnings about existing auto-save files when
loading a new file.
- * Maybe the regexp for matching a TeX symbol during parsing should be
- '"\\\\\\([a-zA-Z]+\\|.\\)"' --
+ • Maybe the regexp for matching a TeX symbol during parsing should be
+ ‘"\\\\\\([a-zA-Z]+\\|.\\)"’ —
<thiemann@informatik.uni-tuebingen.de> Peter Thiemann.
- * AUCTeX should not parse verbatim environments.
+ • AUCTeX should not parse verbatim environments.
- * Make '`' check for math context in 'LaTeX-math-mode'. and simply
+ • Make ‘`’ check for math context in ‘LaTeX-math-mode’. and simply
self insert if not in a math context.
- * Make 'TeX-insert-dollar' more robust. Currently it can be fooled
- by '\mbox''es and escaped double dollar for example.
+ • Make ‘TeX-insert-dollar’ more robust. Currently it can be fooled
+ by ‘\mbox’’es and escaped double dollar for example.
- * Correct indentation for tabbing, table, and math environments.
+ • Correct indentation for tabbing, table, and math environments.
File: auctex.info, Node: FAQ, Next: Texinfo mode, Prev: Development, Up:
Appendices
@@ -8234,22 +8284,22 @@ A.4 Frequently Asked Questions
Well, you might have guessed it, the first place to look is in the
available documentation packaged with AUCTeX. This could be the
- release notes (in the 'RELEASE' file) or the news section of the
+ release notes (in the ‘RELEASE’ file) or the news section of the
manual in case you are experiencing problems after an upgrade, the
- 'INSTALL' file in case you are having problems with the
+ ‘INSTALL’ file in case you are having problems with the
installation, the section about bugs in the manual in case you
encountered a bug or the relevant sections in the manual for other
related problems.
If this did not help, you can send a bug report to the AUCTeX bug
- reporting list by using the command 'M-x TeX-submit-bug-report
- <RET>'. But before you do this, you can try to get more
+ reporting list by using the command ‘M-x TeX-submit-bug-report
+ <RET>’. But before you do this, you can try to get more
information about the problem at hand which might also help you
locate the cause of the error yourself.
First, you can try to generate a so-called backtrace which shows
the functions involved in a program error. In order to do this,
- start Emacs with the command line 'emacs --debug-init' and/or put
+ start Emacs with the command line ‘emacs --debug-init’ and/or put
the line
(setq debug-on-error t)
@@ -8264,15 +8314,15 @@ A.4 Frequently Asked Questions
such customizations. You can do this by invoking Emacs with the
following command line, depending on the installation scheme of
AUCTeX and your OS:
- * If you installed AUCTeX from ELPA, use 'emacs -q -no-site-file
+ • If you installed AUCTeX from ELPA, use ‘emacs -q -no-site-file
--eval "(progn (setq package-load-list '((auctex t)))
- (package-initialize))"'. The '--eval' option activates only
+ (package-initialize))"’. The ‘--eval’ option activates only
AUCTeX among all installed EPLA packages.
- * If you installed AUCTeX via traditional 'configure'-'make'
- scheme, use 'emacs -q -no-site-file -l auctex'. The '-l'
- option loads 'auctex.el' which you normally do in your init
+ • If you installed AUCTeX via traditional ‘configure’–‘make’
+ scheme, use ‘emacs -q -no-site-file -l auctex’. The ‘-l’
+ option loads ‘auctex.el’ which you normally do in your init
file.
- * In both above cases, use 'runemacs' instead of 'emacs' on
+ • In both above cases, use ‘runemacs’ instead of ‘emacs’ on
windows.
After you have started Emacs like this, you can load the file
@@ -8285,15 +8335,15 @@ A.4 Frequently Asked Questions
AUCTeX was tested with GNU Emacs 25.1. Older versions may work but
are unsupported.
- 3. What should I do when './configure' does not find programs like
- 'latex'?
+ 3. What should I do when ‘./configure’ does not find programs like
+ ‘latex’?
This is problem often encountered on Windows. Make sure that the
- 'PATH' environment variable includes the directories containing the
+ ‘PATH’ environment variable includes the directories containing the
relevant programs, as described in *note (auctex)Installation under
MS Windows::.
- 4. Why doesn't the completion, style file, or multifile stuff work?
+ 4. Why doesn’t the completion, style file, or multifile stuff work?
It must be enabled first, insert this in your init file:
@@ -8304,32 +8354,32 @@ A.4 Frequently Asked Questions
Read also the chapters about parsing and multifile documents in the
manual. *Note Parsing Files:: and *note Multifile::.
- 5. Why doesn't 'TeX-save-document' work?
+ 5. Why doesn’t ‘TeX-save-document’ work?
- 'TeX-check-path' has to contain "'./'" somewhere.
+ ‘TeX-check-path’ has to contain "‘./’" somewhere.
- 6. Why is the information in 'foo.tex' forgotten when I save
- 'foo.bib'?
+ 6. Why is the information in ‘foo.tex’ forgotten when I save
+ ‘foo.bib’?
For various reasons, AUCTeX ignores the extension when it stores
information about a file, so you should use unique base names for
- your files. E.g. rename 'foo.bib' to 'foob.bib'.
+ your files. E.g. rename ‘foo.bib’ to ‘foob.bib’.
- 7. Why doesn't AUCTeX signal when processing a document is done?
+ 7. Why doesn’t AUCTeX signal when processing a document is done?
- If the message in the minibuffer stays "Type 'C-c C-l' to display
+ If the message in the minibuffer stays "Type ‘C-c C-l’ to display
results of compilation.", you probably have a misconfiguration in
- your init file ('.emacs', 'init.el' or similar). To track this
- down either search in the '*Messages*' buffer for an error message
- or put '(setq debug-on-error t)' as the first line into your init
+ your init file (‘.emacs’, ‘init.el’ or similar). To track this
+ down either search in the ‘*Messages*’ buffer for an error message
+ or put ‘(setq debug-on-error t)’ as the first line into your init
file, restart Emacs and open a LaTeX file. Emacs will complain
loudly by opening a debugging buffer as soon as an error occurs.
The information in the debugging buffer can help you find the cause
of the error in your init file.
- 8. Why does 'TeX-next-error' ('C-c `') fail?
+ 8. Why does ‘TeX-next-error’ (‘C-c `’) fail?
- If 'TeX-file-line-error' is set to nil (not the default), these
+ If ‘TeX-file-line-error’ is set to nil (not the default), these
sort of failures might be related to the the fact that when writing
the log file, TeX puts information related to a file, including
error messages, between a pair of parentheses. In this scenario
@@ -8337,23 +8387,23 @@ A.4 Frequently Asked Questions
log file and counting the parentheses. This can fail when there
are other, unbalanced parentheses present.
- Activating so-called 'file:line:error' messages for the log file
+ Activating so-called ‘file:line:error’ messages for the log file
usually solves this issue, as these kind of messages are are easier
to parse; however, they may lack some details. Activation can be
done either in the configuration of your TeX system (consult its
manual to see where this is) or by simply keeping the variable
- 'TeX-file-line-error' to the default value of non-nil.
+ ‘TeX-file-line-error’ to the default value of non-nil.
- 9. What does 'AUC' stand for?
+ 9. What does ‘AUC’ stand for?
AUCTeX came into being at Aalborg University in Denmark. Back then
the Danish name of the university was Aalborg Universitetscenter;
- 'AUC' for short.
+ ‘AUC’ for short.
File: auctex.info, Node: Texinfo mode, Prev: FAQ, Up: Appendices
-A.5 Features specific to AUCTeX's Texinfo major mode
+A.5 Features specific to AUCTeX’s Texinfo major mode
====================================================
AUCTeX includes a major mode for editting Texinfo files. This major
@@ -8385,12 +8435,12 @@ A.5.1 How AUCTeX and the native mode work together
In a nutshell the split between AUCTeX Texinfo mode, and native Texinfo
mode is as follows:
- * Most of the editing (environment creation, commenting, font command
+ • Most of the editing (environment creation, commenting, font command
insertions) and/or processing commands (e.g. compiling or printing)
which are available in other AUCTeX modes are also handled by
AUCTeX in Texinfo mode.
- * Texinfo-related features (e.g. info node linkage or menu creation)
+ • Texinfo-related features (e.g. info node linkage or menu creation)
rely on the commands provided by the native Texinfo mode. AUCTeX
provides the key bindings to reach these functions, keeping the
same keys as in native Texinfo whenever possible, or similar ones
@@ -8409,81 +8459,81 @@ longer of use.
Insert commands
In the native Texinfo mode, frequently used Texinfo commands can be
- inserted with key bindings of the form 'C-c C-c K' where K differs
- for each Texinfo command; 'c' inserts '@code', 'd' inserts '@dfn',
- 'k' '@kbd', etc.
+ inserted with key bindings of the form ‘C-c C-c K’ where K differs
+ for each Texinfo command; ‘c’ inserts ‘@code’, ‘d’ inserts ‘@dfn’,
+ ‘k’ ‘@kbd’, etc.
- In AUCTeX commands are inserted with the key binding 'C-c C-m'
+ In AUCTeX commands are inserted with the key binding ‘C-c C-m’
instead which prompts for the macro to be inserted. For font
- selection commands (like '@b', '@i', or '@emph') and a few related
- ones (like '@var', '@key' or '@code') there are bindings which
- insert the respective macros directly. They have the form 'C-c C-f
- K' or 'C-c C-f C-K' and call the function 'TeX-font'. Type 'C-c
- C-f <RET>' to get a list of supported commands.
+ selection commands (like ‘@b’, ‘@i’, or ‘@emph’) and a few related
+ ones (like ‘@var’, ‘@key’ or ‘@code’) there are bindings which
+ insert the respective macros directly. They have the form ‘C-c C-f
+ K’ or ‘C-c C-f C-K’ and call the function ‘TeX-font’. Type ‘C-c
+ C-f <RET>’ to get a list of supported commands.
Note that the prefix argument is not handled the same way by
AUCTeX. Note also that the node insertion command from the native
- mode ('texinfo-insert-@node') can still accessed from the Texinfo
+ mode (‘texinfo-insert-@node’) can still accessed from the Texinfo
menu in AUCTeX.
Insert braces
In AUCTeX braces can be inserted with the same key binding as in
- the native Texinfo mode: 'C-c {'. But AUCTeX uses its own function
- for the feature: 'TeX-insert-braces'.
+ the native Texinfo mode: ‘C-c {’. But AUCTeX uses its own function
+ for the feature: ‘TeX-insert-braces’.
Insert environments
The native Texinfo mode does not insert full environments.
- Instead, it provides the function 'texinfo-insert-@end' (mapped to
- 'C-c C-c e') for closing an open environment with a matching '@end'
+ Instead, it provides the function ‘texinfo-insert-@end’ (mapped to
+ ‘C-c C-c e’) for closing an open environment with a matching ‘@end’
statement.
In AUCTeX you can insert full environments, i.e. both the opening
- and closing statements, with the function 'Texinfo-environment'
- (mapped to 'C-c C-e').
+ and closing statements, with the function ‘Texinfo-environment’
+ (mapped to ‘C-c C-e’).
Format info files with makeinfo and TeX
In the native Texinfo mode there are various functions and bindings
to format a region or the whole buffer for info or to typeset the
- respective text. For example, there is 'makeinfo-buffer' (mapped
- to 'C-c C-m C-b') which runs 'makeinfo' on the buffer or there is
- 'texinfo-tex-buffer' (mapped to 'C-c C-t C-b') which runs TeX on
+ respective text. For example, there is ‘makeinfo-buffer’ (mapped
+ to ‘C-c C-m C-b’) which runs ‘makeinfo’ on the buffer or there is
+ ‘texinfo-tex-buffer’ (mapped to ‘C-c C-t C-b’) which runs TeX on
the buffer in order to produce a DVI file.
In AUCTeX different commands for formatting or typesetting can be
- invoked through the function 'TeX-command-master' (mapped to 'C-c
- C-c'). After typing 'C-c C-c', you can select the desired command,
- e.g 'Makeinfo' or 'TeX', through a prompt in the mini buffer. Note
- that you can make, say 'Makeinfo', the default by adding this
+ invoked through the function ‘TeX-command-master’ (mapped to ‘C-c
+ C-c’). After typing ‘C-c C-c’, you can select the desired command,
+ e.g ‘Makeinfo’ or ‘TeX’, through a prompt in the mini buffer. Note
+ that you can make, say ‘Makeinfo’, the default by adding this
statement in your init file:
(add-hook 'Texinfo-mode-hook
(lambda () (setq TeX-command-default "Makeinfo")))
- Note also that 'C-c C-c Makeinfo <RET>' is not completely
- functionally equivalent to 'makeinfo-buffer' as the latter will
+ Note also that ‘C-c C-c Makeinfo <RET>’ is not completely
+ functionally equivalent to ‘makeinfo-buffer’ as the latter will
display the resulting info file in Emacs, showing the node
corresponding to the position in the source file, just after a
successful compilation. This is why, while using AUCTeX, invoking
- 'makeinfo-buffer' might still be more convenient.
+ ‘makeinfo-buffer’ might still be more convenient.
- Note also that in the case of a multifile document, 'C-c C-c' in
+ Note also that in the case of a multifile document, ‘C-c C-c’ in
AUCTeX will work on the whole document (provided that the file
- variable 'TeX-master' is set correctly), while 'makeinfo-buffer' in
+ variable ‘TeX-master’ is set correctly), while ‘makeinfo-buffer’ in
the native mode will process only the current buffer, provided at
- the '@setfilename' statement is provided.
+ the ‘@setfilename’ statement is provided.
Produce indexes and print
- The native Texinfo mode provides the binding 'C-c C-t C-i'
- ('texinfo-texindex') for producing an index and the bindings 'C-c
- C-t C-p' ('texinfo-tex-print') and 'C-c C-t C-q'
- ('tex-show-print-queue') for printing and showing the printer
+ The native Texinfo mode provides the binding ‘C-c C-t C-i’
+ (‘texinfo-texindex’) for producing an index and the bindings ‘C-c
+ C-t C-p’ (‘texinfo-tex-print’) and ‘C-c C-t C-q’
+ (‘tex-show-print-queue’) for printing and showing the printer
queue. These are superseded by the respective commands available
- through 'C-c C-c' ('TeX-command-master') in AUCTeX: 'Texindex',
- 'Print', and 'Queue'.
+ through ‘C-c C-c’ (‘TeX-command-master’) in AUCTeX: ‘Texindex’,
+ ‘Print’, and ‘Queue’.
Kill jobs
- The command 'C-c C-t C-k' ('tex-kill-job') in the native mode is
- superseded by 'C-c C-k' ('TeX-kill-job') in AUCTeX.
+ The command ‘C-c C-t C-k’ (‘tex-kill-job’) in the native mode is
+ superseded by ‘C-c C-k’ (‘TeX-kill-job’) in AUCTeX.
File: auctex.info, Node: Mapping, Next: Unbinding, Prev: Superseding, Up:
Texinfo mode
@@ -8499,35 +8549,35 @@ AUCTeX provides a keybinding.
and interlinking nodes are mapped to same or similar keys in AUCTeX,
while a few insertion commands are mapped to AUCTeX-like keys.
-'@item' insertion
- The binding 'C-c C-c i' for the insertion of '@item' in the native
- mode is mapped to 'M-<RET>' or 'C-c C-j' in AUCTeX, similar to
+‘@item’ insertion
+ The binding ‘C-c C-c i’ for the insertion of ‘@item’ in the native
+ mode is mapped to ‘M-<RET>’ or ‘C-c C-j’ in AUCTeX, similar to
other AUCTeX modes.
-'@end' insertion
- The binding 'C-c C-c e' for closing a '@FOO' command by a
- corresponding '@end FOO' statement in the native mode is mapped to
- 'C-c ]' in AUCTeX, similar to other AUCTeX modes.
+‘@end’ insertion
+ The binding ‘C-c C-c e’ for closing a ‘@FOO’ command by a
+ corresponding ‘@end FOO’ statement in the native mode is mapped to
+ ‘C-c ]’ in AUCTeX, similar to other AUCTeX modes.
Move out of balanced braces
- The binding 'C-c }' ('up-list') is available both in the native
+ The binding ‘C-c }’ (‘up-list’) is available both in the native
mode and in AUCTeX. (This is because the command is not
implemented in either mode but a native Emacs command.) However,
- in AUCTeX, you cannot use 'C-c ]' for this, as it is used for
- '@end' insertion.
+ in AUCTeX, you cannot use ‘C-c ]’ for this, as it is used for
+ ‘@end’ insertion.
Update pointers
- The bindings 'C-c C-u C-n' ('texinfo-update-node') and 'C-c C-u
- C-e' ('texinfo-every-node-update') from the native mode are
+ The bindings ‘C-c C-u C-n’ (‘texinfo-update-node’) and ‘C-c C-u
+ C-e’ (‘texinfo-every-node-update’) from the native mode are
available in AUCTeX as well.
Update menus
- The bindings 'C-c C-u m' ('texinfo-master-menu'), 'C-c C-u C-m'
- ('texinfo-make-menu'), and 'C-c C-u C-a'
- ('texinfo-all-menus-update') from the native mode are available in
- AUCTeX as well. The command 'texinfo-start-menu-description',
- bound to 'C-c C-c C-d' in the native mode, is bound to 'C-c C-u
- C-d' in AUCTeX instead.
+ The bindings ‘C-c C-u m’ (‘texinfo-master-menu’), ‘C-c C-u C-m’
+ (‘texinfo-make-menu’), and ‘C-c C-u C-a’
+ (‘texinfo-all-menus-update’) from the native mode are available in
+ AUCTeX as well. The command ‘texinfo-start-menu-description’,
+ bound to ‘C-c C-c C-d’ in the native mode, is bound to ‘C-c C-u
+ C-d’ in AUCTeX instead.
File: auctex.info, Node: Unbinding, Prev: Mapping, Up: Texinfo mode
@@ -8539,14 +8589,14 @@ The following commands from the native commands might
still be useful
when working with AUCTeX, however, they are not accessible with a key
binding any longer.
-'@node' insertion
- The node insertion command, mapped to 'C-c C-c n' in the native
+‘@node’ insertion
+ The node insertion command, mapped to ‘C-c C-c n’ in the native
mode, is not mapped to any key in AUCTeX. You can still access it
through the Texinfo menu, though. Another alternative is to use
- the 'C-c C-m' binding for macro insertion in AUCTeX.
+ the ‘C-c C-m’ binding for macro insertion in AUCTeX.
Show the section structure
- The command 'texinfo-show-structure' ('C-c C-s') from the native
+ The command ‘texinfo-show-structure’ (‘C-c C-s’) from the native
mode does not have a key binding in AUCTeX. The binding is used by
AUCTeX for sectioning.
@@ -8574,11 +8624,11 @@ Key Index
* ": Quotes. (line 15)
* $: Quotes. (line 61)
-* (: Quotes. (line 154)
-* [: Quotes. (line 154)
+* (: Quotes. (line 168)
+* [: Quotes. (line 168)
* ^: Mathematics. (line 64)
* _: Mathematics. (line 64)
-* {: Quotes. (line 154)
+* {: Quotes. (line 168)
* C-c %: Commenting. (line 23)
* C-c *: Marking (LaTeX). (line 7)
* C-c * <1>: Marking (Texinfo). (line 7)
@@ -8618,7 +8668,7 @@ Key Index
* C-c C-f m: Japanese. (line 117)
* C-c C-k: Control. (line 10)
* C-c C-l: Control. (line 14)
-* C-c C-m: Completion. (line 69)
+* C-c C-m: Completion. (line 79)
* C-c C-n: Parsing Files. (line 45)
* C-c C-o b: Folding. (line 121)
* C-c C-o C-b: Folding. (line 43)
@@ -8661,7 +8711,7 @@ Key Index
* C-c ^: Control. (line 18)
* C-c _: Multifile. (line 71)
* C-c `: Debugging. (line 12)
-* C-c {: Quotes. (line 122)
+* C-c {: Quotes. (line 136)
* C-c ~: Mathematics. (line 12)
* C-j: Indenting. (line 78)
* C-M-a: Environments. (line 107)
@@ -8694,6 +8744,7 @@ Function Index
* indent-region: Indenting. (line 29)
* japanese-latex-mode: Japanese. (line 6)
* japanese-plain-tex-mode: Japanese. (line 6)
+* LaTeX--arguments-completion-at-point: Completion. (line 61)
* LaTeX-add-bibliographies: Adding Other. (line 13)
* LaTeX-add-environments: Adding Environments. (line 66)
* LaTeX-add-labels: Adding Other. (line 16)
@@ -8702,18 +8753,20 @@ Function Index
* LaTeX-CLASSNAME-class-options: Adding Other. (line 107)
* LaTeX-close-environment: Environments. (line 101)
* LaTeX-command-section: Starting a Command. (line 41)
-* LaTeX-declare-expert-environments: Adding Environments. (line 128)
-* LaTeX-env-args: Adding Environments. (line 109)
-* LaTeX-env-array: Adding Environments. (line 81)
-* LaTeX-env-bib: Adding Environments. (line 103)
-* LaTeX-env-contents: Adding Environments. (line 106)
-* LaTeX-env-figure: Adding Environments. (line 77)
+* LaTeX-declare-expert-environments: Adding Environments. (line 143)
+* LaTeX-env-args: Adding Environments. (line 124)
+* LaTeX-env-array: Adding Environments. (line 92)
+* LaTeX-env-bib: Adding Environments. (line 118)
+* LaTeX-env-contents: Adding Environments. (line 121)
+* LaTeX-env-figure: Adding Environments. (line 88)
* LaTeX-env-item: Adding Environments. (line 74)
-* LaTeX-env-label: Adding Environments. (line 85)
-* LaTeX-env-list: Adding Environments. (line 88)
-* LaTeX-env-minipage: Adding Environments. (line 92)
-* LaTeX-env-picture: Adding Environments. (line 100)
-* LaTeX-env-tabular*: Adding Environments. (line 96)
+* LaTeX-env-item-args: Adding Environments. (line 77)
+* LaTeX-env-label: Adding Environments. (line 96)
+* LaTeX-env-label-args: Adding Environments. (line 99)
+* LaTeX-env-list: Adding Environments. (line 103)
+* LaTeX-env-minipage: Adding Environments. (line 107)
+* LaTeX-env-picture: Adding Environments. (line 115)
+* LaTeX-env-tabular*: Adding Environments. (line 111)
* LaTeX-environment: Environments. (line 22)
* LaTeX-fill-environment: Filling. (line 79)
* LaTeX-fill-environment <1>: Filling. (line 90)
@@ -8798,7 +8851,7 @@ Function Index
* TeX-complete-symbol: Completion. (line 23)
* TeX-declare-expert-macros: Adding Macros. (line 272)
* TeX-documentation-texdoc: Documentation. (line 6)
-* TeX-electric-macro: Completion. (line 107)
+* TeX-electric-macro: Completion. (line 117)
* TeX-error-overview: Error overview. (line 10)
* TeX-fold-buffer: Folding. (line 42)
* TeX-fold-clearout-buffer: Folding. (line 120)
@@ -8815,9 +8868,9 @@ Function Index
* TeX-fold-region: Folding. (line 85)
* TeX-font: Font Specifiers. (line 54)
* TeX-home-buffer: Control. (line 17)
-* TeX-insert-braces: Quotes. (line 121)
+* TeX-insert-braces: Quotes. (line 135)
* TeX-insert-dollar: Quotes. (line 60)
-* TeX-insert-macro: Completion. (line 68)
+* TeX-insert-macro: Completion. (line 78)
* TeX-insert-quote: Quotes. (line 14)
* TeX-interactive-mode: Processor Options. (line 29)
* TeX-ispell-skip-setcar: Selecting a Command. (line 147)
@@ -8925,7 +8978,7 @@ Variable Index
* font-latex-math-environments: Fontification of math.
(line 6)
* font-latex-quotes: Fontification of quotes.
- (line 15)
+ (line 14)
* font-latex-script-char-face: Fontification of math.
(line 63)
* font-latex-script-display: Fontification of math.
@@ -8985,7 +9038,7 @@ Variable Index
* LaTeX-default-style: Adding Macros. (line 192)
* LaTeX-default-width: Tabular-like. (line 13)
* LaTeX-done-mark: Sectioning. (line 62)
-* LaTeX-electric-left-right-brace: Quotes. (line 157)
+* LaTeX-electric-left-right-brace: Quotes. (line 171)
* LaTeX-enable-toolbar: Processing. (line 11)
* LaTeX-end-regexp: Indenting. (line 119)
* LaTeX-eqnarray-label: Equations. (line 12)
@@ -9055,7 +9108,7 @@ Variable Index
* TeX-arg-input-file-search <1>: Adding Macros. (line 192)
* TeX-arg-input-file-search <2>: Adding Macros. (line 201)
* TeX-arg-item-label-p: Itemize-like. (line 16)
-* TeX-arg-right-insert-p: Quotes. (line 150)
+* TeX-arg-right-insert-p: Quotes. (line 164)
* TeX-auto-cleanup-hook: Hacking the Parser. (line 100)
* TeX-auto-empty-regexp-list: Parsing Files. (line 94)
* TeX-auto-full-regexp-list: Parsing Files. (line 127)
@@ -9088,18 +9141,18 @@ Variable Index
* TeX-command-list <1>: Starting a Command. (line 32)
* TeX-command-list <2>: Selecting a Command. (line 14)
* TeX-complete-expert-commands: Environments. (line 78)
-* TeX-complete-expert-commands <1>: Completion. (line 142)
+* TeX-complete-expert-commands <1>: Completion. (line 152)
* TeX-complete-list: Completion. (line 26)
* TeX-date-format: Adding Macros. (line 123)
* TeX-debug-bad-boxes: Ignoring warnings. (line 10)
* TeX-debug-warnings: Ignoring warnings. (line 15)
-* TeX-default-macro: Completion. (line 76)
+* TeX-default-macro: Completion. (line 86)
* TeX-default-mode: Japanese. (line 6)
* TeX-default-mode <1>: Japanese. (line 67)
* TeX-dialect: Simple Style. (line 82)
* TeX-display-help: Debugging. (line 47)
* TeX-DVI-via-PDFTeX: Processor Options. (line 22)
-* TeX-electric-escape: Completion. (line 97)
+* TeX-electric-escape: Completion. (line 107)
* TeX-electric-math: Quotes. (line 72)
* TeX-electric-sub-and-superscript: Mathematics. (line 70)
* TeX-engine: Processor Options. (line 104)
@@ -9134,9 +9187,9 @@ Variable Index
* TeX-ignore-warnings: Ignoring warnings. (line 25)
* TeX-indent-close-delimiters: Indenting. (line 133)
* TeX-indent-open-delimiters: Indenting. (line 128)
-* TeX-insert-braces: Completion. (line 117)
-* TeX-insert-braces-alist: Completion. (line 121)
-* TeX-insert-macro-default-style: Completion. (line 80)
+* TeX-insert-braces: Completion. (line 127)
+* TeX-insert-braces-alist: Completion. (line 131)
+* TeX-insert-macro-default-style: Completion. (line 90)
* TeX-install-font-lock: Font Locking. (line 13)
* TeX-interactive-mode: Processor Options. (line 30)
* TeX-ispell-extend-skip-list: Selecting a Command. (line 83)
@@ -9178,6 +9231,7 @@ Variable Index
* TeX-quote-after-quote: Quotes. (line 29)
* TeX-quote-language-alist: European. (line 142)
* TeX-raise-frame-function: I/O Correlation. (line 85)
+* TeX-refuse-unmatched-dollar: Quotes. (line 114)
* TeX-region: Starting a Command. (line 32)
* TeX-region <1>: Starting a Command. (line 65)
* TeX-save-query: Multifile. (line 102)
@@ -9222,7 +9276,7 @@ Concept Index
* \begin: Environments. (line 6)
* \chapter: Editing Facilities. (line 24)
* \chapter <1>: Sectioning. (line 6)
-* \cite, completion of: Completion. (line 154)
+* \cite, completion of: Completion. (line 164)
* \emph: Editing Facilities. (line 78)
* \emph <1>: Font Specifiers. (line 25)
* \end: Environments. (line 6)
@@ -9231,10 +9285,10 @@ Concept Index
* \item: Itemize-like. (line 6)
* \label: Editing Facilities. (line 24)
* \label <1>: Sectioning. (line 6)
-* \label, completion: Completion. (line 154)
+* \label, completion: Completion. (line 164)
* \mathgt: Japanese. (line 113)
* \mathmc: Japanese. (line 117)
-* \ref, completion: Completion. (line 154)
+* \ref, completion: Completion. (line 164)
* \section: Editing Facilities. (line 24)
* \section <1>: Sectioning. (line 6)
* \subsection: Editing Facilities. (line 24)
@@ -9278,7 +9332,7 @@ Concept Index
(line 6)
* ASCII pTeX <1>: Japanese. (line 6)
* auctex.el: Loading the package. (line 10)
-* auctex.el <1>: Changes. (line 868)
+* auctex.el <1>: Changes. (line 881)
* auto directories.: Automatic. (line 6)
* auto-fill-mode: Indenting. (line 29)
* Auto-Reveal: Folding. (line 6)
@@ -9291,9 +9345,9 @@ Concept Index
* biblatex: Selecting a Command. (line 47)
* Bibliographies, adding: Adding Other. (line 6)
* Bibliography: Commands. (line 6)
-* bibliography, completion: Completion. (line 154)
+* bibliography, completion: Completion. (line 164)
* BibTeX: Commands. (line 6)
-* BibTeX, completion: Completion. (line 154)
+* BibTeX, completion: Completion. (line 164)
* book.el: Simple Style. (line 6)
* Braces: Quotes. (line 6)
* Brackets: Quotes. (line 6)
@@ -9307,8 +9361,8 @@ Concept Index
* ChinaTeX: Internationalization.
(line 6)
* chktex: Checking. (line 6)
-* citations, completion of: Completion. (line 154)
-* cite, completion of: Completion. (line 154)
+* citations, completion of: Completion. (line 164)
+* cite, completion of: Completion. (line 164)
* CJK language: Internationalization.
(line 6)
* CJK-LaTeX: Internationalization.
@@ -9434,7 +9488,7 @@ Concept Index
* Labels: Sectioning. (line 111)
* Labels <1>: Floats. (line 32)
* Labels, adding: Adding Other. (line 6)
-* labels, completion of: Completion. (line 154)
+* labels, completion of: Completion. (line 164)
* lacheck: Checking. (line 6)
* Language Support: Internationalization.
(line 6)
@@ -9583,7 +9637,7 @@ Concept Index
(line 252)
* tex-site.el: Loading the package. (line 10)
* tex-site.el <1>: Customizing. (line 6)
-* tex-site.el <2>: Changes. (line 868)
+* tex-site.el <2>: Changes. (line 881)
* tool bar, toolbar: Processing. (line 11)
* Trailer: Commands. (line 6)
* Underfull boxes: Debugging. (line 6)
@@ -9605,105 +9659,105 @@ Concept Index
Tag Table:
-Node: Top917
-Node: Copying7373
-Node: Introduction9318
-Node: Summary9588
-Node: Installation12321
-Node: Prerequisites14294
-Node: Configure16493
-Node: Build/install and uninstall21071
-Node: Loading the package21824
-Node: Advice for package providers23517
-Node: Advice for non-privileged users26322
-Node: Installation under MS Windows31668
-Node: Customizing45290
-Node: Quick Start46875
-Ref: Quick Start-Footnote-148996
-Node: Editing Facilities49090
-Node: Processing Facilities53785
-Node: Editing58514
-Node: Quotes59844
-Node: Font Specifiers68284
-Node: Sectioning70352
-Node: Environments74871
-Node: Equations80252
-Node: Floats80844
-Node: Itemize-like82848
-Node: Tabular-like83674
-Node: Customizing Environments85486
-Node: Mathematics85726
-Node: Completion89162
-Node: Marking96193
-Node: Marking (LaTeX)96817
-Node: Marking (Texinfo)97759
-Node: Commenting99370
-Node: Indenting100695
-Node: Filling108389
-Node: Display114259
-Node: Font Locking116754
-Node: Fontification of macros118833
-Node: Fontification of quotes128513
-Node: Fontification of math130007
-Node: Verbatim content133675
-Node: Faces134449
-Node: Known problems134946
-Node: Folding135943
-Node: Outline146716
-Node: Narrowing147995
-Node: Prettifying149064
-Node: Processing150301
-Node: Commands151629
-Node: Starting a Command152185
-Node: Selecting a Command157201
-Node: Processor Options166320
-Node: Viewing176713
-Node: Starting Viewers177087
-Node: I/O Correlation182737
-Ref: I/O Correlation-Footnote-1188413
-Node: Debugging188663
-Node: Ignoring warnings191281
-Node: Error overview193340
-Node: Checking195248
-Node: Control196864
-Node: Cleaning198973
-Node: Documentation200332
-Node: Customization201047
-Node: Modes and Hooks201540
-Node: Multifile203428
-Node: Parsing Files208162
-Node: Internationalization213151
-Node: European214499
-Node: Japanese221978
-Node: Automatic227042
-Node: Automatic Global229533
-Node: Automatic Private230665
-Node: Automatic Local232001
-Node: Style Files233239
-Node: Simple Style234045
-Node: Adding Macros237766
-Node: Adding Environments247265
-Node: Adding Other251931
-Node: Hacking the Parser256531
-Node: Appendices260520
-Node: Copying this Manual260816
-Node: GNU Free Documentation License261699
-Node: Changes286819
-Node: Development342919
-Node: Mid-term Goals343565
-Node: Wishlist346378
-Node: Bugs352361
-Node: FAQ353441
-Node: Texinfo mode359161
-Node: Exploiting360295
-Node: Superseding361113
-Node: Mapping365344
-Node: Unbinding367179
-Node: Indices368000
-Node: Key Index368163
-Node: Function Index375838
-Node: Variable Index387889
-Node: Concept Index413248
+Node: Top920
+Node: Copying7400
+Node: Introduction9349
+Node: Summary9619
+Node: Installation12368
+Node: Prerequisites14379
+Node: Configure16606
+Node: Build/install and uninstall21348
+Node: Loading the package22105
+Node: Advice for package providers23844
+Node: Advice for non-privileged users26715
+Node: Installation under MS Windows32233
+Node: Customizing46173
+Node: Quick Start47782
+Ref: Quick Start-Footnote-149915
+Node: Editing Facilities50017
+Node: Processing Facilities54907
+Node: Editing59798
+Node: Quotes61136
+Node: Font Specifiers70674
+Node: Sectioning72870
+Node: Environments77567
+Node: Equations83135
+Node: Floats83763
+Node: Itemize-like85807
+Node: Tabular-like86677
+Node: Customizing Environments88571
+Node: Mathematics88811
+Node: Completion92337
+Node: Marking100104
+Node: Marking (LaTeX)100740
+Node: Marking (Texinfo)101690
+Node: Commenting103333
+Node: Indenting104718
+Node: Filling112670
+Node: Display118692
+Node: Font Locking121205
+Node: Fontification of macros123310
+Node: Fontification of quotes133313
+Node: Fontification of math134853
+Node: Verbatim content138629
+Node: Faces139419
+Node: Known problems139924
+Node: Folding140933
+Node: Outline151920
+Node: Narrowing153243
+Node: Prettifying154320
+Node: Processing155607
+Node: Commands156967
+Node: Starting a Command157531
+Node: Selecting a Command162695
+Node: Processor Options172098
+Node: Viewing182771
+Node: Starting Viewers183145
+Node: I/O Correlation188943
+Ref: I/O Correlation-Footnote-1194701
+Node: Debugging194967
+Node: Ignoring warnings197647
+Node: Error overview199758
+Node: Checking201682
+Node: Control203372
+Node: Cleaning205521
+Node: Documentation206968
+Node: Customization207695
+Node: Modes and Hooks208188
+Node: Multifile210148
+Node: Parsing Files214994
+Node: Internationalization220033
+Node: European221387
+Node: Japanese229306
+Node: Automatic234566
+Node: Automatic Global237095
+Node: Automatic Private238233
+Node: Automatic Local239597
+Node: Style Files240871
+Node: Simple Style241685
+Node: Adding Macros245478
+Node: Adding Environments255279
+Node: Adding Other260741
+Node: Hacking the Parser265421
+Node: Appendices269434
+Node: Copying this Manual269730
+Node: GNU Free Documentation License270616
+Node: Changes295940
+Node: Development355332
+Node: Mid-term Goals355980
+Node: Wishlist358879
+Node: Bugs365082
+Node: FAQ366222
+Node: Texinfo mode372096
+Node: Exploiting373232
+Node: Superseding374054
+Node: Mapping378521
+Node: Unbinding380464
+Node: Indices381305
+Node: Key Index381468
+Node: Function Index389143
+Node: Variable Index401413
+Node: Concept Index426845
End Tag Table
diff --git a/preview-latex.info b/preview-latex.info
index 90864ea020..2e8c180cd9 100644
--- a/preview-latex.info
+++ b/preview-latex.info
@@ -1,18 +1,18 @@
-This is preview-latex.info, produced by makeinfo version 6.8 from
+This is preview-latex.info, produced by makeinfo version 7.0 from
preview-latex.texi.
This manual is for preview-latex, a LaTeX preview mode for AUCTeX
-(version 13.1.5 from 2022-10-20).
+(version 13.1.6 from 2022-11-18).
- Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2017-2019, 2021
-Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ Copyright © 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2017-2019, 2021 Free
+Software Foundation, Inc.
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts and no
Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section
- entitled "GNU Free Documentation License."
+ entitled “GNU Free Documentation License.”
INFO-DIR-SECTION Emacs
START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
* preview-latex: (preview-latex). Preview LaTeX fragments in Emacs
@@ -34,11 +34,11 @@ Copying this Manual::.
preview-latex is a package embedding preview fragments into Emacs
source buffers under the AUCTeX editing environment for LaTeX. It uses
-'preview.sty' for the extraction of certain environments (most notably
+‘preview.sty’ for the extraction of certain environments (most notably
displayed formulas). Other applications of this style file are possible
and exist.
- The name of the package is really 'preview-latex', all in lowercase
+ The name of the package is really ‘preview-latex’, all in lowercase
letters, with a hyphen. If you typeset it, you can use a sans-serif
font to visually offset it.
@@ -103,19 +103,19 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: What use is it?, Next:
Activating preview-late
WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) sometimes is considered all the
rage, sometimes frowned upon. Do we really want it? Wrong question.
The right question is _what_ we want from it. Except when finetuning
-the layout, we don't want to use printer fonts for on-screen text
+the layout, we don’t want to use printer fonts for on-screen text
editing. The low resolution and contrast of a computer screen render
all but the coarsest printer fonts (those for low-quality newsprint)
unappealing, and the margins and pagination of the print are not wanted
on the screen, either. On the other hand, more complex visual
-compositions like math formulas and tables can't easily be taken in when
+compositions like math formulas and tables can’t easily be taken in when
seen only in the source. preview-latex strikes a balance: it only uses
graphic renditions of the output for certain, configurable constructs,
does this only when told, and then right in the source code. Switching
back and forth between the source and preview is easy and natural and
can be done for each image independently. Behind the scenes of
preview-latex, a sophisticated framework of other programs like
-'dvipng', Dvips and Ghostscript are employed together with a special
+‘dvipng’, Dvips and Ghostscript are employed together with a special
LaTeX style file for extracting the material of interest in the
background and providing fast interactive response.
@@ -134,10 +134,10 @@ installation.
(load "preview-latex.el" nil t t)
- If you still don't get a "Preview" menu in LaTeX mode in spite of
-AUCTeX showing its "Command", your installation is broken. One possible
-cause are duplicate Lisp files that might be detectable with 'M-x
-list-load-path-shadows <RET>'.
+ If you still don’t get a “Preview” menu in LaTeX mode in spite of
+AUCTeX showing its “Command”, your installation is broken. One possible
+cause are duplicate Lisp files that might be detectable with ‘M-x
+list-load-path-shadows <RET>’.
File: preview-latex.info, Node: Getting started, Next: Basic modes of
operation, Prev: Activating preview-latex, Up: Introduction
@@ -147,12 +147,12 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: Getting started, Next:
Basic modes of operatio
Once activated, preview-latex and its documentation will be accessible
via its menus (note that preview-latex requires AUCTeX to be loaded).
-When you have loaded a LaTeX document (a sample document 'circ.tex' is
+When you have loaded a LaTeX document (a sample document ‘circ.tex’ is
included in the distribution, but most documents including math and/or
-figures should do), you can use its menu or 'C-c C-p C-d' (for
-'Preview/Document'). Previews will now be generated for various objects
+figures should do), you can use its menu or ‘C-c C-p C-d’ (for
+‘Preview/Document’). Previews will now be generated for various objects
in your document. You can use the time to take a short look at the
-other menu entries and key bindings in the 'Preview' menu. You'll see
+other menu entries and key bindings in the ‘Preview’ menu. You’ll see
the previewed objects change into a roadworks sign when preview-latex
has determined just what it is going to preview. Note that you can
freely navigate the buffer while this is going on. When the process is
@@ -163,18 +163,18 @@ signs appear, since that is the moment when the
correlation between the
original text and the buffer locations gets established. If the buffer
changes before that point of time, the previews will not be placed where
they belong. If you do want to change some obvious error you just
-spotted, we recommend you stop the background process by pressing 'C-c
-C-k'.
+spotted, we recommend you stop the background process by pressing ‘C-c
+C-k’.
To see/edit the LaTeX code for a specific object, put the point (the
-cursor) on it and press 'C-c C-p C-p' (for 'Preview/at point'). It will
+cursor) on it and press ‘C-c C-p C-p’ (for ‘Preview/at point’). It will
also do to click with the middle mouse button on the preview. Now you
-can edit the code, and generate a new preview by again pressing 'C-c C-p
-C-p' (or by clicking with the middle mouse button on the icon before the
+can edit the code, and generate a new preview by again pressing ‘C-c C-p
+C-p’ (or by clicking with the middle mouse button on the icon before the
edited text).
- If you are using the 'desktop' package, previews will remain from one
-session to the next as long as you don't kill your buffer.
+ If you are using the ‘desktop’ package, previews will remain from one
+session to the next as long as you don’t kill your buffer.
File: preview-latex.info, Node: Basic modes of operation, Next: More
documentation, Prev: Getting started, Up: Introduction
@@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: Basic modes of operation,
Next: More documenta
============================
preview-latex has a number of methods for generating its graphics. Its
-default operation is equivalent to using the 'LaTeX' command from
+default operation is equivalent to using the ‘LaTeX’ command from
AUCTeX. If this happens to be a call of PDFLaTeX generating PDF output
(you need at least AUCTeX 11.51 for this), then Ghostscript will be
called directly on the resulting PDF file. If a DVI file gets produced,
@@ -193,10 +193,10 @@ first Dvips and then Ghostscript get called by default.
M-x customize-option <RET> preview-image-type <RET>
-The default is 'png' (the most efficient image type). A special setting
-is 'dvipng' in case you have the 'dvipng' program installed. In this
-case, 'dvipng' will be used for converting DVI files and Ghostscript
-(with a 'PNG' device) for converting PDF files. 'dvipng' is much faster
+The default is ‘png’ (the most efficient image type). A special setting
+is ‘dvipng’ in case you have the ‘dvipng’ program installed. In this
+case, ‘dvipng’ will be used for converting DVI files and Ghostscript
+(with a ‘PNG’ device) for converting PDF files. ‘dvipng’ is much faster
than the combination of Dvips and Ghostscript. You can get downloads,
access to its CVS archive and further information from its project site
(https://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/dvipng).
@@ -213,15 +213,15 @@ with
info preview-latex
-or by pressing 'C-h i d m preview-latex <RET>' in Emacs. Once
-preview-latex is activated, you can instead use 'C-c C-p <TAB>' (or the
-menu entry 'Preview/Read documentation').
+or by pressing ‘C-h i d m preview-latex <RET>’ in Emacs. Once
+preview-latex is activated, you can instead use ‘C-c C-p <TAB>’ (or the
+menu entry ‘Preview/Read documentation’).
Depending on your installation, a printable manual may also be
-available in the form of 'preview-latex.pdf'.
+available in the form of ‘preview-latex.pdf’.
Detailed documentation for the LaTeX style used for extracting the
-preview images is placed in 'preview.pdf' in a suitable directory during
+preview images is placed in ‘preview.pdf’ in a suitable directory during
installation; on typical TeX Live-based systems,
texdoc preview
@@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: Contacts, Prev:
Availability, Up: Introductio
1.7 Contacts
============
-Bug reports should be sent by using 'M-x preview-report-bug <RET>', as
+Bug reports should be sent by using ‘M-x preview-report-bug <RET>’, as
this will fill in a lot of information interesting to us. If the
installation fails (but this should be a rare event), report bugs to
<bug-auctex@gnu.org>.
@@ -260,18 +260,18 @@ installation fails (but this should be a rare event),
report bugs to
There is a general discussion list for AUCTeX which also covers
preview-latex, look at <https://lists.gnu.org/mailman/listinfo/auctex>.
For more information on the mailing list, send a message with just the
-word "help" as subject or body to <auctex-request@gnu.org>. For the
+word “help” as subject or body to <auctex-request@gnu.org>. For the
developers, there is the <auctex-devel@gnu.org> list; it would probably
make sense to direct feature requests and questions about internal
details there. There is a low-volume read-only announcement list
-available to which you can subscribe by sending a mail with "subscribe"
+available to which you can subscribe by sending a mail with “subscribe”
in the subject to <info-auctex-request@gnu.org>.
Offers to support further development will be appreciated. If you
want to show your appreciation with a donation to the main developer,
you can do so via PayPal to <dak@gnu.org>, and of course you can arrange
for service contracts or for added functionality. Take a look at the
-'TODO' list for suggestions in that area.
+‘TODO’ list for suggestions in that area.
File: preview-latex.info, Node: Installation, Next: Keys and lisp, Prev:
Introduction, Up: Top
@@ -287,15 +287,15 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: Keys and lisp, Next:
Simple customization, Pr
3 Key bindings and user-level lisp functions
********************************************
-preview-latex adds key bindings starting with 'C-c C-p' to the supported
+preview-latex adds key bindings starting with ‘C-c C-p’ to the supported
modes of AUCTeX (*Note (auctex)Key Index::). It will also add its own
-'Preview' menu in the menu bar, as well as an icon in the toolbar.
+‘Preview’ menu in the menu bar, as well as an icon in the toolbar.
The following only describes the interactive use: view the
-documentation strings with 'C-h f' if you need the Lisp information.
+documentation strings with ‘C-h f’ if you need the Lisp information.
-'C-c C-p C-p'
-'preview-at-point'
+‘C-c C-p C-p’
+‘preview-at-point’
Preview/Generate previews (or toggle) at point
If the cursor is positioned on or inside of a preview area, this
toggles its visibility, regenerating the preview if necessary. If
@@ -303,19 +303,19 @@ Preview/Generate previews (or toggle) at point
surroundings include all areas up to the next valid preview, unless
invalid previews occur before, in which case the area will include
the last such preview in either direction. And overriding any
- other action, if a region is active ('transient-mark-mode'), it is
- run through 'preview-region'.
+ other action, if a region is active (‘transient-mark-mode’), it is
+ run through ‘preview-region’.
-'<mouse-2>'
+‘<mouse-2>’
The middle mouse button has a similar action bound to it as
- 'preview-at-point', only that it knows which preview to apply it to
+ ‘preview-at-point’, only that it knows which preview to apply it to
according to the position of the click. You can click either
anywhere on a previewed image, or when the preview is opened and
showing the source text, you can click on the icon preceding the
source text. In other areas, the usual mouse key action
(typically: paste) is not affected.
-'<mouse-3>'
+‘<mouse-3>’
The right mouse key pops up a context menu with several options:
toggling the preview, regenerating it, removing it (leaving the
unpreviewed text), copying the text inside of the preview, and
@@ -323,8 +323,8 @@ Preview/Generate previews (or toggle) at point
or news article. This is a one-image variant of the following
command:
-'C-c C-p C-w'
-'preview-copy-region-as-mml'
+‘C-c C-p C-w’
+‘preview-copy-region-as-mml’
Copy a region as MML
This command is also available as a variant in the context menu on
the right mouse button (where the region is the preview that has
@@ -336,78 +336,78 @@ Copy a region as MML
If you regenerate or otherwise kill the preview in its source
buffer before the mail or news gets posted, this will fail. Also
you should generate images you want to send with
- 'preview-transparent-border' set to 'nil', or the images will have
+ ‘preview-transparent-border’ set to ‘nil’, or the images will have
an ugly border. preview-latex detects this condition and asks
whether to regenerate the region with borders switched off. As
- this is an asynchronous operation running in the background, you'll
+ this is an asynchronous operation running in the background, you’ll
need to call this command explicitly again to get the newly
generated images into the kill ring.
- Preview your articles with 'mml-preview' (on 'C-c C-m P') to make
+ Preview your articles with ‘mml-preview’ (on ‘C-c C-m P’) to make
sure they look fine.
-'C-c C-p C-e'
-'preview-environment'
+‘C-c C-p C-e’
+‘preview-environment’
Preview/Generate previews for environment
Run preview on LaTeX environment. The environments in
- 'preview-inner-environments' are treated as inner levels so that
- for instance, the 'split' environment in
- '\begin{equation}\begin{split}...\end{split}\end{equation}' is
+ ‘preview-inner-environments’ are treated as inner levels so that
+ for instance, the ‘split’ environment in
+ ‘\begin{equation}\begin{split}...\end{split}\end{equation}’ is
properly displayed. If called with a numeric argument, the
corresponding number of outward nested environments is treated as
inner levels.
-'C-c C-p C-s'
-'preview-section'
+‘C-c C-p C-s’
+‘preview-section’
Preview/Generate previews for section
Run preview on this LaTeX section.
-'C-c C-p C-r'
-'preview-region'
+‘C-c C-p C-r’
+‘preview-region’
Preview/Generate previews for region
Run preview on current region.
-'C-c C-p C-b'
-'preview-buffer'
+‘C-c C-p C-b’
+‘preview-buffer’
Preview/Generate previews for buffer
Run preview on the current buffer.
-'C-c C-p C-d'
-'preview-document'
+‘C-c C-p C-d’
+‘preview-document’
Preview/Generate previews for document
Run preview on the current document.
-'C-c C-p C-c C-p'
-'preview-clearout-at-point'
+‘C-c C-p C-c C-p’
+‘preview-clearout-at-point’
Preview/Remove previews at point
Clear out (remove) the previews that are immediately adjacent to
point.
-'C-c C-p C-c C-s'
-'preview-clearout-section'
+‘C-c C-p C-c C-s’
+‘preview-clearout-section’
Preview/Remove previews from section
Clear out all previews in current section.
-'C-c C-p C-c C-r'
-'preview-clearout'
+‘C-c C-p C-c C-r’
+‘preview-clearout’
Preview/Remove previews from region
Clear out all previews in the current region.
-'C-c C-p C-c C-b'
-'preview-clearout-buffer'
+‘C-c C-p C-c C-b’
+‘preview-clearout-buffer’
Preview/Remove previews from buffer
Clear out all previews in current buffer. This makes the current
buffer lose all previews.
-'C-c C-p C-c C-d'
-'preview-clearout-document'
+‘C-c C-p C-c C-d’
+‘preview-clearout-document’
Preview/Remove previews from document
Clear out all previews in current document. The document consists
of all buffers that have the same master file as the current
buffer. This makes the current document lose all previews.
-'C-c C-p C-f'
-'preview-cache-preamble'
+‘C-c C-p C-f’
+‘preview-cache-preamble’
Preview/Turn preamble cache on
Dump a pregenerated format file. For the rest of the session, this
file is used when running on the same master file. Use this if you
@@ -421,25 +421,25 @@ Preview/Turn preamble cache on
Note that support for preamble cache is limited for LaTeX variants.
c.f. <https://github.com/davidcarlisle/dpctex/issues/15>
- * XeLaTeX cannot use preamble cache at all. The reason is
- intrinsic in XeLaTeX, so preview-latex can't help.
- * LuaLaTeX works with preamble cache only when the preamble is
- simple enough, i.e., when it doesn't load opentype fonts and
- it doesn't use lua codes in preamble.
-
-'C-c C-p C-c C-f'
-'preview-cache-preamble-off'
+ • XeLaTeX cannot use preamble cache at all. The reason is
+ intrinsic in XeLaTeX, so preview-latex can’t help.
+ • LuaLaTeX works with preamble cache only when the preamble is
+ simple enough, i.e., when it doesn’t load opentype fonts and
+ it doesn’t use lua codes in preamble.
+
+‘C-c C-p C-c C-f’
+‘preview-cache-preamble-off’
Preview/Turn preamble cache off
Clear the pregenerated format file and stop using preambles for the
current document. If the caching gives you problems, use this.
-'C-c C-p C-i'
-'preview-goto-info-page'
+‘C-c C-p C-i’
+‘preview-goto-info-page’
Preview/Read Documentation
Read this info manual.
-'M-x preview-report-bug <RET>'
-'preview-report-bug'
+‘M-x preview-report-bug <RET>’
+‘preview-report-bug’
Preview/Report Bug
This is the preferred way of reporting bugs as it will fill in what
version of preview-latex you are using as well as versions of
@@ -447,7 +447,7 @@ Preview/Report Bug
settings. Please use this method of reporting, if at all possible
and before reporting a bug, have a look at *note Known problems::.
-'C-c C-k'
+‘C-c C-k’
LaTeX/TeX Output/Kill Job
Kills the preview-generating process. This is really an AUCTeX
keybinding, but it is included here as a hint. If you are
@@ -460,50 +460,50 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: Simple customization,
Next: Known problems, P
4 Simple customization
**********************
-Customization options can be found by typing 'M-x customize-group <RET>
-preview <RET>'. Remember to set the option when you have changed it.
+Customization options can be found by typing ‘M-x customize-group <RET>
+preview <RET>’. Remember to set the option when you have changed it.
The list of suggestions can be made very long (and is covered in detail
in *note For advanced users::), but some are:
- * Change the color of the preview background
+ • Change the color of the preview background
If you use a non-white background in Emacs, you might have color
artifacts at the edges of your previews. Playing around with the
- option 'preview-transparent-color' in the 'Preview Appearance'
+ option ‘preview-transparent-color’ in the ‘Preview Appearance’
group might improve things. With some settings, the cursor may
cover the whole background of a preview, however.
This option is specific to the display engine in use.
- * Showing '\label's
+ • Showing ‘\label’s
- When using preview-latex, the '\label's are hidden by the previews.
+ When using preview-latex, the ‘\label’s are hidden by the previews.
It is possible to make them visible in the output by using the
- LaTeX package 'showkeys' alternatively 'showlabels'. However, the
+ LaTeX package ‘showkeys’ alternatively ‘showlabels’. However, the
boxes of these labels will be outside the region preview-latex
considers as the preview image. To enable a similar mechanism
- internal to preview-latex, enable the 'showlabels' option in the
- variable 'preview-default-option-list' in the 'Preview Latex'
+ internal to preview-latex, enable the ‘showlabels’ option in the
+ variable ‘preview-default-option-list’ in the ‘Preview Latex’
group.
It must be noted, however, that a much better idea may be to use
the RefTeX package for managing references. *Note RefTeX in a
Nutshell: (reftex)RefTeX in a Nutshell.
- * Open previews automatically
+ • Open previews automatically
The current default is to open previews automatically when you
enter them with cursor left/right motions. Auto-opened previews
will close again once the cursor leaves them again (this is also
done when doing incremental search, or query-replace operations),
unless you changed anything in it. In that case, you will have to
- regenerate the preview (via e.g., 'C-c C-p C-p'). Other options
- for 'preview-auto-reveal' are available via 'customize'.
+ regenerate the preview (via e.g., ‘C-c C-p C-p’). Other options
+ for ‘preview-auto-reveal’ are available via ‘customize’.
- * Automatically cache preambles
+ • Automatically cache preambles
Currently preview-latex asks you whether you want to cache the
- document preamble (everything before '\begin{document}') before it
+ document preamble (everything before ‘\begin{document}’) before it
generates previews for a buffer the first time. Caching the
preamble will significantly speed up regeneration of previews. The
larger your preamble is, the more this will be apparent. Once a
@@ -511,15 +511,15 @@ in *note For advanced users::), but some are:
is changed, and dump a fresh format in that case. If you
experience problems with this, or if you want it to happen without
asking you the first time, you can customize the variable
- 'preview-auto-cache-preamble'.
+ ‘preview-auto-cache-preamble’.
- * Attempt to keep counters accurate when editing
+ • Attempt to keep counters accurate when editing
Since preview-latex frequently runs only small regions through
LaTeX, values like equation counters are not consistent from run to
run. If this bothers you, customize the variable
- 'preview-preserve-counters' to 't' (this is consulted by
- 'preview-required-option-list'). LaTeX will then output a load of
+ ‘preview-preserve-counters’ to ‘t’ (this is consulted by
+ ‘preview-required-option-list’). LaTeX will then output a load of
counter information during compilation, and this information will
be used on subsequent updates to keep counters set to useful
values. The additional information takes additional time to
@@ -527,21 +527,21 @@ in *note For advanced users::), but some are:
all previews at once, and maybe you will be less tempted to do so
when counters appear more or less correct.
- * Preview your favourite LaTeX constructs
+ • Preview your favourite LaTeX constructs
If you have a certain macro or environment that you want to
preview, first check if it can be chosen by cutomizing
- 'preview-default-option-list' in the 'Preview Latex' group.
+ ‘preview-default-option-list’ in the ‘Preview Latex’ group.
If it is not available there, you can add it to
- 'preview-default-preamble' also in the 'Preview Latex' group, by
- adding a '\PreviewMacro' or '\PreviewEnvironment' entry (*note
- Provided commands::) _after_ the '\RequirePackage' line. For
- example, if you want to preview the 'center' environment, press the
+ ‘preview-default-preamble’ also in the ‘Preview Latex’ group, by
+ adding a ‘\PreviewMacro’ or ‘\PreviewEnvironment’ entry (*note
+ Provided commands::) _after_ the ‘\RequirePackage’ line. For
+ example, if you want to preview the ‘center’ environment, press the
<Show> button and the last <INS> button, then add
\PreviewEnvironment{center}
- in the space that just opened. Note that since 'center' is a
+ in the space that just opened. Note that since ‘center’ is a
generic formatting construct of LaTeX, a general configuration like
that is not quite prudent. You better to do this on a per-document
base so that it is easy to disable this behavior when you find this
@@ -554,21 +554,21 @@ in *note For advanced users::), but some are:
in the same directory with your project (*note Package options::).
The usual file for preview-latex preconfiguration is
- 'prauctex.cfg'. If you also want to keep the systemwide defaults,
+ ‘prauctex.cfg’. If you also want to keep the systemwide defaults,
you should add a line
\InputIfFileExists{preview/prauctex.cfg}{}{}
- to your own version of 'prauctex.cfg' (this is assuming that global
- files relating to the 'preview' package are installed in a
- subdirectory 'preview', the default behavior).
+ to your own version of ‘prauctex.cfg’ (this is assuming that global
+ files relating to the ‘preview’ package are installed in a
+ subdirectory ‘preview’, the default behavior).
- * Don't preview inline math
+ • Don’t preview inline math
If you have performance problems because your document is full of
- inline math ('$...$'), or if your usage of '$' conflicts with
- preview-latex's, you can turn off inline math previews. In the
- 'Preview Latex' group, remove 'textmath' from
- 'preview-default-option-list' by customizing this variable.
+ inline math (‘$...$’), or if your usage of ‘$’ conflicts with
+ preview-latex’s, you can turn off inline math previews. In the
+ ‘Preview Latex’ group, remove ‘textmath’ from
+ ‘preview-default-option-list’ by customizing this variable.
File: preview-latex.info, Node: Known problems, Next: For advanced users,
Prev: Simple customization, Up: Top
@@ -590,7 +590,7 @@ newer versions of the problematic software or by simple
patches.
* Black texts are too hard to read on dark background::
If you find something not mentioned here, please send a bug report
-using 'M-x preview-report-bug <RET>', which will fill in a lot of
+using ‘M-x preview-report-bug <RET>’, which will fill in a lot of
information interesting to us and send it to the <bug-auctex@gnu.org>
list. Please use the bug reporting commands if at all possible.
@@ -602,20 +602,20 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: Font problems with
Dvips, Next: Too small boun
Some fonts have been reported to produce wrong characters with
preview-latex. preview-latex calls Dvips by default with the option
-'-Pwww' in order to get scalable fonts for nice results. If you are
+‘-Pwww’ in order to get scalable fonts for nice results. If you are
using antialiasing, however, the results might be sufficiently nice with
-bitmapped fonts, anyway. You might try '-Ppdf' for another stab at
+bitmapped fonts, anyway. You might try ‘-Ppdf’ for another stab at
scalable fonts, or other printer definitions. Use
- 'M-x customize-option <RET> preview-fast-dvips-command <RET>'
+ ‘M-x customize-option <RET> preview-fast-dvips-command <RET>’
and
- 'M-x customize-option <RET> preview-dvips-command <RET>'
+ ‘M-x customize-option <RET> preview-dvips-command <RET>’
in order to customize this.
One particular problem is that several printer setup files (typically
-in a file called '/usr/share/texmf/dvips/config/config.pdf' if you are
-using the '-Ppdf' switch) contain the 'G' option for 'character
-shifting'. This option will result in 'fi' being rendered as '£'
+in a file called ‘/usr/share/texmf/dvips/config/config.pdf’ if you are
+using the ‘-Ppdf’ switch) contain the ‘G’ option for ‘character
+shifting’. This option will result in ‘fi’ being rendered as ‘£’
(British Pounds sign) in several fonts, unless your version of Dvips has
a long-standing bug in its implementation fixed (only very recent
versions of Dvips have).
@@ -629,21 +629,21 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: Too small bounding
boxes, Next: x-symbol inter
The bounding box of a preview is determined by the LaTeX package using
the pure TeX bounding boxes. If there is material extending outside of
the TeX box, that material will be missing from the preview image. This
-happens for the label-showing boxes from the 'showkeys' package. This
-particular problem can be circumvented by using the 'showlabels' option
+happens for the label-showing boxes from the ‘showkeys’ package. This
+particular problem can be circumvented by using the ‘showlabels’ option
of the preview package.
In general, you should try to fix the problem in the TeX code, like
avoiding drawing outside of the picture with PSTricks.
- One possible remedy is to set 'preview-fast-conversion' to 'Off'
+ One possible remedy is to set ‘preview-fast-conversion’ to ‘Off’
(*note The Emacs interface::). The conversion will take more time, but
will then use the bounding boxes from EPS files generated by Dvips.
Dvips generally does not miss things, but it does not understand
-PostScript constructs like '\resizebox' or '\rotate' commands, so will
+PostScript constructs like ‘\resizebox’ or ‘\rotate’ commands, so will
generate rather wrong boxes for those. Dvips can be helped with the
-'psfixbb' package option to preview (*note The LaTeX style file::),
+‘psfixbb’ package option to preview (*note The LaTeX style file::),
which will tag the corners of the included TeX box. This will mostly be
convenient for _pure_ PostScript stuff like that created by PSTricks,
which Dvips would otherwise reserve no space for.
@@ -655,26 +655,26 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: x-symbol interoperation,
Next: Middle-clicks p
===========================
Thanks to the work of Christoph Wedler, starting with version
-'4.0h/beta' of x-symbol, the line parsing of AUCTeX and preview-latex is
+‘4.0h/beta’ of x-symbol, the line parsing of AUCTeX and preview-latex is
fully supported. Earlier versions exhibit problems. However, versions
-before '4.2.2' will cause a drastic slowdown of preview-latex's parsing
-pass, so we don't recommend to use versions earlier than that.
+before ‘4.2.2’ will cause a drastic slowdown of preview-latex’s parsing
+pass, so we don’t recommend to use versions earlier than that.
If you wonder what x-symbol is, it is a package that transforms
various tokens and subscripts to a more readable form while editing and
offers a few input methods handy especially for dealing with math. Take
a look at <http://x-symbol.sourceforge.net/>.
- x-symbol versions up to '4.5.1-beta' at least require an 8bit-clean
+ x-symbol versions up to ‘4.5.1-beta’ at least require an 8bit-clean
TeX implementation (meaning that its terminal output should not use
-'^^'-started escape sequences) for cooperation with preview-latex.
+‘^^’-started escape sequences) for cooperation with preview-latex.
Later versions may get along without it, like preview-latex does now.
- If you experience problems with 'circ.tex' in connection with both
+ If you experience problems with ‘circ.tex’ in connection with both
x-symbol and Latin-1 characters, you may need to change your language
environment or, as a last resort, customize the variable
-'LaTeX-command-style' by replacing the command 'latex' with 'latex
--translate-file=cp8bit'.
+‘LaTeX-command-style’ by replacing the command ‘latex’ with ‘latex
+-translate-file=cp8bit’.
File: preview-latex.info, Node: Middle-clicks paste instead of toggling,
Next: No images are displayed with gs 9.27 and earlier, Prev: x-symbol
interoperation, Up: Known problems
@@ -682,10 +682,10 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: Middle-clicks paste
instead of toggling, Next:
5.4 Middle-clicks paste instead of toggling
===========================================
-This is probably the fault of your favorite package. 'isearch.el' is
+This is probably the fault of your favorite package. ‘isearch.el’ is
known to be affected while searches are in progress, but the code is
such a complicated mess that no patch is in sight. Better just end the
-search with '<RET>' before toggling and resume with 'C-s C-s' or similar
+search with ‘<RET>’ before toggling and resume with ‘C-s C-s’ or similar
afterwards. Since previews over the current match will auto-open,
anyway, this should not be much of a problem in practice.
@@ -702,45 +702,45 @@ and preview-latex can display no images under certain
circumstances.
A new method implemented alternatively works only with Ghostscript >
9.27. If you are using Ghostscript 9.27 or earlier, customize the
-option 'preview-pdf-adjust-color-method'.
+option ‘preview-pdf-adjust-color-method’.
-- User Option: preview-pdf-adjust-color-method
Method to adjust colors of images generated from PDF. It is not
consulted when the LaTeX command produces DVI files.
- When the option is 't' (default), preview-latex adjusts the FG and
+ When the option is ‘t’ (default), preview-latex adjusts the FG and
BG colors of the generated images by the new method. This method
- requires that Ghostscript has working 'DELAYBIND' feature, thus is
+ requires that Ghostscript has working ‘DELAYBIND’ feature, thus is
invalid with gs 9.27 (and possibly < 9.27).
- When it is 'compatible', preview-latex uses traditional method.
+ When it is ‘compatible’, preview-latex uses traditional method.
This option is provided for backward compatibility with older gs.
See the below explanation for detail.
- When 'nil', no adjustment is done and "black on white" image is
+ When ‘nil’, no adjustment is done and “black on white” image is
generated regardless of Emacs color. This is provided for fallback
for gs 9.27 users with customized foreground color. See the below
explanation for detail.
When the LaTeX command produces PDF rather than DVI and Emacs has
- non-trivial foreground color, the traditional method ('compatible')
- makes gs >= 9.27 to stop with error. Here, "non-trivial foreground
- color" includes customized themes.
+ non-trivial foreground color, the traditional method (‘compatible’)
+ makes gs >= 9.27 to stop with error. Here, “non-trivial foreground
+ color” includes customized themes.
If you use such non-trivial foreground color and the version of
Ghostscript equals to 9.27, you have two options:
- 1. Choose the value 'compatible' and customize
- 'preview-reference-face' to have default (black) foreground
+ 1. Choose the value ‘compatible’ and customize
+ ‘preview-reference-face’ to have default (black) foreground
color. This makes the generated image almost non-readable on
dark background, so the next option would be your only choice
in that case.
- 2. Choose the value 'nil', which forces plain "black on white"
+ 2. Choose the value ‘nil’, which forces plain “black on white”
appearance for the generated image. You can at least read
what are written in the image although they may not match with
your Emacs color well.
- The default value used to be 'compatible' for short period before
- Ghostscript 9.50 was released but now is 't'.
+ The default value used to be ‘compatible’ for short period before
+ Ghostscript 9.50 was released but now is ‘t’.
File: preview-latex.info, Node: Black texts are too hard to read on dark
background, Prev: No images are displayed with gs 9.27 and earlier, Up: Known
problems
@@ -749,11 +749,11 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: Black texts are too hard
to read on dark backgr
=======================================================
Unfortunately, foreground color adjustment discussed in the previous
-node doesn't work for XeLaTeX for technical reason. The texts are
-always rendered as black in the preview images, so it's almost
+node doesn’t work for XeLaTeX for technical reason. The texts are
+always rendered as black in the preview images, so it’s almost
impossible to read them on dark background. Hence XeLaTeX users who
like dark background in Emacs frame should customize
-'preview-pdf-adjust-color-method' to 'nil'.
+‘preview-pdf-adjust-color-method’ to ‘nil’.
File: preview-latex.info, Node: For advanced users, Next: ToDo, Prev: Known
problems, Up: Top
@@ -789,24 +789,24 @@ WYSIWYG functionality in the AUCTeX editing environment,
generation of
previews in LyX, as part of the operation of the pst-pdf package, the
tbook XML system and some other tools.
- Producing EPS files with Dvips and its derivatives using the '-E'
+ Producing EPS files with Dvips and its derivatives using the ‘-E’
option is not a good alternative: People make do by fiddling around with
-'\thispagestyle{empty}' and hoping for the best (namely, that the
+‘\thispagestyle{empty}’ and hoping for the best (namely, that the
specified contents will indeed fit on single pages), and then trying to
guess the baseline of the resulting code and stuff, but this is at best
dissatisfactory. The preview package provides an easy way to ensure
that exactly one page per request gets shipped, with a well-defined
baseline and no page decorations. While you still can use the preview
-package with the 'classic'
+package with the ‘classic’
dvips -E -i
-invocation, there are better ways available that don't rely on Dvips not
+invocation, there are better ways available that don’t rely on Dvips not
getting confused by PostScript specials.
- For most applications, you'll want to make use of the 'tightpage'
+ For most applications, you’ll want to make use of the ‘tightpage’
option. This will embed the page dimensions into the PostScript or PDF
-code, obliterating the need to use the '-E -i' options to Dvips. You
+code, obliterating the need to use the ‘-E -i’ options to Dvips. You
can then produce all image files with a single run of Ghostscript from a
single PDF or PostScript (as opposed to EPS) file.
@@ -846,10 +846,10 @@ several things that other packages may also provide.
The following options are available:
-'active'
+‘active’
is the most essential option. If this option is not specified, the
- 'preview' package will be inactive and the document will be typeset
- as if the 'preview' package were not loaded, except that all
+ ‘preview’ package will be inactive and the document will be typeset
+ as if the ‘preview’ package were not loaded, except that all
declarations and environments defined by the package are still
legal but have no effect. This allows defining previewing
characteristics in your document, and only activating them by
@@ -857,72 +857,72 @@ several things that other packages may also provide.
latex '\PassOptionsToPackage{active}{preview} \input{FILENAME}'
-'noconfig'
- Usually the file 'prdefault.cfg' gets loaded whenever the 'preview'
- package gets activated. 'prdefault.cfg' is supposed to contain
+‘noconfig’
+ Usually the file ‘prdefault.cfg’ gets loaded whenever the ‘preview’
+ package gets activated. ‘prdefault.cfg’ is supposed to contain
definitions that can cater for otherwise bad results, for example,
if a certain document class would otherwise lead to trouble. It
also can be used to override any settings made in this package,
since it is loaded at the very end of it. In addition, there may
- be configuration files specific for certain 'preview' options like
- 'auctex' which have more immediate needs. The 'noconfig' option
+ be configuration files specific for certain ‘preview’ options like
+ ‘auctex’ which have more immediate needs. The ‘noconfig’ option
suppresses loading of those option files, too.
-'psfixbb'
+‘psfixbb’
Dvips determines the bounding boxes from the material in the DVI
file it understands. Lots of PostScript specials are not part of
that. Since the TeX boxes do not make it into the DVI file, but
merely characters, rules and specials do, Dvips might include far
- too small areas. The option 'psfixbb' will include '/dev/null' as
+ too small areas. The option ‘psfixbb’ will include ‘/dev/null’ as
a graphic file in the ultimate upper left and lower right corner of
the previewed box. This will make Dvips generate an appropriate
bounding box.
-'dvips'
+‘dvips’
If this option is specified as a class option or to other packages,
several packages pass things like page size information to Dvips,
or cause crop marks or draft messages written on pages. This
seriously hampers the usability of previews. If this option is
specified, the changes will be undone if possible.
-'pdftex'
+‘pdftex’
If this option is set, PDFTeX is assumed as the output driver.
- This mainly affects the 'tightpage' option.
-'xetex'
+ This mainly affects the ‘tightpage’ option.
+‘xetex’
If this option is set, XeTeX is assumed as the output driver. This
- mainly affects the 'tightpage' option.
-'displaymath'
+ mainly affects the ‘tightpage’ option.
+‘displaymath’
will make all displayed math environments subject to preview
processing. This will typically be the most desired option.
-'floats'
+‘floats’
will make all float objects subject to preview processing. If you
want to be more selective about what floats to pass through to a
- preview, you should instead use the '\PreviewSnarfEnvironment'
+ preview, you should instead use the ‘\PreviewSnarfEnvironment’
command on the floats you want to have previewed.
-'textmath'
+‘textmath’
will make all text math subject to previews. Since math mode is
used throughly inside of LaTeX even for other purposes, this works
- by redefining '\(', '\)' and '$' and the 'math' environment
+ by redefining ‘\(’, ‘\)’ and ‘$’ and the ‘math’ environment
(apparently some people use that). Only occurences of these text
math delimiters in later loaded packages and in the main document
will thus be affected.
-'graphics'
- will subject all '\includegraphics' commands to a preview.
-'sections'
+‘graphics’
+ will subject all ‘\includegraphics’ commands to a preview.
+‘sections’
will subject all section headers to a preview.
-'delayed'
- will delay all activations and redefinitions the 'preview' package
- makes until '\''begin{document}'. The purpose of this is to cater
- for documents which should be subjected to the 'preview' package
+‘delayed’
+ will delay all activations and redefinitions the ‘preview’ package
+ makes until ‘\’‘begin{document}’. The purpose of this is to cater
+ for documents which should be subjected to the ‘preview’ package
without having been prepared for it. You can process such
documents with
latex '\RequirePackage[active,delayed,OPTIONS]{preview}
\input{FILENAME}'
- This relaxes the requirement to be loading the 'preview' package as
+ This relaxes the requirement to be loading the ‘preview’ package as
last package.
DRIVER
- loads a special driver file 'prDRIVER.def'. The remaining options
+ loads a special driver file ‘prDRIVER.def’. The remaining options
are implemented through the use of driver files.
-'auctex'
+‘auctex’
This driver will produce fake error messages at the start and end
of every preview environment that enable the Emacs package
preview-latex in connection with AUCTeX to pinpoint the exact
@@ -934,25 +934,25 @@ DRIVER
You should not specify this option manually, since it will only be
needed by automated runs that want to parse the pseudo error
- messages. Those runs will then use '\PassOptionsToPackage' in
- order to effect the desired behaviour. In addition, 'prauctex.cfg'
- will get loaded unless inhibited by the 'noconfig' option. This
+ messages. Those runs will then use ‘\PassOptionsToPackage’ in
+ order to effect the desired behaviour. In addition, ‘prauctex.cfg’
+ will get loaded unless inhibited by the ‘noconfig’ option. This
caters for the most frequently encountered problematic commands.
-'showlabels'
+‘showlabels’
During the editing process, some people like to see the label names
in their equations, figures and the like. Now if you are using
- Emacs for editing, and in particular preview-latex, I'd strongly
+ Emacs for editing, and in particular preview-latex, I’d strongly
recommend that you check out the RefTeX package which pretty much
obliterates the need for this kind of functionality. If you still
- want it, standard LaTeX provides it with the 'showkeys' package,
- and there is also the less encompassing 'showlabels' package.
+ want it, standard LaTeX provides it with the ‘showkeys’ package,
+ and there is also the less encompassing ‘showlabels’ package.
Unfortunately, since those go to some pain not to change the page
- layout and spacing, they also don't change 'preview''s idea of the
+ layout and spacing, they also don’t change ‘preview’’s idea of the
TeX dimensions of the involved boxes. So if you are using
- 'preview' for determing bounding boxes, those packages are mostly
- useless. The option 'showlabels' offers a substitute for them.
-'tightpage'
- It is not uncommon to want to use the results of 'preview' as
+ ‘preview’ for determing bounding boxes, those packages are mostly
+ useless. The option ‘showlabels’ offers a substitute for them.
+‘tightpage’
+ It is not uncommon to want to use the results of ‘preview’ as
graphic images for some other application. One possibility is to
generate a flurry of EPS files with
@@ -968,7 +968,7 @@ DRIVER
files from a single PostScript file, since Dvips will in that case
leave no bounding box information anywhere.
- The solution is to use the 'tightpage' option. That way a single
+ The solution is to use the ‘tightpage’ option. That way a single
command line like
gs -sDEVICE=png16m -dTextAlphaBits=4 -r300
@@ -976,31 +976,31 @@ DRIVER
-sOutputFile=OUTPUTFILE%d.png INPUTFILE.ps
will be able to produce tight graphics from a single PostScript
- file generated with Dvips _without_ use of the options '-E -i', in
+ file generated with Dvips _without_ use of the options ‘-E -i’, in
a single run.
- The 'tightpage' option actually also works when using the 'pdftex'
+ The ‘tightpage’ option actually also works when using the ‘pdftex’
option and generating PDF files with PDFTeX. The resulting PDF
file has separate page dimensions for every page and can directly
be converted with one run of Ghostscript into image files.
- If neither 'dvips' or 'pdftex' have been specified, the
+ If neither ‘dvips’ or ‘pdftex’ have been specified, the
corresponding option will get autodetected and invoked.
- If you need this in a batch environment where you don't want to use
- 'preview''s automatic extraction facilities, no problem: just don't
+ If you need this in a batch environment where you don’t want to use
+ ‘preview’’s automatic extraction facilities, no problem: just don’t
use any of the extraction options, and wrap everything to be
- previewed into 'preview' environments. This is how LyX does its
+ previewed into ‘preview’ environments. This is how LyX does its
math previews.
- If the pages under the 'tightpage' option are just too tight, you
- can adjust by setting the length '\PreviewBorder' to a different
- value by using '\setlength'. The default value is '0.50001bp',
+ If the pages under the ‘tightpage’ option are just too tight, you
+ can adjust by setting the length ‘\PreviewBorder’ to a different
+ value by using ‘\setlength’. The default value is ‘0.50001bp’,
which is half of a usual PostScript point, rounded up. If you go
- below this value, the resulting page size may drop below '1bp', and
+ below this value, the resulting page size may drop below ‘1bp’, and
Ghostscript does not seem to like that. If you need finer control,
you can adjust the bounding box dimensions individually by changing
- the macro '\PreviewBbAdjust' with the help of '\renewcommand'. Its
+ the macro ‘\PreviewBbAdjust’ with the help of ‘\renewcommand’. Its
default value is
\newcommand \PreviewBbAdjust
@@ -1010,43 +1010,43 @@ DRIVER
This adjusts the left, lower, right and upper borders by the given
amount. The macro must contain 4 TeX dimensions after another, and
you may not omit the units if you specify them explicitly instead
- of by register. PostScript points have the unit 'bp'.
-'lyx'
+ of by register. PostScript points have the unit ‘bp’.
+‘lyx’
This option is for the sake of LyX developers. It will output a
- few diagnostics relevant for the sake of LyX' preview functionality
+ few diagnostics relevant for the sake of LyX’ preview functionality
(at the time of writing, mostly implemented for math insets, in
versions of LyX starting with 1.3.0).
-'counters'
+‘counters’
This writes out diagnostics at the start and the end of previews.
Only the counters changed since the last output get written, and if
no counters changed, nothing gets written at all. The list
- consists of counter name and value, both enclosed in '{}' braces,
+ consists of counter name and value, both enclosed in ‘{}’ braces,
followed by a space. The last such pair is followed by a colon
- (':') if it is at the start of the preview snippet, and by a period
- ('.') if it is at the end. The order of different diagnostics like
+ (‘:’) if it is at the start of the preview snippet, and by a period
+ (‘.’) if it is at the end. The order of different diagnostics like
this being issued depends on the order of the specification of the
options when calling the package.
Systems like preview-latex use this for keeping counters accurate
when single previews are regenerated.
-'footnotes'
+‘footnotes’
This makes footnotes render as previews, and only as their footnote
symbol. A convenient editing feature inside of Emacs.
The following options are just for debugging purposes of the package
and similar to the corresponding TeX commands they allude to:
-'tracingall'
+‘tracingall’
causes lots of diagnostic output to appear in the log file during
- the preview collecting phases of TeX's operation. In contrast to
+ the preview collecting phases of TeX’s operation. In contrast to
the similarly named TeX command, it will not switch to
- '\errorstopmode', nor will it change the setting of
- '\tracingonline'.
-'showbox'
+ ‘\errorstopmode’, nor will it change the setting of
+ ‘\tracingonline’.
+‘showbox’
This option will show the contents of the boxes shipped out to the
- DVI files. It also sets '\showboxbreadth' and '\showboxdepth' to
+ DVI files. It also sets ‘\showboxbreadth’ and ‘\showboxdepth’ to
their maximum values at the end of loading this package, but you
- may reset them if you don't like that.
+ may reset them if you don’t like that.
File: preview-latex.info, Node: Provided commands, Prev: Package options,
Up: The LaTeX style file
@@ -1054,27 +1054,27 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: Provided commands,
Prev: Package options, Up:
6.1.2 Provided commands
-----------------------
-'\begin{preview}...\end{preview}'
- The 'preview' environment causes its contents to be set as a single
+‘\begin{preview}...\end{preview}’
+ The ‘preview’ environment causes its contents to be set as a single
preview image. Insertions like figures and footnotes (except those
included in minipages) will typically lead to error messages or be
- lost. In case the 'preview' package has not been activated, the
+ lost. In case the ‘preview’ package has not been activated, the
contents of this environment will be typeset normally.
-'\begin{nopreview}...\end{nopreview}'
- The 'nopreview' environment will cause its contents not to undergo
- any special treatment by the 'preview' package. When 'preview' is
+‘\begin{nopreview}...\end{nopreview}’
+ The ‘nopreview’ environment will cause its contents not to undergo
+ any special treatment by the ‘preview’ package. When ‘preview’ is
active, the contents will be discarded like all main text that does
- not trigger the 'preview' hooks. When 'preview' is not active, the
+ not trigger the ‘preview’ hooks. When ‘preview’ is not active, the
contents will be typeset just like the main text.
Note that both of these environments typeset things as usual when
preview is not active. If you need something typeset
- conditionally, use the '\ifPreview' conditional for it.
+ conditionally, use the ‘\ifPreview’ conditional for it.
-'\PreviewMacro'
- If you want to make a macro like '\includegraphics' (actually, this
- is what is done by the 'graphics' option to 'preview') produce a
+‘\PreviewMacro’
+ If you want to make a macro like ‘\includegraphics’ (actually, this
+ is what is done by the ‘graphics’ option to ‘preview’) produce a
preview image, you put a declaration like
\PreviewMacro[*[[!]{\includegraphics}
@@ -1083,82 +1083,82 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: Provided commands,
Prev: Package options, Up:
\PreviewMacro[{*[][]{}}]{\includegraphics}
- into your preamble. The optional argument to '\PreviewMacro'
- specifies the arguments '\includegraphics' accepts, since this is
+ into your preamble. The optional argument to ‘\PreviewMacro’
+ specifies the arguments ‘\includegraphics’ accepts, since this is
necessary information for properly ending the preview box. Note
that if you are using the more readable form, you have to enclose
- the argument in a '[{' and '}]' pair. The inner braces are
- necessary to stop any included '[]' pairs from prematurely ending
- the optional argument, and to make a single '{}' denoting an
- optional argument not get stripped away by TeX's argument parsing.
+ the argument in a ‘[{’ and ‘}]’ pair. The inner braces are
+ necessary to stop any included ‘[]’ pairs from prematurely ending
+ the optional argument, and to make a single ‘{}’ denoting an
+ optional argument not get stripped away by TeX’s argument parsing.
The letters simply mean
- '*'
- indicates an optional '*' modifier, as in '\includegraphics*'.
- '['
+ ‘*’
+ indicates an optional ‘*’ modifier, as in ‘\includegraphics*’.
+ ‘[’
indicates an optional argument in brackets. This syntax is
somewhat baroque, but brief.
- '[]'
+ ‘[]’
also indicates an optional argument in brackets. Be sure to
have encluded the entire optional argument specification in an
additional pair of braces as described above.
- '!'
+ ‘!’
indicates a mandatory argument.
- '{}'
+ ‘{}’
indicates the same. Again, be sure to have that additional
level of braces around the whole argument specification.
- '?'DELIMITER{TRUE CASE}{FALSE CASE}
+ ‘?’DELIMITER{TRUE CASE}{FALSE CASE}
is a conditional. The next character is checked against being
equal to DELIMITER. If it is, the specification TRUE CASE is
used for the further parsing, otherwise FALSE CASE will be
employed. In neither case is something consumed from the
input, so {TRUE CASE} will still have to deal with the
upcoming delimiter.
- '@'{LITERAL SEQUENCE}
+ ‘@’{LITERAL SEQUENCE}
will insert the given sequence literally into the executed
call of the command.
- '-'
+ ‘-’
will just drop the next token. It will probably be most often
- used in the true branch of a '?' specification.
- '#'{ARGUMENT}{REPLACEMENT}
+ used in the true branch of a ‘?’ specification.
+ ‘#’{ARGUMENT}{REPLACEMENT}
is a transformation rule that calls a macro with the given
argument and replacement text on the rest of the argument
list. The replacement is used in the executed call of the
command. This can be used for parsing arbitrary constructs.
- For example, the '[]' option could manually be implemented
- with the option string '?[{#{[#1]}{[{#1}]}}{}'. PStricks
+ For example, the ‘[]’ option could manually be implemented
+ with the option string ‘?[{#{[#1]}{[{#1}]}}{}’. PStricks
users might enjoy this sort of flexibility.
- ':'{ARGUMENT}{REPLACEMENT}
- is again a transformation rule. As opposed to '#', however,
- the result of the transformation is parsed again. You'll
+ ‘:’{ARGUMENT}{REPLACEMENT}
+ is again a transformation rule. As opposed to ‘#’, however,
+ the result of the transformation is parsed again. You’ll
rarely need this.
There is a second optional argument in brackets that can be used to
declare any default action to be taken instead. This is mostly for
the sake of macros that influence numbering: you would want to keep
- their effects in that respect. The default action should use '#1'
+ their effects in that respect. The default action should use ‘#1’
for referring to the original (not the patched) command with the
parsed options appended. Not specifying a second optional argument
- here is equivalent to specifying '[#1]'.
+ here is equivalent to specifying ‘[#1]’.
-'\PreviewMacro*'
- A similar invocation '\PreviewMacro*' simply throws the macro and
+‘\PreviewMacro*’
+ A similar invocation ‘\PreviewMacro*’ simply throws the macro and
all of its arguments declared in the manner above away. This is
- mostly useful for having things like '\footnote' not do their magic
- on their arguments. More often than not, you don't want to declare
- any arguments to scan to '\PreviewMacro*' since you would want the
+ mostly useful for having things like ‘\footnote’ not do their magic
+ on their arguments. More often than not, you don’t want to declare
+ any arguments to scan to ‘\PreviewMacro*’ since you would want the
remaining arguments to be treated as usual text and typeset in that
manner instead of being thrown away. An exception might be, say,
- sort keys for '\cite'.
+ sort keys for ‘\cite’.
A second optional argument in brackets can be used to declare any
default action to be taken instead. This is for the sake of macros
that influence numbering: you would want to keep their effects in
- that respect. The default action might use '#1' for referring to
+ that respect. The default action might use ‘#1’ for referring to
the original (not the patched) command with the parsed options
appended. Not specifying a second optional argument here is
- equivalent to specifying '[]' since the command usually gets thrown
+ equivalent to specifying ‘[]’ since the command usually gets thrown
away.
As an example for using this argument, you might want to specify
@@ -1170,14 +1170,14 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: Provided commands,
Prev: Package options, Up:
the numbering scheme. That way the real argument for the footnote
remains for processing by preview-latex.
-'\PreviewEnvironment'
- The macro '\PreviewEnvironment' works just as '\PreviewMacro' does,
+‘\PreviewEnvironment’
+ The macro ‘\PreviewEnvironment’ works just as ‘\PreviewMacro’ does,
only for environments.
-'\PreviewEnvironment*'
- And the same goes for '\PreviewEnvironment*' as compared to
- '\PreviewMacro*'.
+‘\PreviewEnvironment*’
+ And the same goes for ‘\PreviewEnvironment*’ as compared to
+ ‘\PreviewMacro*’.
-'\PreviewSnarfEnvironment'
+‘\PreviewSnarfEnvironment’
This macro does not typeset the original environment inside of a
preview box, but instead typesets just the contents of the original
environment inside of the preview box, leaving nothing for the
@@ -1189,19 +1189,19 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: Provided commands,
Prev: Package options, Up:
2. complain with an error message about not being in outer par
mode.
-'\PreviewOpen'
-'\PreviewClose'
+‘\PreviewOpen’
+‘\PreviewClose’
Those Macros form a matched preview pair. This is for macros that
- behave similar as '\begin' and '\end' of an environment. It is
- essential for the operation of '\PreviewOpen' that the macro
+ behave similar as ‘\begin’ and ‘\end’ of an environment. It is
+ essential for the operation of ‘\PreviewOpen’ that the macro
treated with it will open an additional group even when the preview
- falls inside of another preview or inside of a 'nopreview'
- environment. Similarly, the macro treated with '\PreviewClose'
+ falls inside of another preview or inside of a ‘nopreview’
+ environment. Similarly, the macro treated with ‘\PreviewClose’
will close an environment even when inactive.
-'\ifPreview'
- In case you need to know whether 'preview' is active, you can use
- the conditional '\ifPreview' together with '\else' and '\fi'.
+‘\ifPreview’
+ In case you need to know whether ‘preview’ is active, you can use
+ the conditional ‘\ifPreview’ together with ‘\else’ and ‘\fi’.
File: preview-latex.info, Node: The Emacs interface, Next: The preview
images, Prev: The LaTeX style file, Up: For advanced users
@@ -1209,14 +1209,14 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: The Emacs interface,
Next: The preview images,
6.2 The Emacs interface
=======================
-You can use 'M-x customize-group <RET> preview-latex <RET>' in order to
+You can use ‘M-x customize-group <RET> preview-latex <RET>’ in order to
customize these variables, or use the menus for it. We explain the
various available options together with explaining how they work
together in making preview-latex work as intended.
-'preview-LaTeX-command'
+‘preview-LaTeX-command’
When you generate previews on a buffer or a region, the command in
- 'preview-LaTeX-command' gets run (that variable should only be
+ ‘preview-LaTeX-command’ gets run (that variable should only be
changed with Customize since its structure is somewhat peculiar,
though expressive). As usual with AUCTeX, you can continue working
while this is going on. It is not a good idea to change the file
@@ -1228,112 +1228,112 @@ together in making preview-latex work as intended.
various previews is located exactly. The parsing takes a moment
and will render Emacs busy.
-'preview-LaTeX-command-replacements'
+‘preview-LaTeX-command-replacements’
This variable specifies transformations to be used before calling
- the configured command. One possibility is to have '\pdfoutput=0 '
- appended to every command starting with 'pdf'. This particular
+ the configured command. One possibility is to have ‘\pdfoutput=0 ’
+ appended to every command starting with ‘pdf’. This particular
setting is available as the shortcut
- 'preview-LaTeX-disable-pdfoutput'. Since preview-latex can work
+ ‘preview-LaTeX-disable-pdfoutput’. Since preview-latex can work
with PDF files by now, there is little incentive for using this
option, anymore (for projects not requiring PDF output, the added
- speed of 'dvipng' might make this somewhat attractive).
+ speed of ‘dvipng’ might make this somewhat attractive).
-'preview-required-option-list'
- 'preview-LaTeX-command' uses 'preview-required-option-list' in
- order to pass options such as 'auctex', 'active' and 'dvips' to the
- 'preview' package. This means that the user need (and should) not
+‘preview-required-option-list’
+ ‘preview-LaTeX-command’ uses ‘preview-required-option-list’ in
+ order to pass options such as ‘auctex’, ‘active’ and ‘dvips’ to the
+ ‘preview’ package. This means that the user need (and should) not
supply these in the document itself in case he wants to be able to
still compile his document without it turning into an incoherent
mass of little pictures. These options even get passed in when the
- user loads 'preview' explicitly in his document.
+ user loads ‘preview’ explicitly in his document.
- The default includes an option 'counters' that is controlled by the
+ The default includes an option ‘counters’ that is controlled by the
boolean variable
-'preview-preserve-counters'
- This option will cause the 'preview' package to emit information
+‘preview-preserve-counters’
+ This option will cause the ‘preview’ package to emit information
that will assist in keeping things like equation counters and
section numbers reasonably correct even when you are regenerating
only single previews.
-'preview-default-option-list'
-'preview-default-preamble'
- If the document does not call in the package 'preview' itself (via
- '\usepackage') in the preamble, the preview package is loaded using
- default options from 'preview-default-option-list' and additional
- commands specified in 'preview-default-preamble'.
+‘preview-default-option-list’
+‘preview-default-preamble’
+ If the document does not call in the package ‘preview’ itself (via
+ ‘\usepackage’) in the preamble, the preview package is loaded using
+ default options from ‘preview-default-option-list’ and additional
+ commands specified in ‘preview-default-preamble’.
-'preview-fast-conversion'
- This is relevant only for DVI mode. It defaults to 'On' and
+‘preview-fast-conversion’
+ This is relevant only for DVI mode. It defaults to ‘On’ and
results in the whole document being processed as one large
PostScript file from which the single images are extracted with the
help of parsing the PostScript for use of so-called DSC comments.
The bounding boxes are extracted with the help of TeX instead of
getting them from Dvips. If you are experiencing bounding box
- problems, try setting this option to 'Off'.
+ problems, try setting this option to ‘Off’.
-'preview-prefer-TeX-bb'
- If this option is 'On', it tells preview-latex never to try to
+‘preview-prefer-TeX-bb’
+ If this option is ‘On’, it tells preview-latex never to try to
extract bounding boxes from the bounding box comments of EPS files,
but rather rely on the boxes it gets from TeX. If you activated
- 'preview-fast-conversion', this is done, anyhow, since there are no
+ ‘preview-fast-conversion’, this is done, anyhow, since there are no
EPS files from which to read this information. The option defaults
- to 'Off', simply because about the only conceivable reason to
- switch off 'preview-fast-conversion' would be that you have some
- bounding box problem and want to get Dvips' angle on that matter.
-
-'preview-scale-function'
-'preview-reference-face'
-'preview-document-pt-list'
-'preview-default-document-pt'
- 'preview-scale-function' determines by what factor images should be
+ to ‘Off’, simply because about the only conceivable reason to
+ switch off ‘preview-fast-conversion’ would be that you have some
+ bounding box problem and want to get Dvips’ angle on that matter.
+
+‘preview-scale-function’
+‘preview-reference-face’
+‘preview-document-pt-list’
+‘preview-default-document-pt’
+ ‘preview-scale-function’ determines by what factor images should be
scaled when appearing on the screen. If you specify a numerical
value here, the physical size on the screen will be that of the
original paper output scaled by the specified factor, at least if
- Emacs' information about screen size and resolution are correct.
- The default is to let 'preview-scale-from-face' determine the scale
+ Emacs’ information about screen size and resolution are correct.
+ The default is to let ‘preview-scale-from-face’ determine the scale
function. This function determines the scale factor by making the
size of the default font in the document match that of the
on-screen fonts.
The size of the screen fonts is deduced from the font
- 'preview-reference-face' (usually the default face used for
+ ‘preview-reference-face’ (usually the default face used for
display), the size of the default font for the document is
- determined by calling 'preview-document-pt'. This function
- consults the members of 'preview-document-pt-list' in turn until it
+ determined by calling ‘preview-document-pt’. This function
+ consults the members of ‘preview-document-pt-list’ in turn until it
gets the desired information. The default consults first
- 'preview-parsed-font-size', then calls 'preview-auctex-font-size'
- which asks AUCTeX about any size specification like '12pt' to the
+ ‘preview-parsed-font-size’, then calls ‘preview-auctex-font-size’
+ which asks AUCTeX about any size specification like ‘12pt’ to the
documentclass that it might have detected when parsing the
document, and finally reverts to just assuming
- 'preview-default-document-pt' as the size used in the document
+ ‘preview-default-document-pt’ as the size used in the document
(defaulting to 10pt).
If you find that the size of previews and the other Emacs display
- clashes, something goes wrong. 'preview-parsed-font-size' is
- determined at '\begin{document}' time; if the default font size
+ clashes, something goes wrong. ‘preview-parsed-font-size’ is
+ determined at ‘\begin{document}’ time; if the default font size
changes after that, it will not get reported. If you have an
- outdated version of 'preview.sty' in your path, the size might not
+ outdated version of ‘preview.sty’ in your path, the size might not
be reported at all. If in this case AUCTeX is unable to find a
size specification, and if you are using a document class with a
- different default value (like 'KomaScript'), the default fallback
+ different default value (like ‘KomaScript’), the default fallback
assumption will probably be wrong and preview-latex will scale up
things too large. So better specify those size options even when
you know that LaTeX does not need them: preview-latex might benefit
from them. Another possibility for error is that you have not
- enabled AUCTeX's document parsing options. The fallback method of
+ enabled AUCTeX’s document parsing options. The fallback method of
asking AUCTeX about the size might be disabled in future versions
of preview-latex since in general it is more reliable to get this
information from the LaTeX run itself.
-'preview-fast-dvips-command'
-'preview-dvips-command'
+‘preview-fast-dvips-command’
+‘preview-dvips-command’
The regular command for turning a DVI file into a single PostScript
- file is 'preview-fast-dvips-command', while 'preview-dvips-command'
+ file is ‘preview-fast-dvips-command’, while ‘preview-dvips-command’
is used for cranking out a DVI file where every preview is in a
separate EPS file. Which of the two commands gets used depends on
- the setting of 'preview-fast-conversion'. The printer specified
- here is '-Pwww' by default, which will usually get you scalable
+ the setting of ‘preview-fast-conversion’. The printer specified
+ here is ‘-Pwww’ by default, which will usually get you scalable
fonts where available. If you are experiencing problems, you might
want to try playing around with Dvips options (*Note
(dvips)Command-line options::).
@@ -1346,25 +1346,25 @@ together in making preview-latex work as intended.
covering the same areas, and then replacing the text in its visual
appearance by a placeholder looking like a roadworks sign.
-'preview-nonready-icon-specs'
+‘preview-nonready-icon-specs’
This is the roadworks sign displayed while previews are being
prepared. You may want to customize the font sizes at which
preview-latex switches over between different icon sizes, and the
ascent ratio which determines how high above the base line the icon
gets placed.
-'preview-error-icon-specs'
-'preview-icon-specs'
+‘preview-error-icon-specs’
+‘preview-icon-specs’
Those are icons placed before the source code of an opened preview
and, respectively, the image specs to be used for PostScript
errors, and a normal open preview in text representation.
-'preview-inner-environments'
+‘preview-inner-environments’
This is a list of environments that are regarded as inner levels of
- an outer environment when doing 'preview-environment'. One example
+ an outer environment when doing ‘preview-environment’. One example
when this is needed is in
- '\begin{equation}\begin{split}...\end{split}\end{equation}', and
- accordingly 'split' is one entry in 'preview-inner-environments'.
+ ‘\begin{equation}\begin{split}...\end{split}\end{equation}’, and
+ accordingly ‘split’ is one entry in ‘preview-inner-environments’.
File: preview-latex.info, Node: The preview images, Next: Misplaced
previews, Prev: The Emacs interface, Up: For advanced users
@@ -1372,20 +1372,20 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: The preview images,
Next: Misplaced previews,
6.3 The preview images
======================
-'preview-image-type'
-'preview-image-creators'
-'preview-gs-image-type-alist'
+‘preview-image-type’
+‘preview-image-creators’
+‘preview-gs-image-type-alist’
What happens when LaTeX is finished depends on the configuration of
- 'preview-image-type'. What to do for each of the various settings
- is specified in the variable 'preview-image-creators'. The options
+ ‘preview-image-type’. What to do for each of the various settings
+ is specified in the variable ‘preview-image-creators’. The options
to pass into Ghostscript and what Emacs image type to use is
- specified in 'preview-gs-image-type-alist'.
+ specified in ‘preview-gs-image-type-alist’.
- 'preview-image-type' defaults to 'png'. For this to work, your
- version of Ghostscript needs to support the 'png16m' device. If
+ ‘preview-image-type’ defaults to ‘png’. For this to work, your
+ version of Ghostscript needs to support the ‘png16m’ device. If
you are experiencing problems here, you might want to reconfigure
- 'preview-gs-image-type-alist' or 'preview-image-type'.
- Reconfiguring 'preview-image-creators' is only necessary for adding
+ ‘preview-gs-image-type-alist’ or ‘preview-image-type’.
+ Reconfiguring ‘preview-image-creators’ is only necessary for adding
additional image types.
Most devices make preview-latex start up a single Ghostscript
@@ -1399,37 +1399,37 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: The preview images,
Next: Misplaced previews,
be on-screen is given higher priority so that preview-latex will
first cater for the images that are displayed. There are various
options customizable concerning aspects of that operation, see the
- customization group 'Preview Gs' for this.
+ customization group ‘Preview Gs’ for this.
- Another noteworthy setting of 'preview-image-type' is 'dvipng': in
- this case, the 'dvipng' program will get run on DVI output (see
+ Another noteworthy setting of ‘preview-image-type’ is ‘dvipng’: in
+ this case, the ‘dvipng’ program will get run on DVI output (see
below for PDF). This is in general much faster than Dvips and
Ghostscript. In that case, the option
-'preview-dvipng-command'
+‘preview-dvipng-command’
will get run for doing the conversion, and it is expected that
-'preview-dvipng-image-type'
- images get produced ('dvipng' might be configured for other image
- types as well). You will notice that 'preview-gs-image-type-alist'
- contains an entry for 'dvipng': this actually has nothing to with
- 'dvipng' itself but specifies the image type and Ghostscript device
- option to use when 'dvipng' can't be used. This will obviously be
+‘preview-dvipng-image-type’
+ images get produced (‘dvipng’ might be configured for other image
+ types as well). You will notice that ‘preview-gs-image-type-alist’
+ contains an entry for ‘dvipng’: this actually has nothing to with
+ ‘dvipng’ itself but specifies the image type and Ghostscript device
+ option to use when ‘dvipng’ can’t be used. This will obviously be
the case for PDF output by PDFLaTeX, but it will also happen if the
DVI file contains PostScript specials in which case the affected
- images will get run through Dvips and Ghostscript once 'dvipng'
+ images will get run through Dvips and Ghostscript once ‘dvipng’
finishes.
- Note for pLaTeX and upLaTeX users: It is known that 'dvipng' is not
- compatible with pLaTeX and upLaTeX. If 'preview-image-type' is set
- to 'dvipng' and (u)pLaTeX is used, 'dvipng' just fails and
+ Note for pLaTeX and upLaTeX users: It is known that ‘dvipng’ is not
+ compatible with pLaTeX and upLaTeX. If ‘preview-image-type’ is set
+ to ‘dvipng’ and (u)pLaTeX is used, ‘dvipng’ just fails and
preview-latex falls back on Dvips and Ghostscript.
-'preview-gs-options'
+‘preview-gs-options’
Most interesting to the user perhaps is the setting of this
variable. It contains the default antialiasing settings
- '-dTextAlphaBits=4' and '-dGraphicsAlphaBits=4'. Decreasing those
- values to 2 or 1 might increase Ghostscript's performance if you
+ ‘-dTextAlphaBits=4’ and ‘-dGraphicsAlphaBits=4’. Decreasing those
+ values to 2 or 1 might increase Ghostscript’s performance if you
find it lacking.
Running and feeding Ghostscript from preview-latex happens
@@ -1449,13 +1449,13 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: Misplaced previews,
Prev: The preview images,
If you are reading this section, the first thing is to check that your
problem is not caused by x-symbol in connection with an installation not
supporting 8-bit characters (*note x-symbol interoperation::). If not,
-here's the beef:
+here’s the beef:
As explained previously, Emacs uses pseudo-error messages generated
-by the 'preview' package in order to pinpoint the exact source location
+by the ‘preview’ package in order to pinpoint the exact source location
where a preview originated. This works in running text, but fails when
preview material happens to lie in macro arguments, like the contents of
-'\emph'. Those macros first read in their entire argument, munge it
+‘\emph’. Those macros first read in their entire argument, munge it
through, perhaps transform it somehow, process it and perhaps then
typeset something. When they finally typeset something, where is the
location where the stuff originated? TeX, having read in the entire
@@ -1473,36 +1473,36 @@ by clicking on them. The default behaviour is thus
somewhat
undesirable.
The solution (like with other preview problems) is to tell the LaTeX
-'preview' package how to tackle this problem (*note The LaTeX style
-file::). Simply, you don't need '\emph' do anything at all during
+‘preview’ package how to tackle this problem (*note The LaTeX style
+file::). Simply, you don’t need ‘\emph’ do anything at all during
previews! You only want the text math previewed, so the solution is to
-use '\PreviewMacro*\emph' in the preamble of your document which will
-make LaTeX ignore '\emph' completely as long as it is not part of a
+use ‘\PreviewMacro*\emph’ in the preamble of your document which will
+make LaTeX ignore ‘\emph’ completely as long as it is not part of a
larger preview (in which case it gets typeset as usual). Its argument
thus becomes ordinary text and gets treated like ordinary text.
Note that it would be a bad idea to declare
-'\PreviewMacro*[{{}}]\emph' since then both '\emph' as well as its
+‘\PreviewMacro*[{{}}]\emph’ since then both ‘\emph’ as well as its
argument would be ignored instead of previewed. For user-level macros,
this is almost never wanted, but there may be internal macros where you
might want to ignore internal arguments.
The same mechanism can be used for a number of other text-formatting
-commands like '\textrm', '\textit' and the like. While they all use the
-same internal macro '\text@command', it will not do to redefine just
+commands like ‘\textrm’, ‘\textit’ and the like. While they all use the
+same internal macro ‘\text@command’, it will not do to redefine just
that, since they call it only after having read their argument in, and
then it already is too late. So you need to disable every of those
commands by hand in your document preamble.
Actually, we wrote all of the above just to scare you. At least all
of the above mentioned macros and a few more are already catered for by
-a configuration file 'prauctex.cfg' that gets loaded by default unless
-the 'preview' package gets loaded with the 'noconfig' option. You can
+a configuration file ‘prauctex.cfg’ that gets loaded by default unless
+the ‘preview’ package gets loaded with the ‘noconfig’ option. You can
make your own copy of this file in a local directory and edit it in case
of need. You can also add loading of a file of your liking to
-'preview-default-preamble', or alternatively do the manual disabling of
-your favorite macro in 'preview-default-preamble', which is customizable
-in the 'Preview Latex' group.
+‘preview-default-preamble’, or alternatively do the manual disabling of
+your favorite macro in ‘preview-default-preamble’, which is customizable
+in the ‘Preview Latex’ group.
File: preview-latex.info, Node: ToDo, Next: Frequently Asked Questions,
Prev: For advanced users, Up: Top
@@ -1510,26 +1510,26 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: ToDo, Next:
Frequently Asked Questions, Prev:
Appendix A ToDo
***************
- * Support other formats than just LaTeX
+ • Support other formats than just LaTeX
plain TeX users and ConTeXt users should not have to feel left out.
While ConTeXt is not supported yet by released versions of AUCTeX,
at least supporting plain would help people, and be a start for
ConTeXt as well. There are plain-based formats like MusiXTeX that
could benefit a lot from preview-latex. The main part of the
- difficulties here is to adapt 'preview.dtx' to produce stuff not
+ difficulties here is to adapt ‘preview.dtx’ to produce stuff not
requiring LaTeX.
- * Support nested snippets
+ • Support nested snippets
- Currently you can't have both a footnote (which gets displayed as
+ Currently you can’t have both a footnote (which gets displayed as
just its footnote number) and math inside of a footnote rendered as
an image: such nesting might be achieved by rerunning preview-latex
on the footnote contents when one opens the footnote for editing.
- * Support other text properties than just images
+ • Support other text properties than just images
- Macros like '\textit' can be rendered as images, but the resulting
+ Macros like ‘\textit’ can be rendered as images, but the resulting
humungous blob is not suitable for editing, in particular since the
line filling from LaTeX does not coincide with that of Emacs. It
would be much more useful if text properties just switched the
@@ -1542,38 +1542,38 @@ Appendix A ToDo
displayed a properly fontified version of the footnote number.
Also, this might make preview-latex useful even on text terminals.
- * Find a way to facilitate Source Specials
+ • Find a way to facilitate Source Specials
- Probably in connection with adding appropriate support to 'dvipng',
+ Probably in connection with adding appropriate support to ‘dvipng’,
it would be nice if clicking on an image from a larger piece of
source code would place the cursor at the respective source code
location.
- * Make 'preview.dtx' look reasonable in AUCTeX
+ • Make ‘preview.dtx’ look reasonable in AUCTeX
- It is a bit embarrassing that 'preview.dtx' is written in a manner
+ It is a bit embarrassing that ‘preview.dtx’ is written in a manner
that will not give either good syntax highlighting or good
indentation when employing AUCTeX.
- * Web page work
+ • Web page work
- Currently, preview-latex's web page is not structured at all.
+ Currently, preview-latex’s web page is not structured at all.
Better navigation would be desirable, as well as separate News and
Errata eye catchers.
- * Manual improvements
+ • Manual improvements
- - Pepper the manual with screen shots and graphics
+ − Pepper the manual with screen shots and graphics
This will be of interest for the HTML and TeX renditions of
the texinfo manual. Since Texinfo now supports images as
well, this could well be nice to have.
- - Fix duplicates
+ − Fix duplicates
Various stuff appears several times.
- * Implement rendering pipelines for Emacs
+ • Implement rendering pipelines for Emacs
The current preview-latex interface is fundamentally flawed, not
only because of a broken implementation. A general batchable and
@@ -1582,36 +1582,36 @@ Appendix A ToDo
current implementation has a rather adhoc flavor and is not easily
extended. It will not work outside of AUCTeX, either.
- * Integrate into RefTeX
+ • Integrate into RefTeX
When referencing to equations and the like, the preview-images of
the source rather than plain text should be displayed. If the
preview in question covers labels, those should appear in the
bubble help and/or a context menu. Apropos:
- * Implement LaTeX error indicators
+ • Implement LaTeX error indicators
Previews on erroneous LaTeX passages might gain a red border or
similar.
- * Pop up relevant online documentation for frequent errors
+ • Pop up relevant online documentation for frequent errors
- A lot of errors are of the "badly configured" variety. Perhaps the
+ A lot of errors are of the “badly configured” variety. Perhaps the
relevant info pages should be delivered in addition to the error
message.
- * Implement a table editing mode where every table cell gets output
+ • Implement a table editing mode where every table cell gets output
as a separate preview. Alternatively, output the complete table
metrics in a way that lets people click on individual cells for
editing purposes.
- * Benchmark and kill Emacs inefficiencies
+ • Benchmark and kill Emacs inefficiencies
Both the LaTeX run under Emacs control as well as actual image
insertion in Emacs could be faster. CVS Emacs has improved in that
respect, but it still is slower than desirable.
- * Improve image support under Emacs
+ • Improve image support under Emacs
The general image and color handling in Emacs is inefficient and
partly defective. This is still the case in CVS. One option would
@@ -1672,9 +1672,9 @@ from.
B.2.3 I have trouble with the display format...
-----------------------------------------------
-We recommend keeping the variable 'preview-image-type' set to 'dvipng'
-(if you have it installed) or 'png'. This is the default and can be set
-via the 'Preview/Customize' menu.
+We recommend keeping the variable ‘preview-image-type’ set to ‘dvipng’
+(if you have it installed) or ‘png’. This is the default and can be set
+via the ‘Preview/Customize’ menu.
All other formats are known to have inconveniences, either in file
size or quality. There are some Emacs versions around not supporting
@@ -1693,7 +1693,7 @@ flavors of Unix: we have reports for HP and Solaris.
MacOS Carbon, and preview-latex is working with them, too.
With Windows, both native Emacs and Cygwin Emacs should work.
-However, it is known that MiKTeX (https://miktex.org/) sometimes doesn't
+However, it is known that MiKTeX (https://miktex.org/) sometimes doesn’t
work with preview-latex. In that case, use TeX Live
(https://tug.org/texlive/) instead.
@@ -1703,7 +1703,7 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: Installation Trouble,
Next: Customization, Pr
B.3 Installation Trouble
========================
-B.3.1 I just get 'LaTeX found no preview images'.
+B.3.1 I just get ‘LaTeX found no preview images’.
-------------------------------------------------
The reason for this is that LaTeX found no preview images in the
@@ -1713,7 +1713,7 @@ document in question.
have not used preview-latex before, you might not know its manner of
operation. One sure-fire way to test if you just have a document where
no previews are to be found is to use the provided example document
-'circ.tex' (you will have to copy it to some directory where you have
+‘circ.tex’ (you will have to copy it to some directory where you have
write permissions). If the symptom persists, you have a problem, and
the problem is most likely a LaTeX problem. Here are possible reasons:
@@ -1728,18 +1728,18 @@ Filename database not updated
An incomplete manual installation
This should not happen if you followed installation instructions.
Unfortunately, people know better all the time. If only
- 'preview.sty' gets installed without a set of supplementary files
- also in the 'latex' subdirectory, preview-latex runs will not
+ ‘preview.sty’ gets installed without a set of supplementary files
+ also in the ‘latex’ subdirectory, preview-latex runs will not
generate any errors, but they will not produce any previews,
either.
-An outdated 'preview' installation
- The 'preview.sty' package is useful for more than just
+An outdated ‘preview’ installation
+ The ‘preview.sty’ package is useful for more than just
preview-latex. For example, it is part of TeX Live. So you have
to make sure that preview-latex does not get to work with outdated
style and configuration files: some newer features will not work
with older TeX style files, and really old files will make
- preview-latex fail completely. There usual is a local 'texmf'
+ preview-latex fail completely. There usual is a local ‘texmf’
tree, or even a user-specific tree that are searched before the
default tree. Make sure that the first version of those files that
gets found is the correct one.
@@ -1750,11 +1750,11 @@ File: preview-latex.info, Node: Customization, Next:
Troubleshooting, Prev: I
B.4 Customization
=================
-B.4.1 How to include additional environments like 'enumerate'
+B.4.1 How to include additional environments like ‘enumerate’
-------------------------------------------------------------
By default, preview-latex is intended mainly for displaying mathematical
-formulas, so environments like 'enumerate' or 'tabular' (except where
+formulas, so environments like ‘enumerate’ or ‘tabular’ (except where
contained in a float) are not included. You can include them however
manually by adding the lines:
@@ -1763,7 +1763,7 @@ manually by adding the lines:
in your document header, that is before
\begin{document}
-In general, 'preview' should be loaded as the last thing before the
+In general, ‘preview’ should be loaded as the last thing before the
start of document.
Be aware that
@@ -1779,19 +1779,19 @@ monolithic block by Emacs, one should really restrict
previews to those
elements where the improvement in visual representation more than makes
up for the decreased editability.
-B.4.2 What if I don't want to change the document?
+B.4.2 What if I don’t want to change the document?
--------------------------------------------------
The easiest way is to generate a configuration file in the current
-directory. You can basically either create 'prdefault.cfg' which is
-used for any use of the 'preview' package, or you can use 'prauctex.cfg'
+directory. You can basically either create ‘prdefault.cfg’ which is
+used for any use of the ‘preview’ package, or you can use ‘prauctex.cfg’
which only applies to the use from with Emacs. Let us assume you use
the latter. In that case you should write something like
\InputIfFileExists{preview/prauctex.cfg}{}{}
\PreviewEnvironment{enumerate}
in it. The first line inputs the system-wide default configuration (the
-file name should match that, but not your own 'prauctex.cfg'), then you
+file name should match that, but not your own ‘prauctex.cfg’), then you
add your own stuff.
B.4.3 Suddenly I get gazillions of ridiculous pages?!?
@@ -1800,9 +1800,9 @@ B.4.3 Suddenly I get gazillions of ridiculous pages?!?
When preview-latex works on extracting its stuff, it typesets each
single preview on a page of its own. This only happens when actual
previews get generated. Now if you want to configure preview-latex in
-your document, you need to add your own '\usepackage' call to 'preview'
+your document, you need to add your own ‘\usepackage’ call to ‘preview’
so that it will be able to interpret its various definition commands.
-It is an error to add the 'active' option to this invocation: you don't
+It is an error to add the ‘active’ option to this invocation: you don’t
want the package to be active unless preview-latex itself enables the
previewing operation (which it will).
@@ -1812,7 +1812,7 @@ B.4.4 Does preview-latex work with presentation classes?
preview-latex should work with most presentation classes. However,
since those classes often have macros or pseudo environments
encompassing a complete slide, you will need to use the customization
-facilities of 'preview.sty' to tell it how to resolve this, whether you
+facilities of ‘preview.sty’ to tell it how to resolve this, whether you
want no previews, previews of whole slides or previews of inner
material.
@@ -1850,7 +1850,7 @@ after the LaTeX run in the run buffer. This merely
indicates that
errors were present, and errors will always be present when
preview-latex is operating. There might be also real errors, so in case
of doubt, look for them explicitly in either run buffer or the resulting
-'.log' file.
+‘.log’ file.
B.5.2 Why do my DVI and PDF output files vanish?
------------------------------------------------
@@ -1880,26 +1880,26 @@ B.6 preview-latex when not using LaTeX
B.6.1 Does preview-latex work with PDFLaTeX?
--------------------------------------------
-Yes, as long as you use AUCTeX's own PDFLaTeX mode and have not messed
-with 'TeX-command-list'.
+Yes, as long as you use AUCTeX’s own PDFLaTeX mode and have not messed
+with ‘TeX-command-list’.
-B.6.2 Does preview-latex work with 'elatex'?
+B.6.2 Does preview-latex work with ‘elatex’?
--------------------------------------------
-No problem here. If you configure your AUCTeX to use 'elatex', or
-simply have 'latex' point to 'elatex', this will work fine. Modern TeX
+No problem here. If you configure your AUCTeX to use ‘elatex’, or
+simply have ‘latex’ point to ‘elatex’, this will work fine. Modern TeX
distributions use eTeX for LaTeX, anyway.
B.6.3 Does preview-latex work with ConTeXt?
-------------------------------------------
-In short, no. The 'preview' package is LaTeX-dependent. Adding support
+In short, no. The ‘preview’ package is LaTeX-dependent. Adding support
for other formats requires volunteers.
B.6.4 Does preview-latex work with plain TeX?
---------------------------------------------
-Again, no. Restructuring the 'preview' package for 'plain' operation
+Again, no. Restructuring the ‘preview’ package for ‘plain’ operation
would be required. Volunteers welcome.
In some cases you might get around by making a wrapper pseudo-Master
@@ -1922,17 +1922,17 @@ Appendix C Copying this Manual
The copyright notice for this manual is:
This manual is for preview-latex, a LaTeX preview mode for AUCTeX
-(version 13.1.5 from 2022-10-20).
+(version 13.1.6 from 2022-11-18).
- Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2017-2019, 2021
-Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ Copyright © 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2017-2019, 2021 Free
+Software Foundation, Inc.
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts and no
Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section
- entitled "GNU Free Documentation License."
+ entitled “GNU Free Documentation License.”
The full license text can be read here:
@@ -1948,7 +1948,7 @@ C.1 GNU Free Documentation License
Version 1.3, 3 November 2008
- Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software
+ Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software
Foundation, Inc. <https://fsf.org/>
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
@@ -1957,14 +1957,14 @@ C.1 GNU Free Documentation License
0. PREAMBLE
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
- functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
+ functional and useful document “free” in the sense of freedom: to
assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
with or without modifying it, either commercially or
noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the
author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not
being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
- This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
+ This License is a kind of “copyleft”, which means that derivative
works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
license designed for free software.
@@ -1985,18 +1985,18 @@ C.1 GNU Free Documentation License
be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice
grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration,
to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The
- "Document", below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member
- of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "you". You accept
+ “Document”, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member
+ of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as “you”. You accept
the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way
requiring permission under copyright law.
- A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
+ A “Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the
Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
modifications and/or translated into another language.
- A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section
+ A “Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter section
of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
- publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
+ publishers or authors of the Document to the Document’s overall
subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could
fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document
is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not
@@ -2005,7 +2005,7 @@ C.1 GNU Free Documentation License
of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position
regarding them.
- The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
+ The “Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose
titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the
notice that says that the Document is released under this License.
If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it
@@ -2013,13 +2013,13 @@ C.1 GNU Free Documentation License
contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify
any Invariant Sections then there are none.
- The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
+ The “Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are
listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
that says that the Document is released under this License. A
Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may
be at most 25 words.
- A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
+ A “Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
represented in a format whose specification is available to the
general public, that is suitable for revising the document
straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed
@@ -2031,7 +2031,7 @@ C.1 GNU Free Documentation License
been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by
readers is not Transparent. An image format is not Transparent if
used for any substantial amount of text. A copy that is not
- "Transparent" is called "Opaque".
+ “Transparent” is called “Opaque”.
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
@@ -2044,23 +2044,23 @@ C.1 GNU Free Documentation License
the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word
processors for output purposes only.
- The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
+ The “Title Page” means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
material this License requires to appear in the title page. For
- works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
- Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
- work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
+ works in formats which do not have any title page as such, “Title
+ Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
+ work’s title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
- The "publisher" means any person or entity that distributes copies
+ The “publisher” means any person or entity that distributes copies
of the Document to the public.
- A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document
+ A section “Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document
whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses
following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ
stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as
- "Acknowledgements", "Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".)
- To "Preserve the Title" of such a section when you modify the
- Document means that it remains a section "Entitled XYZ" according
+ “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, “Endorsements”, or “History”.)
+ To “Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the
+ Document means that it remains a section “Entitled XYZ” according
to this definition.
The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice
@@ -2090,7 +2090,7 @@ C.1 GNU Free Documentation License
If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly
have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and
- the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must
+ the Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts, you must
enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all
these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly
@@ -2162,15 +2162,15 @@ C.1 GNU Free Documentation License
the Addendum below.
G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
- Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
+ Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document’s
license notice.
H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
- I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title,
+ I. Preserve the section Entitled “History”, Preserve its Title,
and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new
authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the
- Title Page. If there is no section Entitled "History" in the
+ Title Page. If there is no section Entitled “History” in the
Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and
publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add
an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the
@@ -2180,12 +2180,12 @@ C.1 GNU Free Documentation License
for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
likewise the network locations given in the Document for
previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the
- "History" section. You may omit a network location for a work
+ “History” section. You may omit a network location for a work
that was published at least four years before the Document
itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers
to gives permission.
- K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
+ K. For any section Entitled “Acknowledgements” or “Dedications”,
Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section
all the substance and tone of each of the contributor
acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.
@@ -2194,11 +2194,11 @@ C.1 GNU Free Documentation License
in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the
equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
- M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements". Such a section
+ M. Delete any section Entitled “Endorsements”. Such a section
may not be included in the Modified Version.
N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled
- "Endorsements" or to conflict in title with any Invariant
+ “Endorsements” or to conflict in title with any Invariant
Section.
O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
@@ -2207,15 +2207,15 @@ C.1 GNU Free Documentation License
appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate
some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their
- titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's
+ titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version’s
license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other
section titles.
- You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
+ You may add a section Entitled “Endorsements”, provided it contains
nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
- parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text
- has been approved by an organization as the authoritative
- definition of a standard.
+ parties—for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
+ been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of
+ a standard.
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of
@@ -2253,10 +2253,10 @@ C.1 GNU Free Documentation License
combined work.
In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled
- "History" in the various original documents, forming one section
- Entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled
- "Acknowledgements", and any sections Entitled "Dedications". You
- must delete all sections Entitled "Endorsements."
+ “History” in the various original documents, forming one section
+ Entitled “History”; likewise combine any sections Entitled
+ “Acknowledgements”, and any sections Entitled “Dedications”. You
+ must delete all sections Entitled “Endorsements.”
6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
@@ -2277,16 +2277,16 @@ C.1 GNU Free Documentation License
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a
- storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the
+ storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the
copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the
- legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual
+ legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual
works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this
License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which
are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half
- of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed
+ of the entire aggregate, the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed
on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic
form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket
@@ -2308,8 +2308,8 @@ C.1 GNU Free Documentation License
this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will
prevail.
- If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
- "Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to
+ If a section in the Document is Entitled “Acknowledgements”,
+ “Dedications”, or “History”, the requirement (section 4) to
Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the
actual title.
@@ -2350,7 +2350,7 @@ C.1 GNU Free Documentation License
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
- version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
+ version of this License “or any later version” applies to it, you
have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
that specified version or of any later version that has been
published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the
@@ -2358,29 +2358,29 @@ C.1 GNU Free Documentation License
choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Document specifies that a proxy can
decide which future versions of this License can be used, that
- proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently
+ proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently
authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
11. RELICENSING
- "Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site" (or "MMC Site") means any
+ “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site” (or “MMC Site”) means any
World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also
provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A
public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server.
- A "Massive Multiauthor Collaboration" (or "MMC") contained in the
+ A “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration” (or “MMC”) contained in the
site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC
site.
- "CC-BY-SA" means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
+ “CC-BY-SA” means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit
corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco,
California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license
published by that same organization.
- "Incorporate" means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or
+ “Incorporate” means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or
in part, as part of another Document.
- An MMC is "eligible for relicensing" if it is licensed under this
+ An MMC is “eligible for relicensing” if it is licensed under this
License, and if all works that were first published under this
License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently
incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover
@@ -2407,7 +2407,7 @@ notices just after the title page:
Free Documentation License''.
If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover
-Texts, replace the "with...Texts." line with this:
+Texts, replace the “with...Texts.” line with this:
with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with
the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts
@@ -2550,44 +2550,44 @@ Index
Tag Table:
-Node: Top959
-Node: Copying2231
-Node: Introduction2685
-Node: What use is it?3359
-Node: Activating preview-latex4748
-Node: Getting started5499
-Node: Basic modes of operation7446
-Node: More documentation8651
-Node: Availability9520
-Node: Contacts10247
-Node: Installation11520
-Node: Keys and lisp11721
-Node: Simple customization18796
-Node: Known problems24458
-Node: Font problems with Dvips25340
-Node: Too small bounding boxes26510
-Node: x-symbol interoperation27906
-Node: Middle-clicks paste instead of toggling29294
-Node: No images are displayed with gs 9.27 and earlier29979
-Node: Black texts are too hard to read on dark background32681
-Node: For advanced users33326
-Node: The LaTeX style file33785
-Node: Package options36347
-Node: Provided commands47251
-Node: The Emacs interface54596
-Node: The preview images63298
-Node: Misplaced previews67055
-Node: ToDo70511
-Node: Frequently Asked Questions75288
-Node: Introduction to FAQ75611
-Node: Requirements75950
-Node: Installation Trouble77918
-Node: Customization80182
-Node: Troubleshooting83258
-Node: Other formats85768
-Node: Copying this Manual87083
-Node: GNU Free Documentation License88029
-Node: Index113152
+Node: Top962
+Node: Copying2242
+Node: Introduction2696
+Node: What use is it?3370
+Node: Activating preview-latex4767
+Node: Getting started5532
+Node: Basic modes of operation7519
+Node: More documentation8752
+Node: Availability9641
+Node: Contacts10368
+Node: Installation11657
+Node: Keys and lisp11858
+Node: Simple customization19137
+Node: Known problems24961
+Node: Font problems with Dvips25847
+Node: Too small bounding boxes27057
+Node: x-symbol interoperation28481
+Node: Middle-clicks paste instead of toggling29905
+Node: No images are displayed with gs 9.27 and earlier30602
+Node: Black texts are too hard to read on dark background33360
+Node: For advanced users34017
+Node: The LaTeX style file34476
+Node: Package options37062
+Node: Provided commands48288
+Node: The Emacs interface55895
+Node: The preview images64859
+Node: Misplaced previews68744
+Node: ToDo72272
+Node: Frequently Asked Questions77109
+Node: Introduction to FAQ77432
+Node: Requirements77771
+Node: Installation Trouble79757
+Node: Customization82049
+Node: Troubleshooting85177
+Node: Other formats87691
+Node: Copying this Manual89040
+Node: GNU Free Documentation License89989
+Node: Index115316
End Tag Table
diff --git a/tex-site.el b/tex-site.el
index 7f887f5d9e..7090cc103e 100644
--- a/tex-site.el
+++ b/tex-site.el
@@ -126,11 +126,11 @@ set it with `TeX-modes-set'."
:set #'TeX-modes-set
:initialize #'custom-initialize-reset)
-(defconst AUCTeX-version "13.1.5"
+(defconst AUCTeX-version "13.1.6"
"AUCTeX version.
If not a regular release, the date of the last change.")
-(defconst AUCTeX-date "2022-10-20"
+(defconst AUCTeX-date "2022-11-18"
"AUCTeX release date using the ISO 8601 format, yyyy-mm-dd.")
;; Store bibitems when saving a BibTeX buffer
| [Prev in Thread] |
Current Thread |
[Next in Thread] |
- [elpa] externals/auctex 945aba3d41: Release GNU AUCTeX 13.1.6,
Tassilo Horn <=